Rohde & Schwarz ZNB20 User Manual Download

Page: 19 / 1332

Contents

R&S

ZNB/ZNBT

User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 38

4 Concepts and Features....................................................................... 75

4.1

Basic Concepts........................................................................................................... 75

4.1.1

Global (Persistent) Settings.......................................................................................... 75

4.1.2

Recall Sets.................................................................................................................... 76

4.1.3

Traces, Channels and Diagrams...................................................................................76

4.1.4

Sweep Control...............................................................................................................78

4.1.5

Data Flow...................................................................................................................... 85

4.2

Screen Elements......................................................................................................... 87

4.2.1

Display Elements of a Diagram.....................................................................................87

4.2.2

Dialogs.......................................................................................................................... 99

4.2.3

Trace Formats.............................................................................................................102

4.3

Measurement Results............................................................................................... 110

4.3.1

S-Parameters.............................................................................................................. 110

4.3.2

Impedance Parameters...............................................................................................113

4.3.3

Admittance Parameters...............................................................................................116

4.3.4

Wave Quantities and Ratios........................................................................................117

4.3.5

Unbalance-Balance Conversion..................................................................................120

4.3.6

Reference Impedances............................................................................................... 125

4.3.7

Stability Factors...........................................................................................................127

4.3.8

Delay, Aperture, Electrical Length...............................................................................128

4.4

Operations on Traces............................................................................................... 128

4.4.1

Limit Check................................................................................................................. 129

4.4.2

Trace Files.................................................................................................................. 134

4.5

Calibration................................................................................................................. 139

4.5.1

Calibration Types........................................................................................................ 141

4.5.2

Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits................................................................. 151

4.5.3

Calibration Pool...........................................................................................................158

4.5.4

Calibration Labels....................................................................................................... 158

4.5.5

Automatic Calibration.................................................................................................. 158

4.5.6

Scalar Power Calibration.............................................................................................166

4.5.7

SMARTerCal............................................................................................................... 172

4.5.8

Parallel Calibration of Multiple Channels.................................................................... 175

4.6

Offset Parameters and Embedding......................................................................... 175

Summary of Contents for ZNB20

Page 1: ...R S ZNB ZNBT Vector Network Analyzers User Manual User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 éÍ2 ...

Page 2: ... variant 72 R S ZNB40 100 kHz to 40 GHz 2 test ports order no 1311 6010 82 variant 82 R S ZNB40 100 kHz to 40 GHz 4 test ports order no 1311 6010 84 variant 84 R S ZNBT8 9 kHz to 8 5 GHz 4 test ports up to 24 ports optional order no 1318 7006 24 R S ZNBT20 100 kHz to 20 GHz 8 test ports up to 24 ports optional order no 1332 9002 24 2017 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Mühldorfstr 15 81671 München Germany...

Page 3: ...se of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained ...

Page 4: ...ration item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided ...

Page 5: ...safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 In the ca...

Page 6: ...st be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage 14 Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock 15 Any object that ...

Page 7: ...e masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions m...

Page 8: ...ackaging until they are ready to be used 4 Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted 5 If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid 6 Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline...

Page 9: ... National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the releva...

Page 10: ...bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales así como la documentación del producto y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas...

Page 11: ...raves o incluso la muerte Indica una situación de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situación de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones leves o moderadas Indica información que se considera importante pero no en relación con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles daños materiales En la documentación del producto se emplea de...

Page 12: ...mentación del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques eléctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad eléctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad eléctrica pueden producirse choques eléctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posibl...

Page 13: ...60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 válidos en cada caso 11 A menos que esté permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto esté en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o daños en el producto 12 Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deberá primero conectar el conductor de p...

Page 14: ... manipulación mecánica y o térmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el capítulo Eliminación protección del medio ambiente punto 1 5 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF pueden a causa de su función natural emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protección de las mujer...

Page 15: ...to a las baterías y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el estándar EN 62133 1 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas 2 Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamien...

Page 16: ... sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminación se debe efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al cliente de Rohde Schwarz 2 Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eli...

Page 17: ...rument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde...

Page 18: ...and Ready State 19 3 1 9 Connecting External Accessories 19 3 1 10 Minimizing the VNA application 22 3 1 11 Changing the Screen Resolution R S ZNBT 23 3 1 12 Remote Operation in a LAN 24 3 2 Instrument Tour 28 3 2 1 Front Panel R S ZNB 28 3 2 2 Front Panel R S ZNBT 34 3 2 3 Rear Panel R S ZNB 36 3 2 4 Rear Panel R S ZNBT 39 3 3 Operating the Instrument 41 3 3 1 Manual Operation 42 3 3 2 Control El...

Page 19: ...13 4 3 3 Admittance Parameters 116 4 3 4 Wave Quantities and Ratios 117 4 3 5 Unbalance Balance Conversion 120 4 3 6 Reference Impedances 125 4 3 7 Stability Factors 127 4 3 8 Delay Aperture Electrical Length 128 4 4 Operations on Traces 128 4 4 1 Limit Check 129 4 4 2 Trace Files 134 4 5 Calibration 139 4 5 1 Calibration Types 141 4 5 2 Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits 151 4 5 3 Calibra...

Page 20: ...ency Reference 213 4 7 9 GPIB Interface 213 4 7 10 Device Control 213 4 7 11 Handler I O Universal Interface 214 4 7 12 RFFE GPIO Interface 214 4 7 13 Additional Removable HD 216 4 7 14 Extended Power Range 216 4 7 15 Receiver Step Attenuators 217 4 7 16 Extended Dynamic Range 218 4 7 17 DC Inputs 219 4 7 18 External Power Meters 222 4 7 19 External Generators 223 4 7 20 External Switch Matrices 2...

Page 21: ...Mode Tab 388 5 6 Trigger Softtool 400 5 6 1 Trigger Tab 400 5 6 2 Sweep Control Tab 405 5 7 Offset Embed Softtool 405 5 7 1 Offset Embed Dock Widget 405 5 7 2 Offset Tab 411 5 7 3 One Way Loss Tab 417 5 7 4 Single Ended Tab 419 5 7 5 Port Sets Tab 421 5 7 6 Balanced Tab 423 5 7 7 Ground Loop Tab 426 5 7 8 Differential Match Tab 427 5 8 Stimulus Softtool 429 5 8 1 Stimulus Tab 430 5 8 2 Power Tab 4...

Page 22: ...Softtool 480 5 12 1 Traces Tab 480 5 12 2 Mem Math Tab 485 5 12 3 All Mem All Data Tab 492 5 12 4 Time Domain Tab 494 5 12 5 Time Gate Tab 498 5 12 6 Trace Statistics Tab 500 5 12 7 Smooth Shift Hold Tab 505 5 12 8 Trace Data Tab 508 5 13 Lines Softtool 514 5 13 1 Limit Test Tab 515 5 13 2 Ripple Test Tab 522 5 13 3 Circle Test Tab 527 5 13 4 Display Circle Tab 529 5 13 5 Horiz Line Tab 531 5 14 M...

Page 23: ...558 5 17 Display Softtool 560 5 17 1 Diagram Tab 560 5 17 2 Split Tab 564 5 17 3 Config Tab 567 5 17 4 View Bar Tab 572 5 17 5 Touchscreen Tab 573 5 18 Applic Softtool 573 5 18 1 External Tools Application 574 5 18 2 TDR Application R S ZNB ZNBT K20 575 5 19 Setup Softtool 602 5 19 1 Setup Tab 603 5 19 2 Freq Ref Tab 616 5 19 3 Remote Settings Tab 617 5 19 4 External Devices Tab 620 5 19 5 Externa...

Page 24: ...g 657 6 4 1 Input Unit 658 6 4 2 Command Recognition 658 6 4 3 Data Base and Instrument Hardware 658 6 4 4 Status Reporting System 659 6 4 5 Output Unit 659 6 4 6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization 659 6 5 Status Reporting System 661 6 5 1 Overview of Status Registers 662 6 5 2 Structure of an SCPI Status Register 662 6 5 3 Contents of the Status Registers 664 6 5 4 Application of the St...

Page 25: ... 3 16 SOURce Commands 1089 7 3 17 STATus Commands 1135 7 3 18 SYSTem Commands 1138 7 3 19 TRACe Commands 1174 7 3 20 TRIGger Commands 1177 7 4 R S ZVR ZVAB Compatible Commands 1184 8 Programming Examples 1208 8 1 Basic Tasks 1208 8 1 1 Typical Stages of a Remote Control Program 1208 8 1 2 Channel Trace and Diagram Handling 1211 8 2 Condensed Programming Examples 1217 8 2 1 Path Independent RC Prog...

Page 26: ...1 1 Windows Operating System 1250 10 1 2 Firmware Update 1251 10 2 Interfaces and Connectors 1251 10 2 1 Rear Panel Connectors 1252 10 2 2 LAN Interface 1254 10 2 3 GPIB Interface 1254 10 2 4 Handler I O Universal Interface 1257 10 2 5 RFFE GPIO Interface 1265 10 3 Maintenance 1268 10 3 1 Cleaning 1268 10 3 2 Storing and Packing the Instrument 1269 10 3 3 Replacing Fuses 1269 10 4 Showroom Mode 12...

Page 27: ...Contents R S ZNB ZNBT 12 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 ...

Page 28: ...ent of the Getting Started guide The User Manual is available on the documentation CD ROM the most recent version is available for download on the R S ZNB ZNBT product pages on the R S internet The online version of the user manual provides the complete contents for immediate display on the internet Help System The help system is embedded in the instrument offering quick context sensitive refer en...

Page 29: ...marker search See Search Mode on page 539 Improved handling of deleted missing connector types See Deleted Missing Connector Types on page 321 Bug fixes Small inaccuracies and unnecessary port measurements for channels with multiple overlapping calibrations Reverse order of shunt resistances in description of remote command CONTrol Ch GPIO Port SHUNt Downgrade to a FW version 2 40 In order to down...

Page 30: ...ition to the safety instructions in the following sections In particular Do not open the instrument casing Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrument and connected devices Before switching on the instrument observe the information on appropriate operating conditions provided in the data sheet In particula...

Page 31: ...ternal force to the handles As the R S ZNBT is very heavy over 35 kg fully equipped it must always be carried by two people using both carrying handles to avoid personal injury or damage to the instrument Observe the information on transporting heavy instruments in the basic safety instruc tions included at the front of the printed manual and on the supplied CD ROM 3 1 2 Positioning the Instrument...

Page 32: ...cause damage Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed that the airflow perforations are unimpeded and that the minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm 3 1 5 EMI Suppression Electromagnetic Interference EMI may affect the measurement results To suppress generated Electromagnetic Interference Use suitable shielded cables of high quality For example use double shielded RF and LAN cables Alway...

Page 33: ...I On After power on the analyzer automatically goes to standby or ready state depend ing on the state of the standby toggle key at the front panel when the instrument was switched off last time 2 If necessary press the standby toggle key on the front panel to switch the instru ment to ready state R S ZNB green LED goes on R S ZNBT PWR LED turns from amber to green The analyzer automatically perfor...

Page 34: ...optional oven quartz option R S ZNB B4 R S ZNBT B4 OCXO Frequency Reference In this state it is safe to switch the AC power off and disconnect the instrument from the power supply In ready state all modules are power supplied When switched to ready state the analyzer initiates its startup procedure Observe the instructions for startup and shutdown in Chapter 3 1 7 Starting the Ana lyzer and Shutti...

Page 35: ...ual Hard Key Panel to the analyzer screen 3 1 9 2 Connecting a Keyboard A keyboard can be connected to any of the USB connectors After being auto detected by the operating system it can safely be disconnected and reconnected even during measurements Keyboard configuration The default input language is English US Select Control Panel Clock Language and Region Region and Language Keyboards and Langu...

Page 36: ...B only or on the external keyboard You can load updated and improved driver versions or new drivers from an installation disk USB memory stick or another external storage medium Alternatively if the ana lyzer is integrated in a network you can install driver data stored in a network directory In either case use the Add Printer wizard to complete the installation Printer configuration Use the Page ...

Page 37: ...sed For more information refer to Chapter 6 1 Introduction to Remote Control on page 640 Currently the R S ZNB40 variants 82 and 84 and the R S ZNBT20 are equipped with controller LPW11 3 1 10 Minimizing the VNA application With a minimized VNA application you can access your analyzer s Windows desktop or run other applications To exit the default full screen mode of the VNA application deselect D...

Page 38: ...nal monitor is connected proceed as follows 1 Connect a USB keyboard and mouse as decribed in Chapter 3 1 9 Connecting External Accessories on page 19 2 Hold the Ctrl key and press Esc to show the task bar 3 Click the rectangular button at the very right of the task bar to show the Windows desktop 4 Right click the Windows desktop and select Screen resolution from the context menu 5 In the Windows...

Page 39: ...1 which is available at http www rohde schwarz com appnotes 1DC01 The analyzer uses a user name and password as credentials for remote access see note on User accounts and password protection on page 1250 for details To protect the analyzer from unauthorized access it is recommended to change the factory set ting 3 1 12 1 Assigning an IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP addre...

Page 40: ...n page 35 To enter the TCP IP address information manually 1 Obtain the IP address and subnet mask for the analyzer and the IP address for the local default gateway from your network administrator If necessary also obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network 2 For the R S ZNBT connect an external monitor keyboard and mouse 3 Press the Windows...

Page 41: ...3 9163 02 38 Figure 3 1 Windows 7 User Account Control dialog 6 In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog opened select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties and enter the IP address information e g Putting the Analyzer into Operation ...

Page 42: ...mote Windows PC and VNA to the LAN and make sure an IP conncec tion can be established 2 At the remote Windows PC select Start Programs Accessories Remote Desktop Connection enter the VNA s computer name or IP address and select Connect For instruments equipped with controller LPW11 R S ZNB40 variants 82 and 84 or R S ZNBT20 if no external monitor is connected at the time a user logs in to the ins...

Page 43: ... 1 For detailed information about the firewall refer to the Windows Help Risks of changing the firewall settings Disabling the firewall or allowing exceptions may make your instrument more vulnera ble to viruses and intruders It is recommend to restore the default firewall configuration after completing a task which requires modified settings 3 2 Instrument Tour This chapter gives an overview of t...

Page 44: ...er to Chapter 3 3 1 Manual Operation on page 42 The following sections contain further useful information about manual control of the instrument Refer to the other sections in chapter Chapter 3 3 Operating the Instrument on page 41 to learn how to handle traces and diagrams and how to use menus keys and softtools Refer to Chapter 4 2 1 Display Elements of a Diagram on page 87 to obtain information...

Page 45: ... how traces are scaled The TRACE CONFIG settings store traces to the memory and perform mathemati cal operations on traces The LINES settings define limits for the measurement results visualize them in the diagrams and activate deactivate the limit check The MARKER settings position markers on a trace configure their properties and select the format of the numerical readout Markers can also be use...

Page 46: ...ys are only enabled while the cursor is placed on a data input field in a dialog or in the Help navigation pane The keys 0 to 9 enter the corresponding numbers The function of the and keys depends on the data type of the active input field In numeric input fields the keys enter the decimal point and a negative sign for the entered numeric value Multiple entries have not effect In character input f...

Page 47: ...eys in the NAVIGATION keypad are used to navigate within the touchscreen and the help system to access and control active elements The Cursor Up and Cursor Down keys are used to Scroll up and down in lists e g among menu items in a list of keywords in the Help table of contents or in the Help index Navigate between table rows in diagrams Press OK to toggle between navigation mode and data entries ...

Page 48: ...us signal and measure the response signal in reflection For a measurement example refer to Chapter 3 4 2 Reflection S Parameter Measurement on page 73 With more than one test port it is possible to perform full two port 3 port or n port measurements see Chapter 4 3 1 S Parameters on page 110 In the standard R S ZNB configuration all test ports are supplied by a common source Four port instruments ...

Page 49: ...n on page 17 3 2 2 Front Panel R S ZNBT The largest part of R S ZNBT front panel is reserved for the test ports with an admin istrative area to the right Brief explanations on the connectors and controls and the rear panel can be found on the next pages Figure 3 3 Front view of R S ZNBT8 fully equipped with the maximum 24 ports Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain su...

Page 50: ...ents see Chapter 4 3 1 S Parameters on page 110 Maximum input levels The maximum input levels at all test ports according to the front panel labeling or the data sheet must not be exceeded In addition the maximum input voltages of the other input connectors at the rear panel must not be exceeded It is recommended that you use a torque wrench when screwing RF cables on the test port connectors Conn...

Page 51: ...he maximum current per USB port is 500 mA See also Chapter 3 1 5 EMI Suppression on page 17 LED controls Above the standby toggle switch some LEDs indicate various status information ERR operation state if an error occurs the LED lights up red for more information on errors and troubleshooting see the R S ZNB ZNBT User Manual LAN LAN error occurred PWR power state ready standby see Chapter 3 1 8 S...

Page 52: ...see USB Connectors on page 33 USB 3 0 labeled USB Host for R S ZNB40 variants 82 and 84 USB 2 0 labeled USB for all other R S ZNB 4 Monitor Display Port R S ZNB40 variants 82 and 84 only External monitor connector DisplayPort see Chapter 3 1 9 1 Connecting a Moni tor on page 20 5 USB Device R S ZNB40 variants 82 and 84 only Type B USB 3 0 device slave connector for remote control of the instrument...

Page 53: ... connectors Index Label Description 13 Bias Tees or RFFE GPIO Interface This slot can be equipped with one of the following options R S ZNB B1 Bias Tees providing two or four additional BNC inputs labeled BIAS 1 4 for two port or four port analyzers The inputs can be used to apply an external DC voltage bias to the test ports For fuse replacement refer to Chapter 10 3 3 Replacing Fuses on page 126...

Page 54: ...ion gives an overview of the rear panel controls and connectors of the R S ZNBT 1 2 12 3 4 5 8 13 11 15 7 6 9 10 14 16 17 Figure 3 5 R S ZNBT20 rear view Table 3 3 Rear panel connectors available on all instruments Index Label Description 1 Power I O Power on off switch see Chapter 3 1 7 Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down on page 18 2 Fuse holder Fuse holder see Chapter 10 3 3 Replacing Fuses...

Page 55: ...ternal reference frequency of the R S ZNBT Use this connec tor to synchronize other instruments to the analyzer See Chapter 5 19 3 Remote Settings Tab on page 617 11 REF IN BNC input for an external reference frequency Use this connector to synchronize the R S ZNBT to another device 12 SYSTEM DRIVE Contains the removable system hard disk of the R S ZNBT containing all software including the operat...

Page 56: ...t In particular you can learn how to access instrument functions and control dialogs without a mouse and or keyboard Manual and remote control of the instrument In contrast to the R S ZNB the R S ZNBT is primarily intended to be remote control led via the GPIB or LAN interface see chapter Remote Control in the user manual However all instruments can be controlled manually either using touchscreen ...

Page 57: ...ontrol ele ments are not fixed You can display or hide most elements You can also drag and drop traces info fields and even the softtool panel to your preferred position see Chapter 3 3 4 4 Using Drag and Drop on page 56 For example you can show hide the on screen Hard Key Panel by selecting deselect ing Display View Bar Hard Key Panel On in the main menu The following table shows possible touchsc...

Page 58: ...rrent docking position 2 Activate the desired softtool tab e g Z Sij 3 Select a control element e g Z S11 The diagram immediately shows the result of your setting In the present example the active trace shows the converted impedance parameter Z11 A control element with three dots e g SYSTEM SETUP System Config opens a dialog containing a group of related settings a wizard or additional infor matio...

Page 59: ...race Meas Z Sij Z S11 The diagram immediately shows the result of your setting At the same time the related softtool tab is opened Using context menus Context menus are another alternative for quick access to instrument settings To repeat the Z S11 setting described above 1 Touch and hold R S ZNB only or right click the measured quantity section in the trace list for a couple of seconds until the ...

Page 60: ...Getting Started R S ZNB ZNBT 45 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 2 Select S Parameter to open the Meas S Params softtool tab 3 Select Z Sij Z S11 Operating the Instrument ...

Page 61: ...esults There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function Using the icons in the toolbar above the diagram area for frequent actions Using the control elements of the softtool panel recommended provides all set tings Using the menus and submenus of the menu bar alternative to the previous method Using the hardkey panel preselection of the most important softtool panels Operati...

Page 62: ...n the diagram Refer to Chapter 5 17 Display Softtool on page 560 and learn how to customize the screen 3 3 2 1 Title Bar The main application window of the vector network analyzer application provides a title bar in analogy to every Windows application The title bar contains the name of the application and the standard minimize maximize and close buttons The appearance depends on the Control Panel...

Page 63: ...set file Open Recall save the active recall set to a file Save The second group comprises the undo and redo actions that are also accessible via the SYSTEM UNDO and SYSTEM REDO front panel keys The icons in the middle group control the graphical zoom function TRACE SCALE Zoom Zoom Reset Zoom Select and Overview Select The icons in the fourth group allow to add a new trace and possibly a new dia gr...

Page 64: ... bottom of the diagram As in any Windows application menus can be controlled with the touchscreen R S ZNB only or a mouse A short tap left mouse click expands a menu or sub menu If a menu command has no submenu assigned a short tap left mouse click opens a dialog or directly activates the menu command When a sub menu is selected the R S ZNB ZNBT displays the corresponding softtool panel Overview o...

Page 65: ... menu bar using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar 3 3 2 5 Menu Structure All menus show an analogous structure A menu command with a right arrow expands a submenu with further related set tings Example Marker expands a submenu with marker related properties A menu command with three dots appended calls up a dialog providing several related settings Example Search Range opens a dialog to define the search ra...

Page 66: ... from an external monitor or Remote Desktop Alternatively the settings are accessible from the menu bar or from the context menus For the R S ZNB the hardkey panel is hidden by default You can enable its display using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar For the R S ZNBT it is enabled by default 3 3 2 7 Status Bar The status bar shows the active channel and drive port P1 P2 the statistics for the sweep average...

Page 67: ...t date and time Figure 3 7 R S ZNB ZNBT with redefined physical ports Figure 3 8 R S ZNB ZNBT with switch matrix The progress bar slowly oscillates from left to right and back if the sweep is too fast to be monitored e g because the number of sweep points is low You can hide the status bar using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar 3 3 3 Working with Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow...

Page 68: ...s and Markers The analyzer displays measurement results as traces in rectangular diagrams Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace The following section will make you familiar with some of the graphical tools the R S ZNB ZNBT provides for trace and marker handling For further reference Refer to Chapter 4 Concepts and Features on page 75 to l...

Page 69: ...to display the new trace in the existing diagram or whether you want to add a new diagram 3 In the dialog box that is opened when you release the New Trace icon select an S parameter to display For a four port analyzer The R S ZNB ZNBT generates a new trace for the selected S parameter Operating the Instrument ...

Page 70: ...r Drag and drop the New Marker icon in the toolbar above the diagram area to the desired position The marker appears on the active trace The marker info field displays the stimulus value x axis value and response value y axis value at the marker position The response value varies as the analyzer continues performing sweeps Alternatively any marker offered in TRACE Marker Markers softtool tab can b...

Page 71: ...e context menu of some display elements e g markers also provides the Delete function Undo function If you happen to delete a display element unintentionally you can simply restore it using the UNDO key or the Undo icon in the toolbar 3 3 4 4 Using Drag and Drop You can drag and drop many of the R S ZNB ZNBT s control and display elements in order to change their size and position The drag and dro...

Page 72: ...ve within diagram Marker info field move to one of several pre defined positions Softtool area Move Softtool area move to the right or left edge of the screen 3 3 5 Entering Data The analyzer provides dialogs with various types of input fields where you can enter numeric values and character data Data entry with a mouse and an external keyboard is a standard procedure known from other Windows appl...

Page 73: ... to correct wrong entries deleting the character to the left of the current cursor position Press ENTER to complete an entry Press ESC CANCEL to discard the entries made 3 To enter letters other than G M or K you can also use one of the methods descri bed in the following sections Chapter 3 3 5 3 Using the Analyzer s On Screen Keyboard on page 59 Chapter 3 3 5 4 Using the Windows On Screen Keyboar...

Page 74: ...aining the Step Size panel of the numeric editor Use this box for efficient operation of the rotary knob 3 3 5 3 Using the Analyzer s On Screen Keyboard The on screen Keyboard allows you to enter characters in particular letters without an external keyboard It is available for all character input fields in the Vector Network Analyzer VNA application Operation with touchscreen 1 Double tap to activ...

Page 75: ...he Applic softtool 2 In the External Tools tab select Screen Keyboard 3 3 6 Scaling Diagrams The analyzer provides many alternative tools for customizing the diagrams and for set ting the sweep range Choose the method that is most convenient for you 3 3 6 1 Using the Graphic Zoom The graphic zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram zoom win dow to fill the entire diagram area T...

Page 76: ...tional trace lines at the bottom of the diagram If you activate the Overview Select toggle button and then proceed as described for Zoom Select the upper part of the diagram shows a small version of the original dia gram for comparison You can move the zoomed part of the trace by moving the selected rectangular area in the overview Use the Zoom Reset icon to restore the original diagram Alternativ...

Page 77: ...Center Frequency Span Fre quency from the Channel Stimulus menu Use the Set by Marker functions TRACE MARKER Set by Marker see Chapter 3 3 6 6 Set by Marker on page 63 3 3 6 3 Reference Value and Position The analyzer provides three parameters for changing the scale of the vertical response axis Changing the Ref Value or Ref Position shifts the trace in vertical direction and adjusts the labels of...

Page 78: ...the polar diagram Decreasing the Ref Value magnifies the polar diagram The Ref Value is indicated in the scale section of the trace list To change the Ref Value use one of the following methods Select TRACE SCALE Scale Values to access the parameter in the softtool tab Tap and hold with a mouse right click the scale section in the trace list and select the parameter from the context menu Tap and h...

Page 79: ...ed start value of the sweep range 3 Set the value of the delta marker equal to the desired positive or negative span 4 Activate the delta marker and tap TRACE MARKER Set by Marker Span Marker To move the trace relative to the vertical axis proceed as follows 1 Create a normal marker e g the marker Mkr 1 M1 and place it to a particular trace point E g you can use the Marker Search functions to loca...

Page 80: ...ng Measurements The following chapter describes a sample session with a R S ZNB ZNBT network ana lyzer and explains how to solve basic tasks that you will frequently encounter when working with the instrument Safety considerations Before starting any measurement on your network analyzer please note the instruc tions given in Chapter 3 1 Putting the Analyzer into Operation on page 15 Use the S Para...

Page 81: ...you want to learn from the data A minimum of two ana lyzer test ports are required for transmission measurements In the following example the analyzer is set up for a two port transmission measure ment A frequency sweep range is selected the instrument is calibrated and the mea surement result is analyzed using various display formats 3 4 1 1 Connecting the Instrument for Transmission Measurements...

Page 82: ...the Traces softtool panel if you wish to create a new trace or a new diagram 3 4 1 2 Selecting the Sweep Range and Other Parameters After a system preset the display shows a diagram with a dB magnitude scale and the S parameter S21 is selected as a measured quantity This S parameter is the forward transmission coefficient of the DUT defined as the ratio of the transmitted wave at the DUT s output ...

Page 83: ...lect TRACE SCALE Scale Values and activate the Auto Scale Trace function The analyzer adjusts the scale of the diagram to fit in the entire S21 trace leaving an appropriate display margin Tip Refer to Chapter 3 3 6 Scaling Diagrams on page 60 to learn more about the different methods and tools for diagram scaling 3 4 1 3 Calibrating the Instrument Calibration system error correction is the process...

Page 84: ...s 1 Replace the DUT by the Through standard of your calibration kit 2 Select CHANNEL CAL Start Manual to open the Calibration Presetting wizard 3 Select the port combination Port 1 P1 and Port 2 P2 and the calibration type Trans Norm Ensure that port 1 is defined as the source port Tip For a R S ZNBT with more than 4 ports the graphical port representation is replaced by a generic port list The se...

Page 85: ...B ZNBT 70 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 6 The Calibration dock widget indicates the calibration standards to be measured Select Through mm to initiate the measurement of the connected Through stan dard Performing Measurements ...

Page 86: ...s to determine maxima and minima on the trace and change the display format to obtain information about the group delay of the transmitted wave 1 Select TRACE MARKER Mkr 1 This places Marker 1 to its default position center of the sweep range A marker symbol triangle appears on the trace The stimulus value frequency and response value magnitude of the transmission coefficient converted to a dB val...

Page 87: ...ion about the necessary steps 1 Select SYSTEM FILE to open the File softtool 2 In the Trace Data tab of the File softtool select Export ASCII to open the Export Data ASCII Files dialog 3 In the Export Data ASCII Files dialog select a file location Look in enter a file name and select Save The active trace data is written to an ASCII file and the dialog closes 4 In the Print tab of the File softtoo...

Page 88: ... to express and display the results depending on what you want to learn from the data Only one analyzer test port is required for reflection measure ments In principle a reflection measurement involves the same steps as a transmission mea surement Note the following differences The basic test setup for reflection measurements involves a single DUT and ana lyzer port For instance you can connect th...

Page 89: ...lection measurements Use the calibration wizard and select an appropriate type The full n port calibration types TOSM UOSM TNA will correct the system errors for all transmission and reflection S parameters Some of the trace formats are particularly suited for reflection measurements E g you can display the measured reflection coefficient S11 in a Smith chart in order to obtain the complex input i...

Page 90: ...the evaluation of results To ensure that the instrument resources are easily accessible and that user defined configurations can be conven iently implemented stored and reused the instrument uses a hierarchy of structures Global resources can be used for all measurements irrespective of the current measurement session A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system cha...

Page 91: ... recall sets A recall set only contains setup instructions i e information on how to measure how to process the measurement results and how to display the processed results It does not contain any trace or result data 4 1 3 Traces Channels and Diagrams The analyzer arranges displays or stores the measured data in traces which are assigned to channels and displayed in diagrams To understand the fun...

Page 92: ...ce settings can be accessed via the keys in the TRACE section of the virtual hardkey panel They complement the Channel Settings accessible via the and STIMU LUS and CHANNEL sections Each trace is assigned to a channel The channel settings apply to all traces of the channel 4 1 3 2 Channel Settings A channel contains hardware related settings which specify how the network analyzer collects data The...

Page 93: ...ghlighted Channels with no traces are not indicated in the diagrams but can be accessed via the Channel Manager dialog In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and traces defined In remote control each channel contains an active trace See also Chapter 6 3 Basic Remote Control Concepts on page 653 4 1 4 Sweep Control A sweep is a series of co...

Page 94: ...ticular a fixed source port and receive port is used Each sweep point requires a single partial measurement See also Chapter 4 3 1 S Parameters on page 110 For a complete two port S parameter measurement e g S11 S21 S12 S22 the analyzer needs to interchange the roles of the source and receive ports Each sweep point requires two partial measurements To improve the accuracy it is possible to insert ...

Page 95: ...nts Trigger event starts m complete measurements at consecutive sweep points Sweep Segment Trigger event starts n partial sweeps over the next segment Trigger event starts complete mea surements at all consecutive sweep points in the segment Point All partial measurements of each sweep point are carried out one after another All partial measurements of each sweep point are carried out one after an...

Page 96: ...ZNBT only When performing parallel measurements on multiple DUTs by default the R S ZNBT firmware automatically selects the ports that shall driven in parallel However due to possible crosstalk between DUT ports it may be beneficial to prevent some ports from being driven in parallel This could be achieved by changing the cabling of the DUT but this may not always be possible for example if the sa...

Page 97: ...y step size of 1 MHz When two port groups are defined and a minimum frequency offset of 1 MHz is specified then a parallel measurement with frequency off set will internally be performed as follows In the first measurement step no measurements for port group 1 will be performed measurements for port group 2 will be performed at 100 MHz In the second measurement step measurements for port group 1 w...

Page 98: ...p Frequency Hz Segmented Power Start Power dBm Stop Power dBm CW Frequency Hz CW Frequency Hz CW Mode CW Frequency Hz Number of Points CW Frequency Hz CW Frequency Hz Time CW Frequency Hz Stop Time s CW Frequency Hz CW Frequency Hz The ranges of numerical values must be compatible with the instrument model The conditions for the stimulus range depend on the sweep type Lin Freq Log Freq Segmented T...

Page 99: ...frequency is changed stepwise and sampling is per formed at a tuned frequency for each measurement point In swept mode on the other hand sampling is performed with the frequency always swept for each measurement point Since in stepped mode at each measurement point a certain time is required until the frequency becomes stable sweeps in swept mode are generally much faster than in stepped mode at t...

Page 100: ...de set tings as for the actual measurement otherwise the calibration is turned off see Cal Off label on page 140 4 1 5 Data Flow The analyzer processes the raw measurement data in a sequence of stages in order to obtain the displayed trace The following diagram gives an overview The diagram consists of an upper and a lower part corresponding to the data process ing stages for the entire channel an...

Page 101: ...Concepts and Features R S ZNB ZNBT 86 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 Figure 4 1 Data Flow Basic Concepts ...

Page 102: ...i cally unlimited number of traces which may be assigned to different channels Most diagram settings are arranged in the Display softtool hardkey SYSTEM DISPLAY To assign traces and channels to diagrams use the control elements on the Trace Config Traces and Channel Config Channels softtool tabs hardkeys TRACES TRACE CONFIG and CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Diagrams may contain A title optional The diagr...

Page 103: ...tle to display or hide it 4 2 1 2 Traces A trace is a set of data points displayed together in the diagram The individual data points are connected so that each trace forms a continuous line The trace can be complemented by the following display elements plotted with the same color Reference value for all traces The reference value is indicated with a triangle at the right edge of the diagram and ...

Page 104: ...thematical relation between constants and the data or memory traces of the active recall set A mathematical trace that is based on the active data trace is dynamic It is possible to generate an unlimited number of memory traces from a data trace and display them together Markers and marker functions are available for all trace types The type of each trace in a diagram is indicated in the trace lis...

Page 105: ...r the trace Use the Mem Math and Traces tabs of the Trace Config softtool to display and hide data and memory traces and to define mathematical traces If multiple DUTs are configured R S ZNBT only see Chapter 4 1 4 2 Parallel Measurements on Multiple DUTs on page 80 the label is extended by an addi dional section indicating the measured quantity from the related DUT s per spective The section cont...

Page 106: ...n the trace or in general in the diagram area A marker is displayed with a symbol e g a triangle a crossbar or a line on the trace which may be a data trace or a memory trace At the same time the coordinates are displayed in a marker info field or in a table Each marker can be defined as a normal marker M reference marker R or delta marker ΔM A normal marker M1 M2 determines the coordinates of a m...

Page 107: ...Marker Search Target Search Bandfil ter Activating and Moving Markers To activate a marker either select the marker symbol itself or the corresponding line in the marker info field To move the active marker on the trace use one of the following methods Drag and drop the marker symbol to the desired position Activate the Markers tab of the Marker softtool hardkey TRACE MARKER and enter the related ...

Page 108: ...ield To change the position appearance or contents of the marker info field use one of the following methods The info field may be moved to several positions in the upper and lower part of the active diagram Drag drop it to the desired position To change the format of the active marker select TRACE Marker Marker Properties Marker Format To express the coordinates of the active marker relative to t...

Page 109: ...ult marker format of the related trace For a trace s default marker format this means the default format is dynamically adjusted according to the selected trace for mat Lin Mag Magnitude of z unconverted z sqrt x2 y2 dB Mag Magnitude of z in dB z sqrt x2 y2 dB Mag z 20 log z dB Phase Phase of z φ z arctan y x Delay Group delay neg derivative of the phase response dφ z dω where ω denotes the stimul...

Page 110: ...traces become slave markers and are moved to the position of the corresponding master markers Missing slave markers are created so that each trace has the same number of markers placed at the same position If the position of a master marker is outside the sweep range of the slave trace the slave marker is displayed at the edge of the diagram The marker info field indi cates an invalid measurement ...

Page 111: ...es trace segments with a bandpass or bandstop shape and determines characteristic filter parameters Bandpass and bandstop regions can be described with the same parameter set A bandpass region contains a local maximum around which the magnitude of the trace falls off by more than a specified value A bandstop region contains a local minimum around which the magnitude of the trace increases by more ...

Page 112: ... its center frequency and is equal to the response value of marker no 4 For an ideal bandpass filter the loss is zero 0 dB for an ideal bandstop filter it is dB 4 2 1 4 Channel List and Channel Settings The main properties of all channels assigned to the traces in the diagram are displayed in the channel list below the diagram Each line in the channel list describes a single channel The channel of...

Page 113: ...onding to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram Open a segment s context menu to access common related tasks Example The following context menu is assigned to the channel name section The settings in the context menus correspond to the most common functions in the Channel Config Channels softtool tab hardkey CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG the Stimulus softtool STIMULUS hardkeys the Sweep Sweep Params soft...

Page 114: ...ay All softkeys with three dots behind their labeling as in Balanced Ports call up a dialog The dialogs of the analyzer have an analogous structure and a number of common control elements Dialogs are controlled in the usual way For an introduction refer to Chapter 3 3 3 Working with Dialogs on page 52 4 2 2 1 Immediate vs Confirmed Settings In some dialogs the settings take effect immediately so t...

Page 115: ... hardkey Immediate settings can be undone using the UNDO virtual hardkey 4 2 2 2 Common Dialogs Open Dialog Specifies the name and location of a particular file e g a VNA trace file to open Look in specifies the directory to be be listed The icons to the right of the pull down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system place the cursor on the icons to obtain Whats this help Windows E...

Page 116: ...cons to obtain Whats this help File Name specifies a file name to save the current data The analyzer adds the extension in the Files of type field Files of type selects a particular file type for the created file Save saves the data in the selected file and directory and closes the dialog Cancel closes the dialog without saving the data Windows Explorer opens the selected directory in Windows Expl...

Page 117: ...quency power or time The response may be calculated from the measured quantity at the related stimulus value but it can also be the result of some mathematical transforma tion of the original unformatted trace Diagram Representation When a Cartesian trace is assigned to a diagram the stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis x axis the response values appear on the vertical axis y axis Grap...

Page 118: ...The following table shows how real response values are calculated from complex measurement values z x j y where x y z are functions of the sweep variable The formulas also hold for real measurement values y 0 Trace Format Description Formula dB Mag Magnitude of z in dB dB Mag z 20 log z dB Phase Phase of z φ z arctan y x SWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio SWR 1 z 1 z Lin Mag Magnitude of z unconverte...

Page 119: ...e trace is represented as a polygonal chain in the complex plane The stimulus axis is not visible However the stimulus value for a given trace point can be displayed using a marker The difference between the different complex trace formats Polar Smith and Inv Smith is the coordinate system that is used for the representation of the response val ues and that is graphically overlayed to the formatte...

Page 120: ... circuit Z infinity I 0 is one its phase is zero The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Z 0 U 0 is one its phase is 180 deg Smith For Smith traces the response values are interpreted as reflection coefficients Sii and represented in terms of their corresponding complex impedance Z Sii R Sii j X Sii In a diagram the grid lines overlayed to a Smith trace correspond to points ...

Page 121: ...e purely imaginary impedance Points outside the outer circle indicate an active component The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to positive inductive and negative capacitive reactive components of the impedance respectively Example Reflection coefficients in the Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ e g S11 S22 then the unit Smith chart can be used...

Page 122: ...e Examples for special points in the Smith chart The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit Z infinity I 0 is one its phase is zero The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Z 0 U 0 is one its phase is 180 deg Inv Smith For Inv Smith formatted traces the response values are interpreted as complex reflection coefficients Sii and represented in terms of their...

Page 123: ...ance purely imaginary admittance Points outside the outer circle indicate an active component The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to negative inductive and positive capacitive susceptive components of the admittance respectively Example Reflection coefficients in the inverted Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient G e g S11 S22 then the unit inverte...

Page 124: ...l line Examples for special points in the inverted Smith chart The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Y infinity U 0 is one its phase is 180 deg The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit Y 0 I 0 is one its phase is zero 4 2 3 3 Measured Quantities and Trace Formats The analyzer allows any combination of a display format and a measured quantity The follo...

Page 125: ...fault for wave quantities Phase ON ON Real ON ON ON Imag ON ON Unwrapped Phase ON ON Smith ON reflection coefficients Sii Polar ON Inverted Smith ON reflection coefficients Sii SWR ON reflection coefficients Sii Delay ON transmission coefficients Sij The default formats are activated automatically when the measured quantity is changed 4 3 Measurement Results This section gives an overview of the m...

Page 126: ...parameters can be interpreted as follows S11 is the reflection coefficient of DUT port 1 i e the ratio between outgoing wave b1 and incident wave a1 in a forward measurement with matched DUT port 2 S11 b1 a1 if a1 0 and a2 0 S21 is the forward transmission coefficient defined as the ratio between outgoing wave b2and incident wave a1 in a forward measurement with matched DUT port 2 S21 b2 a1 if a1 ...

Page 127: ...s and the S parameters are expressed as Sij i j 1 to 4 The indices of the S parameters described so far number the output and input ports of a DUT the parameters are referred to as single ended S parameters The S parame ter description can also be used to differentiate between different propagation modes of the waves at the output and input ports This results in the so called mixed mode S paramete...

Page 128: ...b3 Source Port 1 Redefined Physical Port 2 a wave a4 b wave b4 Source Port 4 1 4 Figure 4 4 Two redefined ports High Signal Power When dealing with external signal amplification make sure that the signals fed to the analyzer are within the allowed range during calibration the calibration standards meet the requirements in terms of their power handling capacity Attenuator pads can be used to adapt ...

Page 129: ...nated with its reference impedance matched circuit parameters A two port transmission parameter Zij i j can describe a pure serial impedance between the two ports Relation with S parameters The converted impedances Zii are calculated from the reflection S parameters Sii according to ii ii i ii S S Z Z 1 1 0 The transmission parameters are calculated according to 2 0 0 0 0 j i Z Z S Z Z Z j i ij j ...

Page 130: ... for a two port are based on a circuit model that can be expressed with two linear equations 2 22 1 21 2 2 12 1 11 1 I Z I Z V I Z I Z V Meaning of Z parameters The four 2 port Z parameters can be interpreted as follows Z11 is the input impedance defined as the ratio of the voltage V1 to the current I1 measured at port 1 forward measurement with open output I2 0 Z21 is the forward transfer impedan...

Page 131: ...DUTs n 1 the reflection parameters Yii describe the input admittances at ports i i 1 to n under the condition that each of the other ports is terminated with its reference impedance matched circuit parameters A two port transmission parameter Yij i j can describe a pure serial impedance between the two ports Relation with S parameters The converted admittances Yii are calculated from the reflectio...

Page 132: ...I V Y V Y I Meaning of Y parameters The four 2 port Y parameters can be interpreted as follows Y11 is the input admittance defined as the ratio of the current I1 to the voltage V1 measured at port 1 forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit V2 0 Y21 is the forward transfer admittance defined as the ratio of the current I2 to the voltage V1 forward measurement with output termin...

Page 133: ...e ports of the analyzer This is different from an S parameter measurement where the absolute power of a lin ear device is cancelled Wave quantities are therefore suitable for the following mea surement tasks Analysis of non linearities of the DUT Use of the analyzer as a selective power meter To increase the accuracy or to correct a possible attenuation in the source signal path it is recommended ...

Page 134: ...the form ai aj is needed The notation for ratios is similar to the notation for wave quantities see Chap ter 4 3 4 1 Wave Quantities on page 118 Given a source port k any ratio between wave quantities ai Src Port k and bj Src Port k can be measured Examples b2 a1 Src Port 1 is the ratio of the outgoing wave at DUT port 2 and the incident wave at DUT port 1 i e DUT port 1 ist stimulated This corres...

Page 135: ... and a denominator wave quantity This does not place any restrictions on the measurement functionality of the analyzer because ratios can also be formed by measuring the numerator and denominator individually and using the trace functions A possible appli cation is the comparison of different detector settings for a particular trace Error Messages The analyzer generates a warning if the selected m...

Page 136: ...ary e g to compensate for the effect of a test fixture it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters Differential and common mode parameters can be evaluated with a single test setup 4 3 5 1 Balanced Port Configurations Defining a balanced logical port requires two physical ports All physical ports on the VNA and connected External Switch Matrices are equivalent and ...

Page 137: ...n mode Zref Z0c Balanced port Log VNA port A balanced port configuration is defined by simply selecting the pairs of physical ports that shall be combined to form balanced ports and defining the two reference impedan ces for the differential and common mode at each balanced port All this can be done in a single Balanced Ports dialog The most commonly used balanced port configura tions and impedanc...

Page 138: ...fined as the ratio of the wave quantities b1 mode mout reverse measurement with matched input b1 in the figure above and a1 0 to a2 mode min S mout min 22 is the mixed mode output reflection coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities b2 mode mout reverse measurement with matched input b2 in the figure above and a1 0 to a2 mode min measured at PORT 2 If mout is different from min the S...

Page 139: ...e deviation of the balun from ideality The general definition of the transmission imbalance between two different ports at least one of them balanced is given below For a DUT with two balanced ports e g an amplifier the ratio between the wanted differential mode power gain and the unwanted common mode power gain is called common mode rejection ratio CMRR It can be calculated as Sdd21 Scc21 see Cha...

Page 140: ...analyzer ports is often referred to as renormalization of port impedances Renormalization means that the measurement results measured at 50 Ω 75 Ω are converted into results at arbitrary port impedance Renormalization of the physical port impedances affects e g S parameters and wave quantities in Power representation Renormalization of the balanced port impedances affects all measured quantities t...

Page 141: ...b b b The renormalized wave quantities a1 and b1 and the S matrix S1 can be calculated from S0 and the reference impedances Z0i Z1i according to two alternative waveguide circuit theories 1 Travelling waves In the model of Marks and Williams A General Waveguide Circuit Theory the wave quantities a and b are transformed as follows i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i b a Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z b a ...

Page 142: ... of two ports such as amplifiers A linear circuit is said to be unconditionally stable if no combination of passive source or load can cause the circuit to oscillate The K factor provides a necessary condition for unconditional stability A circuit is unconditionally stable if K 1 and an additional condition is met The additional con dition can be tested by means of the stability factors μ1 and μ2 ...

Page 143: ...g 360 The aperture Δf must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement If the delay is constant over the considered frequency range non dispersive DUT e g a cable then τg and τg meas are identical and c L t f d t f d mech g 360 360 where Δt is the propagation time of the wave across the DUT which often can be expressed in terms of its mechanical length Lmech the permittivity ε and the velocit...

Page 144: ...segments with a linear dependence between the measured quantity and the sweep variable stimulus vari able Similar to this segmentation ripple limits may be defined in several ranges The limit lines except circle limits can be stored to a file and recalled Data or memory traces can be used to define the segments of an upper or lower limit line Moreover it is possible to modify the upper and lower l...

Page 145: ...oints are re distributed along the x axis so the number of failed points may change While Show Limit Line is active the diagrams display all limit line segments Exception In a segmented frequency sweep with point based x axis gaps between the segments are minimized To facilitate the interpretation the R S ZNB ZNBT dis plays only the limit line segments which provide the limit check criterion the t...

Page 146: ... doesn t have to be smaller than the Start Stimulus value of range no n 1 Overlapping ranges are allowed The limit check in the overlapping area is related to the tighter limit the pass test involves a logical AND operation Gaps between ranges are allowed and equivalent to switching off an intermediate ripple limit range Ripple limit ranges can be partially or entirely outside the sweep range howe...

Page 147: ...ine which is defined by its center coordi nate in the diagram and its radius Depending on the diagram type circle limit can serve different purposes With a circle limit line centered around the origin of a polar diagram you can check whether the magnitude of the measurement results exceeds a limit defined by the radius of the limit line With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Sm...

Page 148: ...e limit line file has the extension limit and is stored in the directory shown in the Save Limit Line and Recall Limit Line dialogs The file starts with a preamble containing the channel and trace name and the header of the segment list The following lines contain the entries of all editable columns of the list Example of a limit line file The limit line is described by the limit line file Compati...

Page 149: ...ther instruments The VNAs of the R S ZNx and R S ZVx families use the same file format Ripple limit files can be interchanged without restriction 4 4 2 Trace Files The R S ZNB ZNBT can store one or several data or memory traces to a file or load a memory trace from a file Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format The analyzer provides several types of trace files Touchstone s n p fil...

Page 150: ... a real positive resistance default 50 Ω Comment lines start with the exclamation mark and may contain any text used for documentation of the trace data file Any number of comment lines may be inserted before or after the header line The following information is displayed in the comments section VNA identification comment line 2 in above example timestamp comment line 3 port specific renormalizati...

Page 151: ...ecutive ports 1 n and natural ordering The entries in the data lines are separated by white space and a data line is termina ted by a new line character Conditions for Touchstone file export One port Touchstone files with data from a single trace Touchstone files are normally intended for a complete set of n port S parame ters The only exceptions are one port Touchstone files that can be created u...

Page 152: ...nce For multi port S parameters the reference resistance of the Touchstone option line is taken as common target impedance and the data is renormalized to the common target impedance regardless of the port reference impedances Thus in case of ambiguous port reference impedances the data is always renormalized to 50 Ω Port Reference Impedance The Chapter 4 3 6 Reference Impedances on page 125 of th...

Page 153: ... Re Im lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase respectively The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog imTrace2 second response value of second trace im Trace_Name for out put format Re Im ang Trace_Name for output formats lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dia log first response value of second trace HZ KHZ MHZ G...

Page 154: ...wn within the entire sweep range In some calibration procedures TRL TNA TRM part of the characteristics of the standards can be auto determined due to implicit redundancy self calibration 2 The analyzer compares the measurement data of the standards with their known ideal response The difference is used to calculate the system errors using a partic ular error model calibration type and derive a se...

Page 155: ...e ments with Frequency Offset on page 82 There is a mismatch between the current sweep mode s and the sweep mode s that were used during calibration see Chapter 4 1 4 4 Stepped vs Swept Mode on page 84 The system error correction has been switched off deliberately User Cal Active is disabled The analyzer provides other labels to indicate the status of the current calibration see Chapter 4 5 4 Cali...

Page 156: ...re ments on any port One Path Two Ports Open Short Match1 at source port Through2 between the source port and all target ports St j for fixed source port j and target ports t Reflection tracking Source match Directivity Transmission track ing Medium to high Unidirectional trans mission measure ments in any direc tion and between any combination of ports TOSM or UOSM n port Open Short Match1 at eac...

Page 157: ...ection and transmission mea surements espe cially for planar cir cuits 1 Or any other 3 known one port standards To be used in a guided calibration the known standards must be declared to be Open Short and Match irrespective of their properties 2 Or any other known two port standard To be used in a guided calibration the known standard must be declared to be Through irrespective of its properties ...

Page 158: ... node port This calibration type requires a Short an Open and a Match standard to be connected to a single test port plus a Through standard between this calibrated source port and the other load ports The four standard measurements are used to derive the following error terms The Short and Open standards are used to derive the source match and the reflec tion tracking error terms at the source po...

Page 159: ...ndard measurements for an n port TOSM calibration is 3n n n 1 n n 2 However this number can be significantly decreased without losing too much precision see Chapter 4 5 1 11 Full n Port Calibration with Reduced Number of Through Connections on page 150 The analyzer automatically performs each through measurement in both directions so the number of connected standards is smaller than the number of ...

Page 160: ...uired for each of the different connector types The kit must include as a minimum the standards that are used for one port calibration The through connection between test ports with different connector types must be made using adapters The problem here is that unlike Through standards adapters are usually not character ized i e their delay time transmission phase is unknown If the adapter fulfills...

Page 161: ...lly removed from the obtained error coefficients Uncertainties arising from a non ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel whereas they add up in the UOSM technique As a consequence Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results This holds up to a transition point where uncertainties due to connectivity issues increase Calibration ...

Page 162: ...tion requires a low reflection low loss Through standard with an electrical length that may be different from zero a Reflect and a Match The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of the Reflect standard can be unknown but must be nonzero its phase must be roughly known 90 deg The magni tude and phase of the reflection coefficient must be the same at both test ports TRM calibration is especially ...

Page 163: ...In the low frequency domain where TRL becomes inaccurate replace TRL by TRM calibration The methods can be combined or used separately The list of measured standards in the calibration step for TRL calibration is extended if the calibration kit in use contains the necessary standards A 2 line 3 line calibration requires two three different Lines of matching gender The lines must be measured betwee...

Page 164: ...he formulas are also applied if flong fshort For a TRL calibration using three Lines with different length the allowed frequency ranges are calculated in an analogous manner in order to obtain three ideally overlap ping frequency ranges The borders between two adjacent frequency ranges are cal culated as the geometric mean of the frequency limits flong and fshort of the two ranges A second or thir...

Page 165: ...e Reflect standard used for a TRL cali bration i e the magnitude of its reflection coefficient can be unknown but must be non zero its phase must be roughly known 90 deg The magnitude and phase of the reflection coefficient must be the same at both test ports The Attenuation standard must be well matched on both sides and cause an attenuation different from 0 dB the exact value of the transmission...

Page 166: ...n on switch matrices and their submatrices 4 5 1 12 Complementary Isolation Measurement For each port pair in a manual transmission normalization or TOSM calibration the Through measurement can be complemented by an isolation measurement account ing for possible crosstalk between the related test ports e g on a test fixture If isolation is measured the corrected transmission coefficient of the DUT...

Page 167: ...al Standard Offset Model Load Model Open Open circuit one port Ω Short Short circuit one port 0 Ω Offset short Short circuit with added electrical length offset for waveguide calibration one port 0 Ω Match Matched broadband termination one port Z0 characteristic impedance of the connector type Sliding match One port standard consisting of an air line with a movable low reflection load element slid...

Page 168: ...ormula for one port standards has an additional factor on the right hand side The reason for this factor is that the Loss in dB accounts for the attenuation along the forward and the reverse path no matter how often the wave actually propagates through the line whereas the offset loss is proportional to the attenuation of the line To determine an offset loss value experimentally measure the delay ...

Page 169: ...ghly stand ardized components so that the parameters are valid for all calibration kits of the model Typical parameters suffix typical approximately describe a calibration kit model To correct for deviations between the standards each kit of the model is individu ally measured and delivered with an additional kit specific parameter set There fore each typical parameter set kit_name typical is comp...

Page 170: ... is a one port standard consisting of an air line with a movable low reflection load element sliding load This standard is used because a no perfect Match is available over a wide frequency range However a series of measurements at a given frequency with equal mismatch and varying phase yields reflection factors that are located on a circle in the Smith chart The center of this circle corresponds ...

Page 171: ...requencies above the Min Freq In general the Sliding Match will provide better results than the Match within its specified fre quency range 4 5 2 4 Cal Kit Files Calibration kit files can be used to store the parameters of a particular calibration kit to re load the data and to exchange calibration kits from one network analyzer to another Cal kit file contents Cal kit files are independent of the...

Page 172: ...Windows based software tool intended to import edit and export csv cal kit files The software is available for download at http www vnahelp com products html The decimal separator used by the VNA Cal Kit Man ager V2 1 depends on the language version of the Windows operating system Cal kit files generated on an English operating system contain dots the ones generated on a German system contain comm...

Page 173: ... Cal The system error correction is applied without interpolation This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point Cal int The system error correction is applied however the correction data for at least one sweep point is interpolated from the measured values This means that the channel settings have been changed so that a current sweep point is different from the...

Page 174: ...N f 2 1319 5507 72 R S ZN Z51 custom configuration The R S ZN Z51 allows a free mixed port configuration with possible connector types N m f 3 5 mm m f 7 16 m f and 4 3 16 f With an N f type CalU serving as base unit for each available port an alternative connector type N m 3 5 mm m f 7 16 m f or 4 3 16 f can be selected For N f type models alternative connectors can be also be retrofitted but the...

Page 175: ...S ZV Z58 300 kHz to 8 GHz type N f 8 1164 0638 78 R S ZV Z58 300 kHz to 8 GHz 3 5 mm f 8 1164 0638 38 R S ZV Z58 10 MHz to 20 GHz 3 5 mm f 6 1164 0450 36 R S ZV Z59 10 MHz to 20 GHz 3 5 mm f 6 1164 0450 36 The units contain calibration standards that are electronically switched when a calibra tion is performed The calibration kit data for the internal standards are also stored in the calibration u...

Page 176: ...he test ports For all Rohde Schwarz calibration units except a customized R S ZN Z51 the connector types are equal for all ports See Table 4 8 To connect the unit 1 Switch on and start up your network analyzer 2 To protect your equipment against ESD damage use the wrist strap and grounding cord supplied with the instrument and connect yourself to the GND connector at the front panel 3 Connect the ...

Page 177: ...the related test ports using the Calibration Unit wizard CHANNEL CAL Start Cal Unit see Chapter 5 4 1 2 Calibration Unit Wizard on page 260 The wizard will indicate the required port re connections The assignment between the analyzer ports and the cal unit ports can be detected automatically If auto detection fails e g because of a high attenuation in the signal path you can either enter the port ...

Page 178: ...s that the signal direction is from the ports with the lower numbers to the port with the higher numbers Example Select ports no 1 2 3 A forward transmission normalization calibrates the S parame ters S21 S31 and S32 A reverse transmission normalization calibrates the S parame ters S12 S13 and S23 A bidirectional transmission normalization calibrates all six trans mission S parameters 4 5 5 3 Char...

Page 179: ...librate a number of test ports that exceeds the number of ports of the calibration unit or cal unit characterization in use E g you can use a 2 port calibration unit to perform a full 4 port calibration The multiple port assignment method considerably extends the range of applications of the calibration units However the method entails some loss of convenience because you have to re connect the ca...

Page 180: ...e port 1 of the calibra tion unit connected to the node port and connect the ports of each of the port groups to the remain ing m 1 ports of the calibration unit Full n Port the two generic conditions stated above with unordered Throughs the number of assignments must be as small as possible Additional condition The cal unit port assigned to a given test port must be the same in all assignments Ag...

Page 181: ...signment 2 Assignment 3 1 Cal Unit Port 1 2 Cal Unit Port 2 3 Cal Unit Port 3 4 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 4 5 Cal Unit Port 1 6 Cal Unit Port 2 7 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 3 8 Cal Unit Port 1 9 Cal Unit Port 2 4 5 6 Scalar Power Calibration The purpose of a scalar power calibration is to ensure accurate source power levels and power readings at a particular position calibration plane in th...

Page 182: ...near DUTs Not possible Use SMARTerCal Yes Power source and meas receiver sup ported in combination with SMARTerCal Yes Power sweep e g for com pression point measurement Yes Power source Yes Meas receiver not necessary Not necessary Frequency conversion mea surements on linear DUTs Not possible Use SMARTerCal Not necessary Yes Frequency conversion mea surements on non linear DUTs Not possible Use ...

Page 183: ...if a Time or CW Mode sweep is activated Calibration procedure The source power calibration requires an external power meter to be connected via GPIB bus USB or LAN interface Use the USB to IEC IEEE Adapter option R S ZVAB B44 to control devices equipped with a GPIB interface The power sensor can be connected directly at the calibration plane or to any other point in the test setup where the signal...

Page 184: ...ation A measurement receiver calibration ensures that the power readings at a specified receive port of the analyzer b waves agree with the source power level calibrated at an arbitrary calibration plane Typically the calibration plane is at the input of the receiver so that the calibration eliminates frequency response errors in the calibrated receiver In contrast the reference receiver calibrati...

Page 185: ...vailable Calibration of S parameters S parameters and derived quantities e g impedances admittances stability factors are assumed to be linear otherwise they must be corrected by a SMARTerCal Therefore a scalar power calibration is not applied to S parameters and derived quan tities no power calibration labels appear in the trace list Table 4 12 Power calibration labels Label Meaning PCal A scalar...

Page 186: ... Sweep points above the highest calibra ted frequency are assigned the correction value of the highest frequency A label PCax in the trace list indicates an extrapolated power calibration 4 5 6 4 Extended Test Setups The power calibration data can be modified to account for an additional two port device in the test setup The known transmission coefficients of the two port can be entered manually o...

Page 187: ... nected the power sensor to the test port of the network analyzer The transmission coefficients of the adapter are used for the power meter correction 4 5 7 SMARTerCal A SMARTerCal smarter calibration is a combination of a full n port system error cor rection TOSM UOSM Adapter Removal TRL TNA for two or more ports with a scalar receiver power calibration at a single port The two calibration method...

Page 188: ...standards The cali bration sweep for the external power meter is performed in analogy to a sweep for a one port calibration standard however the analyzer uses the Reference Receiver Cal Power setting from the scalar power calibration CHANNEL CAL Pwr Cal Settings Cal Power The order of the system error correction and power calibration sweeps is arbitrary ensure that you always connect the proper eq...

Page 189: ...ts where the actual input power at the DUT is not critical a SMARTerCal is sufficient 4 5 7 4 Calibration Labels The status and type of the SMARTerCal is indicated in the trace list in analogy to a system error correction see Chapter 4 5 4 Calibration Labels on page 158 The calibration labels for a SMARTerCal consist of a prefix S plus the system error cor rection labels Table 4 14 Calibration lab...

Page 190: ...CHANnels ALL on page 983 Calibrate a subset of the available channels possibly using different ports and cali bration types In this case for each port to be calibrated a different set of calibration standards might be required and for each of these standards only a subset of the available channels might have to be swept This advanced mode of parallel calibration is available via remote control onl...

Page 191: ...L is the attenuation of a wave when traveling through the offset transmission line In logarithmic representation the loss can be modeled as the sum of a constant and a frequency dependent part The frequency dependence is essentially due to the skin effect the total loss can be approximated by an expression of the following form DC ref DC ref Loss f f Loss f Loss f Loss The Loss at DC LossDC the re...

Page 192: ...or transmission measurements both results should be approx equal 2 Measure the reflection factor and select TRACE FORMAT Phase Place a marker to the trace and activate TRACE TRACE CONFIG Trace Statistics Phase El Length Measure the reflection factor and select FORMAT Phase Place a marker to the trace and activate TRACE Trace Statistics Phase El Length This yields the delay in one direction and sho...

Page 193: ...e phase response is minimized and the measured loss is minimized as far as possible across the entire sweep range Auto Length and Loss involves a two step procedure An Auto Length correction modifies the phase of the measured quantity minimiz ing the residual group delay The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affec ted The automatic loss correction modifies the magnitude of the measured qua...

Page 194: ...ort then the same offset parameters must be assigned to both physical ports that are combined to form the logical port If different offset parameters have been assigned to the physical ports before they are both corrected by the same amount 4 6 1 5 Fixture Compensation Fixture Compensation is an automated length offset and loss compensation for test fixtures The analyzer performs a one port reflec...

Page 195: ...t compensation may improve the accuracy Open and Short compensation is more time consuming because it requires two con secutive fixture compensation sweeps for each port the first with an open the second with a short circuit The analyzer automatically calculates suitable averages from both fixture compensation sweeps in order to compensate for the inaccuracies of the indi vidual Open and Short com...

Page 196: ...rameter causes a negative phase shift of the measured param eter and therefore increases the calculated group delay 4 6 1 7 Offset Parameters for Balanced Ports The offset parameters can be used for balanced port configurations Offset parameters must be assigned to both physical ports of a logical port Auto Length corrects the length offset of both physical ports of a logical port by the same amou...

Page 197: ... DUT with a single ended and a balanced port that is com bined with a real matching circuit and a physical unbalance balance transformer balun in order to be evaluated in a 2 port measurement The idea of virtual embedding is to simulate the matching network and avoid using physical circuitry so that the analyzer ports can be directly connected to the input and output ports of the DUT The matching ...

Page 198: ...n plane towards the DUT ports enabling a realistic evaluation of the DUT without the distorting network Deembedding can be combined with length off set parameters see Chapter 4 6 1 Offset Parameters on page 175 The simplest case of single port deembedding can be depicted as follows 4 6 2 3 Circuit Models for 2 Port Networks The lumped element 2 port transformation networks for de embedding consist...

Page 199: ...ed of a shunt C or L as seen from the analyzer port followed by a serial C or L They are named Shunt C Serial C Shunt C Serial L Shunt L Serial C Shunt L Serial L At the GUI the capacitance C i in parallel with resistance R i circuit blocks can be replaced by equivalent capacitance C i in parallel with conductance G i circuit blocks In addition there is also a Shunt L Shunt C circuit model avalila...

Page 200: ...nt In the default setting the resistors are not effective since the serial Rs are set to 0 Ω the shunt Rs are set to 10 MΩ Moreover the serial elements can be replaced by imported 2 port S parameters or the entire transformation network can be described by imported 4 port S parameters The first network is defined by its S parameters stored in an imported four port Touch stone file s4p No additiona...

Page 201: ...yzer test port followed by two serial Cs or Ls They are named Shunt C Serial Cs Shunt C Serial Ls Shunt L Serial Cs Shunt L Serial Ls Since FW version 1 93 the capacitance C i in parallel with resistance R i circuit blocks can alternatively be represented as capacitance C i in parallel with conduc tance G i circuit blocks 4 6 2 5 Port Pair De Embedding Port pair de embedding extends the functional...

Page 202: ...L transformation network with all inductan ces set to zero L1 L2 L3 0 H and R1 R2 0 Ω To model a general de embedding network for ports 1 and 2 select port pair 1 2 and a 4 Port Touchstone file The two port pair de embedding networks in the figure below are based on port pairs 1 2 and 1 3 with appropriate sets of 4 port S parameters The R S ZNB ZNBT FW handles Port Pair De Embedding as a special c...

Page 203: ...ort set deembed ding is calculated after single ended deembedding and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding It is possible to combine a sequence of port sets for deembedding embedding each port set having its own transformation network The effect of port set de embedding depends on the port sets themselves but also on their order The same physical ports may be used repeatedly...

Page 204: ...f a non ideal ground connection of the DUT causing a difference in potential between the analyzer s and the DUT s ground reference A typ ical and often unavoidable source of ground loops is the parasitic inductance of the ground contacts In contrast to the 2 port de embedding networks the ground loop represents a single wire connection that can be described by a one port S matrix On the other hand...

Page 205: ...dding and embedding are carried out in the following order Figure 4 8 De Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added The de embedding steps are carried out in the following order 1 Single Ended Deembedding every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2 port network 2 Port Set Deembedding every port set can be deembedded from one...

Page 206: ... 8 Single Ended Embedding every physical port can be embedded in a single 2 port network 9 Differential Match Embedding the differential mode of a balanced logical port can be embedded in a single 2 port network 1 Initial situation DUT embedded in 2 port and 4 port networks only 1 port shown 2 Single ended deembedding 3 Balanced port deembedding 4 Balanced port embedding 5 Single ended port embedd...

Page 207: ... Various Options The R S ZNBT8 is available with a minimum of 4 test ports order number 1318 7006 24 that are either equipped with standard or with Extended Dynamic Range reflectometers option ZNBT8 B504 The base unit can be extended by additional blocks of 4 ports up to a maximum of 24 ports Again these additional port blocks can either be equipped with standard reflec tometers or with Extended D...

Page 208: ... and transform the gated result back into the frequency domain For a detailed discussion of the time domain transformation including many examples refer to the application note 1EZ44 which is available on the R S internet at http www rohde schwarz com appnotes 1EZ44 4 7 2 1 Chirp z Transformation The Chirp z transformation that the analyzer uses to compute the time domain response is an extension ...

Page 209: ... 4 Harmonic Grid on page 195 Two different types of response are available in low pass mode see below Table 4 17 Comparison of band pass and low pass modes Transform type Band pass Low pass Advantages Easiest to use works with any set of equi distant sweep points Higher response resolution doubled Includes information about DC value Real result Impulse and step response Restrictions No step respon...

Page 210: ...Rect angle 13 dB 1 Low First Sidelobe Hamming 43 dB 1 4 Response resolution separation of closely spaced responses with compara ble amplitude Normal Profile Hann 32 dB 1 6 Good compromise between pulse width and sidelobe suppression Steep Falloff Boh man 46 dB 1 9 Dynamic range separation of distant responses with different amplitude Arbitrary Sidelobes Dolph Chebychev User defined between 10 dB a...

Page 211: ...ep is sufficiently above the fmin the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased If the start frequency of the sweep is close to fmin then the sweep points may have to be shifted towards higher frequencies If the last sweep point of the calculated harmonic grid exceeds the maximum frequency of the analyzer then an error mes sage is displ...

Page 212: ... number of points increases the sweep time With default analyzer settings the difference between the grid types are small The fol lowing table helps you find the appropriate grid Table 4 19 Properties of grid types Grid type Keep Sweep time Time domain resolution Unambig uous range Algorithm fails if Stop freq and no of points Freq gap and no of points Stop frequency beyond upper fre quency limit ...

Page 213: ...yed frequency domain trace is calculated from the time domain TD trace which is gated and transformed back into the frequency domain The analyzer uses fixed No Profiling Rectangle window settings to transform the measured trace into time domain The TD trace is gated using the selected time gate The gated trace is transformed back into frequency domain using a No Profiling Rect angle window The sha...

Page 214: ...tion of the input signal with the impulse response With option R S ZNB K20 R S ZNBT K20 the R S ZNB ZNBT firmware implements a virtual signal generator that is able to generate multilevel PAM signals NRZ PAM 4 PAM 8 PAM 16 including a simulated low pass behavior The simulated eye diagram using the DUT s measured S parameters gives an extensive overview regard ing the signal integrity of the system...

Page 215: ...esults are available Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing These values will include any over and under shoots seen during the symbol transitions Eye Base Eye Top Eye Mean and Eye Amplitude Eye Base and Eye Top represent the averaged voltages observed for the low and high voltage bits respectively Eye Mean is the average of...

Page 216: ...ycle Pct gives the same value as a percentage of the Bit Period Crossing Percent The Crossing Height is the height above Eye Base where the rising and falling edges cross Crossing Percent gives the same value as a percentage of the Eye Amplitude Opening Factor This is a measure of the effects of amplitude noise on the vertical eye opening Accordingly it is equal to Eye Top σTop Eye Base σBase Eye ...

Page 217: ... as the delta time or length at user defined percentage of the step size Figure 4 13 Skew measurement For instance this can be used to evaluate the quality of a balanced transmission line intra pair skew Limit Test Testing against a user defined skew limit is also supported DUT centric setup As far as possible the required settings are related to time domain properties of the DUT which might be mo...

Page 218: ...iguration table CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Port Config Port Set tings Arb Frequency the source frequency of Port 1 is set to the desired RF fre quency here the channel base frequency sweep range fb An external generator pro vides a fixed stimulus signal at 1 GHz To measure the up converted IF signal the receive frequency at Port 2 is set to fb 1 GHz Independent source powers for Port 1 and Gen1 may be...

Page 219: ...applied at the RF input and the frequency shifting signal from a local oscillator LO is applied to the RF mixer s LO port resulting in an output signal at the mixer s Intermediate Frequency IF port For a given RF signal an ideal mixer would produce only two IF outputs one at the frequency sum of the RF and LO IF RF LO and another at the frequency difference between the RF and LO IF RF LO Filtering...

Page 220: ...LO frequencies and of the measured conversion lower sideband or upper sideband with up or down conversion The ana lyzer automatically calculates all frequencies and sets its receiver according to the set tings made A test setup with two mixers requires 3 independent source ports plus one receive port A R S ZNB ZNBT with two internal sources see Chapter 4 7 7 Internal Second Source on page 212 requ...

Page 221: ...can set the frequency range for this signal via Start Stop or CW Frequency A second signal is at a Fixed fre quency and the third at the calculated sum or difference frequency Auto The labeling of the complete diagrams depends on the sweep type The following mixer signal diagram corresponds to a frequency sweep RF signal left side Analyzer port number e g Port 1 frequency sweep range or fixed freq...

Page 222: ... account for the logical port settings 4 7 3 3 Intermodulation Measurements R S ZNB ZNBT K14 The intermodulation measurement requires options R S ZNB ZNBT K14 and as a prerequisite the Mixer and Frequency Conversion Measurements option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 The Intermodulation Wizard facilitates the measurement configuration and selection of results see Chapter 5 5 4 Intermod Tab on page 377 An intermod...

Page 223: ...xternal generator Both signals are combined externally and fed to the DUT input The inter modulation quantities can be measured at the DUT output transmitted wave b2 It is possible to interchange the ports no 1 and 2 For a R S ZNB ZNBT with two internal sources you can use any combination of ana lyzer ports that are supplied by different internal sources to generate the lower and upper tones see C...

Page 224: ...gnal to the RF input of a mixer and measure the intermodulation distortion of the IF output signal after conversion with an additional LO signal Intermodulation Measurement Results The intermodulation measurement provides two different types of results In the swept measurement the analyzer performs a frequency or power sweep of the two tone stimulus signal and displays the selected intermodulation...

Page 225: ...the intermodulation spectrum measurement CW Mode Spectrum the fre quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant the analyzer dis plays all intermodulation products in the vicinity of the signals up to a selectable order Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 226: ...is defined as follows IPkout PL out IMkrel k 1 In this formula PL out denotes the lower tone power in dBm measured at the DUT out put In analogy the input intercept point IPkin is defined as IPkin PL in IMkrel k 1 The intermodulation suppression generally decreases with increasing stimulus power The intercept point is equal to the lower tone power for which the intermodulation sup pression would r...

Page 227: ...requency of R S ZNB4 and R S ZNB8 network analyzers for details refer to the data sheet and to SENSe FREQuency commands 4 7 7 Internal Second Source Options R S ZNB B2 R S ZNB20 B2 R S ZNB40 B2 and R S ZNBTx B112 The hardware options R S ZNB B2 Internal Second Source for R S ZNB4 R S ZNB8 4 Port and R S ZNB20 B2 Second Internal Generator for R S ZNB20 4 Port R S ZNB40 B2 Second Internal Generator ...

Page 228: ...s the static frequency accuracy of the R S ZNB ZNBT For details refer to the data sheet 4 7 9 GPIB Interface Option R S ZNB ZNBT B10 This hardware option provides a GPIB bus connector according to standard IEEE 488 IEC 625 The GPIB bus interface is primarily intended for remote control of the R S ZNB ZNBT from a controller For details refer to Chapter 10 2 3 GPIB Interface on page 1254 4 7 10 Devi...

Page 229: ...witches low noise and power amplifiers The require ment for test and measurement equipment is to allow the user to control those compo nents directly from the instrument without the need of additional external tools e g an USB to RFFE adapter For these kinds of applications Rohde Schwarz has developed a RFFE GPIO exten sion board for the R S ZNB ZNBT This board is equipped with a 25 pin female con...

Page 230: ...board and instrument damage Please turn off the R S ZNB before mounting an internal RFFE GPIO extension board R S ZN B15 A hot plug installation is not supported and may damage board and instrument Current and Voltage Measurements variants 03 only For test purposes variants 03 of the R S ZN B15 Z15 can apply constant pin specific output voltages not only to the GPIO pins but also to the individual...

Page 231: ...e used for multiport measurements which require a lot of RAM Support for 32 bit OS and FW will be discontinued in the medium term When upgrading an instrument or instrument pool to 64 bit existing B19 options should also be upgraded Option R S ZNBT B19 Option R S ZNBT B19 provides an additional removable HD for a R S ZNBT includ ing 64 bit versions of Windows 7 and the VNA firmware order no 1332 9...

Page 232: ...NBT20 ports 13 to 16 R S ZNBT20 B24 R S ZNBT20 ports 17 to 20 R S ZNBT20 B25 R S ZNBT20 ports 21 to 24 R S ZNBT20 B26 It is also required to configure AGC for a waves manually see Chapter 5 5 3 2 AGC Manual Configuration Dialog on page 376 4 7 15 Receiver Step Attenuators Various Options see tables below Receiver step attenuators are used to adjust the received signal levels to the input level ran...

Page 233: ...asurements Compared to standard R S ZNB4 8 analyzers the noise floor of the receivers is shifted 10 dB down by reducing the attenuation in the frontends The trace noise for transmission measurements is also improved Hence a R S ZNB4 8 with Extended Dynamic Range option is well suited to test pas sive devices with high dynamic range The extended dynamic range can also be used to accurately measure ...

Page 234: ...flectometers Options R S ZNBT8 B508 to R S ZNBT8 B524 are port extensions with Dynamic Range reflectometers see Chapter 4 7 1 Additional Test Ports R S ZNBT only on page 192 They can be retrofitted at Rohde Schwarz service Extended Dynamic Range options are not available for R S ZNBT20 Extended Dynamic Range and Receiver Step Attenuators are mutually exclusive on the same 4 port block Mixed equipp...

Page 235: ... measurement is based on the standard test setup for forward S parameter measurements on a 2 port DUT An additional measurement to determine the supplied power PDC is required DC power measurement The DC power PDC supplied to the DUT can be measured using one or two of the four DC inputs DC INPUT 1 4 at the rear panel option R S ZVBx B81 The Power Added Efficiency dialog suggests different measure...

Page 236: ...age at the DUT Um pro vides the current and hence the DC input power R U U U I U P m m m DC 0 Constant current source I0 The DC power supply provides a constant current I0 the DC voltage at the DUT Um is measured This provides the DC input power 0 I U P m DC Voltage and current R Voltage and current of the DC power supply can be both unknown a precision resistor R is connected in series to the DUT...

Page 237: ...unknown frequencies A typical example is a mixer measurement with an unknown LO signal and therefore unknown IF output frequency Power calibration An external power meter can measure the exact signal power at an arbitrary point in the test setup reference plane and thus provide the reference values for a power calibration A typical example is a source power calibration for an arbitrary analyzer po...

Page 238: ...mation Repeat zeroing During warm up after switching on or connecting the instrument After a substantial change of the ambient temperature After fastening the power meter to an RF connector at high temperature After several hours of operation When very low power signals are to be measured e g less than 10 dB above the lower measurement limit A reset of the network analyzer does not affect the last...

Page 239: ... calibration A typical example is a receiver power calibration using a measured wave b1 External generators must be configured with their connection type and device address before they are available as additional sources SYSTEM SETUP External Devices Generators Configured generators appear in many control elements of the R S ZNB Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 240: ...rough a predefined list of frequencies or sig nal powers This mode can be used to accelerate the measurements involving external generators If Fast Sweep is activated in the External Generators dialog the ana lyzer compiles a list of the stimulus values frequencies and powers in all channels and transfers it to the generator The list is automatically updated and re transferred whenever the channel...

Page 241: ...at no separate partial measurement for the external generator signal is needed If no internal source is needed at all the external source is measured in the first partial measurement 4 7 20 External Switch Matrices 4 7 20 1 Overview From the perspective of the VNA the purpose of a switch matrix is to extend the num ber of test ports i e to convert an N port network analyzer into an N port network ...

Page 242: ...simultaneously For example consider a DUT with 6 unbal anced ports connected to a 2 port analyzer via a 2x6 matrix e g a R S ZN Z8x base unit without extensions For each stimulus port 5 sweeps are required to measure the resulting b waves 6 5 30 sweeps in total For real 6 port analyzers such as the R S ZNBT8 a single sweep per driving port would be sufficient Furthermore each additional sweep requ...

Page 243: ...est ports After this initial setup the R S ZNB ZNBT takes control of the attached matrices it allows to configure the test ports and dynamically establishes the required matrix routes according to the current measurement task To make a measurement set up a channel where all unused logical ports are disabled Switch matrices are global resources their configuration is not part of a recall set Howeve...

Page 244: ... 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 4 15 Unconnected right submatrix With the same extension type connecting one of two submatrix VNA ports enables reflection measurements for the corresponding matrix test ports However as long as a second connection between the VNA and this submatrix is missing intra submatrix transmission measurements are still impossible Right...

Page 245: ... performed using different physical paths where a path consists of the traversed VNA connections and matrix routes These paths may have different characteristics in particular if the corresponding matrix routes differ in the number of semiconductor or mechanical switching functions that have to be traversed Example For switch matrix ZV Z82 09 every test port can be reached via two different routes...

Page 246: ...tly one of the equipped 2x6 modules The overall route quality is determined by the number of solid state switches traversed on this 2x6 module SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP3T SP3T 2x6 Module Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 4 19 Routes and priorities See the datasheet of the respective switch matrix for details on the available routes Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 247: ...llows to select which optimization should be performed Always choose the precision optimization if the management connection is established using Direct Control see Chapter 4 7 10 Device Control on page 213 The switch ing speed of the matrix in this case is in the same range as the source switch of the VNA 4 7 20 5 Multiple Paths and Calibration With switch matrices a signal loss of up to 25 dB is...

Page 248: ...12 Route 21 Route 22 This kind of multipath calibration offers the following additional benefit During manual calibration the measured reflection transmission coefficients are pre sented as memory traces one per path By comparing these traces it should be pos sible to track down hardware problems cables connectors matrix already during calibration Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 249: ...eral overview of the analyzer s capabilities and their use refer to Chapter 4 Concepts and Features on page 75 5 1 Hardkeys and Softtools Most of the Function Keys serve as openers for an associated softtool in the analyzer GUI By default the following opener logic is applied If the associated softtool is currently not displayed pressing the hardkey opens the associated softtool activates its firs...

Page 250: ...S Alt Shift A Meas Softtool default TRACE FORMAT Alt Shift B Format Softtool default TRACE SCALE Alt Shift C Scale Softtool default TRACE TRACE CONFIG Alt Shift D Trace Config Softtool default TRACE LINES Alt Shift E Lines Softtool default TRACE MARKER Alt Shift G Marker Softtool default STIMULUS START Alt Shift J Stimulus Softtool Selects an input field corresponding to the start stop center or s...

Page 251: ... is identi cal to the Stimulus Power tab see Chapter 5 8 2 Power Tab on page 432 5 2 2 Bandwidth Tab Sets the measurement bandwidth and the shape of the IF filter The settings apply to all filters in the active channel A system error correction calibration remains valid when the filter settings are changed Optimizing the filter settings A high selectivity and a small filter bandwidth both suppress...

Page 252: ... R S ZNB K17 R S ZNBT K17 enables bandwidths up to 10 MHz see Chapter 4 7 4 Receiver Bandwidth 10 MHz on page 211 Remote command SENSe Ch BANDwidth RESolution SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution Selectivity Selects the shape of the IF filter Filters with Normal selectivity provide the shortest settling time recommended for fast measurements Medium selectivity filters have steeper edges but require longer s...

Page 253: ...p average smoothing does not significantly increase the measurement time but can eliminate narrow peaks and thus produce misleading results The sweep average is not frequency selective To eliminate a spurious signal in the vicinity of the measurement frequency from the trace alternative techniques e g a smaller filter bandwidth must be used In contrast to the sweep count for single sweep mode aver...

Page 254: ...he real and imaginary parts of each measurement result similar to Reduce Noise but with finite history Changing the mode resets the average cycle Note For frequency conversion measurements always Flatten Noise is used Remote command SENSe Ch AVERage MODE 5 3 Sweep Softtool The Sweep softtool allows to define the scope of the measurement in the active channel This includes the sweep type with relat...

Page 255: ...his parameter defines the grid of sweep points The step width between two consecutive sweep points is constant on a linear scale sweep types Lin Freq Time and CW Mode or on a logarithmic scale sweep types Log Freq and Power The sweep points for linear frequency sweeps may alternatively be defined using the Freq Step Size Tip Measurement time and screen resolution A large number of points improves ...

Page 256: ...ncreases the measurement time Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep STEP Sweep Time Auto Varies the measurement time for a sweep or delays the start of each sweep Sweep Time is the total measurement time for the sweep The minimum possible sweep time is equal to the estimated value in Auto mode Setting a larger sweep time is equivalent to defining a Meas Delay before each partial measurement Auto minimizes...

Page 257: ... source and receive ports Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl IPOint Freq Sweep Mode This setting defines whether the Stepped or Swept mode shall be used see Chap ter 4 1 4 4 Stepped vs Swept Mode on page 84 For Segmented sweeps this can be overridden by segment specific sweep modes see Chapter 5 3 2 2 Define Segments Dialog on page 248 Note Swept mode is only supported for linear frequency sweeps...

Page 258: ...ge 430 The step width between two consecutive sweep points is con stant and given by Span n 1 where n is the specified Number of Points n 1 The POWER BW AVG Power Lin Freq is the default sweep type In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a linear frequency scale as known e g from spectrum ana lyzers The following example shows a Lin Freq sweep with a stimulus ran...

Page 259: ...hmic Segmented In a Segmented linear frequency sweep the sweep range can be composed of sev eral continuous frequency sub ranges or single frequency points The sub ranges are termed sweep segments and are defined in the Define Segments Dialog Sweep seg ments may overlap The segment list must contain at least 2 distinct frequency points before a segmented frequency sweep can be started Instrument s...

Page 260: ...r 5 8 1 Stimulus Tab on page 430 Power sweeps are particularly suitable for the analysis of non linear effects satura tion compression on active and passive DUTs e g power amplifiers mixers In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a dB linear power scale The following example shows a Power sweep in the source power range between 25 dBm and 0 dBm performed at a CW ...

Page 261: ... sion characteristics over the time Tip Sweep time The time interval between two consecutive trigger pulses must not be smaller than the minimum measurement time per measurement point See Sweep Time Auto on page 241 Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE POINt Time Time sweeps like CW Mode sweeps are performed at constant frequency and stim ulus power which can be specified in the Stimulus settings se...

Page 262: ... channels Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE CW Define Segments Opens the Define Segments Dialog that allows to set up the channel for a Segmented frequency sweep Seg X Axis Scales the x axis for a segmented frequency sweep In Freq based mode the x axis covers the frequency ranges of all sweep seg ments including possible gaps between the segments Equal frequency spacings correspond to equal dista...

Page 263: ...e Segments Dialog The Define Segments dialog defines all channel settings for a Segmented frequency sweep and imports or exports segmented sweep settings Access CHANNEL SWEEP Sweep Type Define Segments Access Sweep Softtool Sweep Type Tab Define Segments on page 247 The dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the sweep range Use the Displayed Columns Dialog to select the columns...

Page 264: ... Start value is set the Start value is adjusted to the new Stop value minus 1 Hz Points is the number of sweep points in the segment A single segment can con sist of only one point If Points is set to 1 then the Stop frequency is set equal to the Start frequency Note Displayed Columns and Segment specific Measurement Settings The remaining columns allow to replace channel wide measurement settings...

Page 265: ... inserts a new segment before the active segment The segment numbers of all segments after the new segment are incremented by one The new segment covers a possible frequency gap between the two adjacent seg ments If there is no gap the Stop frequency of the inserted segment is set to the Start frequency of the next segment the Start frequency is equal to the Stop frequency minus 1 Hz A new segment...

Page 266: ... segment file extension is SegList The file starts with two comment lines containing the version and a third line reproducing the header of the segment list The following lines contain the entries of all columns of the segment list including the Displayed Columns that may be hidden in the Define Segments dialog Example The segmented sweep range is described by the following sweep segment file Note...

Page 267: ...e 248 Show Point List on page 250 Table Columns Each selected checked option adds a column to the segment list Name adds a column to assign a name to each segment A segment name is a string that may contain letters numbers and special characters Power Pb defines the internal source power channel base power for each indi vidual sweep segment See Power on page 431 Meas Bandwidth defines the IF filte...

Page 268: ...me setting Segment Time is the total measurement time for the sweep segment The mini mum segment sweep time to be set is equal to the estimated value in Auto mode Meas Delay sets a delay time allowing the DUT to settle before the hardware set tings of the analyzer are changed and a new partial measurement is started Changing the Meas Delay modifies the Segment Time and vice versa Auto minimizes th...

Page 269: ...Activate either continuous or single sweep mode for the active channel In Continuous mode the analyzer measures continuously repeating the current sweep In Single sweep mode the measurement is stopped after the number of selected Sweeps Restart Sweep initiates a new measurement cycle Tip Use All Channels Continuous or All Channels on Hold to select a common sweep mode for all channels If a Remote ...

Page 270: ... selected i e if some compatibility mode is active this opens the Restart Manager Dialog Otherwise it is inactive All Channels Continuous All Channels on Hold Selects a common sweep control mode for all channels of the active recall set All Channels Continuous The R S ZNB ZNBT continuously repeats the sweeps in all channels All Channels on Hold The R S ZNB ZNBT performs single sweeps according to ...

Page 271: ...1 Measurement results are being calculated Continuous Calculation Calculation 1 This doesn t mean the VNA is actually sweeping it may also wait for a trigger signal 5 3 3 2 Restart Manager Dialog The Restart Manager dialog defines whether the active sweep mode Continuous or Single and the Sweeps value are valid for all channels in the active recall set or for the active channel only Access CHANNEL...

Page 272: ...trol settings to the active channel only The number of sweeps in a Single sweep sequence is equal to the number of Sweeps in the active channel The table lists all channels in the active recall set and allows you to define individual numbers of sweeps for all channels When a new channel is selected the analyzer uses its specific number of sweeps Remote command INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPe SINGle SE...

Page 273: ...d has to be activated in the Calibration tab of the System Config dialog To prevent the VNA firmware from running out of memory after performing a full n port calibration of more than 4 test ports see Chapter 4 7 20 External Switch Matrices on page 226 the number of sweep points is automatically reduced Depending on the number of calibrated ports the following reduction applies 1 4 ports no reduct...

Page 274: ...g the related channel settings This provides a convenient way to repeat or correct an existing cali bration without necessarily repeating all measurements Scalar Power Cal Power Cal Opens the Power Cal Wizard If the active recall set contains several channels an Info box lets you decide whether the R S ZNB ZNBT acquires calibration data for the active channel or for all channels SMARTerCal Start C...

Page 275: ...bration unit to calculate the resulting error terms and to apply the results to the related channels Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 5 Automatic Calibration on page 158 A successful calibration will supersede the previous calibration discarding all previ ous system error correction data To keep older correction data you can transfer them to the calibration Pool using the Calibration Ma...

Page 276: ...of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available Figure 5 2 Calibration Unit wizard step 1 Ports Figure 5 3 Calibration Unit wizard step 1 Ports 4 test ports Ports Selects the test port s to be calibrated Note Calibration and port de activation Cal Softtool ...

Page 277: ...e of the calibration unit For background information see Chapter 4 5 5 Automatic Calibration on page 158 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Characterization Displays all characterizations which are stored in the active cal unit The Factory characterization is available for all calibration units it ensures an accurate calibration for a...

Page 278: ...erization wizard select Take All OSM and Through to make sure the necessary two port data is acquired See also Characterization Wizard on page 329 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure Calibrate all Channels Check this box to apply the acquired correction data to all channels in the active recall ...

Page 279: ...to Chapter 4 5 5 4 Multiple Port Assignments on page 164 for details on multiple port assignments Step 2 Connections on page 296 for SMARTerCal Depending on the number of test ports the user interface is slightly different Figure 5 4 Calibration Unit wizard step 2 Connections Cal Softtool ...

Page 280: ...on indicating insufficient or redundant entries The test port connectors are automatically set according to the connector type of the selected calibration unit port Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine TPORt SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment COUNt Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the...

Page 281: ...t If the configured port assignments are invalid this action is disabled Step 3 Cal Unit During the calibration phase the R S ZNB ZNBT displays a Cal Unit screen that guides the user through the actual correction data acquisition In each calibration step the calibration unit has to be re connected according to the depicted port assign ment auto detection is possible the related test ports are cali...

Page 282: ...assignment and the measurement progress Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep each diagram contains a single S parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard If switch matrices are involved a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S parameter trace is shown see Chap ter 4 7 20 5 Multiple Paths and...

Page 283: ...e output port i Instead of a single Sij trace we have multiple traces Sijvativbtj E g S21v1t1v3t2 means that S21 is measured with VNA port 1 connected to the input port and VNA port 3 connected to the output port Start Cal Sweep Abort Sweep Starts the calibration sweep for the related port assignment or aborts it Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg ACQuire Detect Ports S...

Page 284: ...lly performed for all required port assignments Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SAVE Extended cal unit settings MMEMory AKAL FACTory CONVersion MMEMory AKAL USER CONVersion SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL CONNection SYSTem COMMunicate AKA...

Page 285: ...libration Tab of the System Config dialog Refer to Chapter 5 4 1 2 Calibration Unit Wizard on page 260 for further infor mation Step 1 Ports The first page of the wizard presents the list of already configured calibrations and allows to Add new calibrations Delete or Modify existing calibrations Calibrate all Channels Check this box to apply the acquired correction data to all channels in the acti...

Page 286: ...or corrections by selecting the test ports to be calibrated and the calibration unit characterization and calibration type to be used Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal Calibration Start Cal Unit Add Modify The Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard MultiCal feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration Tab tab of the System Config dialog For background information on calibration...

Page 287: ...e of the calibration unit For background information see Chapter 4 5 5 Automatic Calibration on page 158 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Characterization Displays all characterizations which are stored in the active cal unit The Factory characterization is available for all calibration units it ensures an accurate calibration for a...

Page 288: ...tion data for the cal unit which may not be available on older calibration units or in user defined cal unit characterization files If a tooltip indicates missing two port characterization data simply perform a new charac terization of your cal unit In the first dialog of the Characterization wizard select Take All OSM and Through to make sure the necessary two port data is acquired See also Chara...

Page 289: ...signments are invalid this action is disabled Step 3 Cal Unit During the calibration phase the R S ZNB ZNBT displays a Cal Unit screen that guides the user through the correction data acquisition Same logic as in the single calibration version of the wizard see Step 3 Cal Unit on page 266 5 4 1 4 Calibration Presetting Wizard The Calibration Presetting wizard guides you through the setup and execu...

Page 290: ...tion the Cali bration Presetting wizard loads the underlying setup If the calibration setup is not changed and sweep data are available from previous calibrations the existing sys tem error correction can be optimized without repeating the measurement of all standards When you apply the acquired system error correction the active calibration is replaced and discarded To persist any kind of calibra...

Page 291: ...R S ZNB ZNBT 276 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 Figure 5 9 Calibration Presetting Ports and Type Figure 5 10 Calibration Presetting Ports and Type 4 test ports Ports Selects the test port s to be calibrated Cal Softtool ...

Page 292: ...Refl Norm Open denote one or more reflection mea surements at each port Reflection calibration types can be used for any set of test ports reflection calibra tions are simply repeated for each port Straight horizontal arrows example Trans Norm denote one or more transmis sion measurements between each pair of two ports Transmission calibration types require at least two physical ports For unidirec...

Page 293: ...g happens One of the selected calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values One of the selected calibration kits does not contain all standards that are required for the previously selected calibration type Different connector types are defined at the ports but the selected calibration type requires uniform connectors A cal kit standard does not cover the entire calibrate...

Page 294: ... all ports are always adjusted to the current selection User defined connectors can be added or removed in the Cal Connector Types Dialog Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SCONnection PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection DELete Cal Kit Selects a cal kit for the connector at e...

Page 295: ... back ground information see Chapter 4 5 2 4 Cal Kit Files on page 156 Remote command MMEMory LOAD CKIT Back Go back to Step 1 Ports and Type Start Start Step 3 Calibration Step 3 Calibration Allows to acquire error correction data for every required port pair and calibration standard where required depends on the selected ports and calibration type On Apply the R S ZNB ZNBT calculates the system ...

Page 296: ...standards and visualizes the measurement progress Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep each diagram contains a single S parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard If switch matrices are involved a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S parameter trace is shown see Chap ter 4 7 20 5 Multiple...

Page 297: ...sualizes the measurement progress Use the buttons representing the calibration standards to start the corresponding cali bration sweeps If Show Cal Kit Label is enabled on the Calibration tab of the System Config Dialog an additional Calibration Info dialog is displayed from where the cal sweep is actually started Don t Show this Dialog Again has the same effect as disabling Show Cal Kit Label A g...

Page 298: ...on of the system error correction and closes the calibration wizard The current instrument settings is stored with the correction data To avoid incompatibilities older calibration data is deleted unless it has been transfer red into the calibration Pool using the Calibration Manager see Chapter 5 4 4 3 Calibration Manager Dialog on page 341 Note Checks during the calculation of correction data Inc...

Page 299: ...formation The Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration Tab of the System Config dialog Refer to Chapter 5 4 1 4 Calibration Presetting Wizard on page 274 for further information Step 1 Ports and Type The first page of the wizard presents the list of already configured calibrations and allows to Add new calibrations Delete or Modif...

Page 300: ... type pre selected Next Proceeds to Step 2 Connectors and Cal Kits Inactive as long as no calibration is defined Define Calibration Dialog The Define Calibration dialog allows to select the test ports to be calibrated and the calibration type to be used Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 1 Calibration Types on page 141 for background information Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal Start Manual A...

Page 301: ...n type The green arrow symbols give a preview of the type and the number of calibration sweeps involved Curved arrows example Refl Norm Open denote one or more reflection mea surements at each port Reflection calibration types can be used for any set of test ports reflection calibra tions are simply repeated for each port Straight horizontal arrows example Trans Norm denote one or more transmis si...

Page 302: ... on the selected ports and calibration types Same logic as in the single calibration version of the wizard see Step 3 Calibration on page 280 The possibility to share measurements between the calibrations and the Reduced Through logic help to keep the number of measurements as small as possible see Chapter 4 5 1 11 Full n Port Calibration with Reduced Number of Through Connec tions on page 150 5 4...

Page 303: ... traces in the diagram vary according to the calibration stage While no calibration is performed or during a source power calibration Power the following traces are displayed A limit line double horizontal represents the target power of the source power cali bration Cal Power Pmtr n shows the reading of the power meter n in use This trace is only shown during the first calibration sweeps the follo...

Page 304: ...he port overview A source power calibration is available at each generator port If a SMARTerCal is active additional receiver power calibrations are not allowed and the R S ZNB ZNBT only offers the possibility to perform Source Flat ness calibrations of the related test ports See Chapter 4 5 7 3 Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration on page 174 for details Select a Power or Meas Recei...

Page 305: ...s you through the Power calibration for a particular source port flatness or reference receiver calibration Measurement receiver calibration is described in Power Cal Dialog Meas Receiver on page 292 Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal Power Cal Power Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 6 1 Source Power Calibration on page 168 Port Overview The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyze...

Page 306: ...uides you through the source power calibration for a single port The source flatness data complement an active SMARTerCal Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal Power Cal Source Flatness Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 6 1 Source Power Calibration on page 168 and Chap ter 4 5 7 3 Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration on page 174 Port Overview The dialog shows the selected source por...

Page 307: ...e power cali bration for a particular receiver port Meas Receiver calibrates the measurement receiver only the reference receiver is calibrated together with the source To ensure accurate source signal powers a source power calibration is required prior to the measurement receiver calibration Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 6 2 Measurement Receiver Calibration on page 169 Access CHANNE...

Page 308: ...performed as described in Calibration procedure on page 169 No additional calibration settings are needed Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA PORT PhyPt 5 4 1 7 SMARTerCal Wizard Cal Unit The SMARTerCal Cal Unit wizard guides you through the setup and execution of an automatic SMARTerCal Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal S...

Page 309: ...n Pool using the Calibration Manager Dialog The system error correction data determined in a calibration procedure is stored in the analyzer You can read these correction data using the remote control com mand SENSe Ch CORRection CDATa If external switch matrices are involved use SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa instead Step 1 Ports Selects the calibrated analyzer ports the cal unit characterizat...

Page 310: ... are connected to one of its USB ports If several cal units are connec ted one of them must be selected for calibration active cal unit A warning is dis played if the current sweep range of the network analyzer exceeds the characterized frequency range of the calibration unit For background information see Chapter 4 5 5 Automatic Calibration on page 158 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AK...

Page 311: ...ted by default See Configured Devices on page 622 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect PMETer ID Power Port Selects the port for the scalar source power calibration Calibrate all Channels Check this box to apply the acquired correction data to all channels in the active recall set Leave it unchecked preset setting to apply them only to the active channel Note that this option is available only ...

Page 312: ...calibration commands define the calibrated ports Port Assignment manual The Connections step allows to configure the assignment s between VNA ports and calibration unit ports manually The R S ZNB ZNBT always proposes an optimum solution minimum number of assignments that additionally minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibration stages For user modified assignments it prov...

Page 313: ...ed port assignments are invalid this action is disabled Step 3 SMARTerCal In the final step the R S ZNB ZNBT displays a SMARTerCal screen that guides the user through the calibration data acquisition 1 For each port assignment connect the calibration unit to the related set of test ports and perform an automatic system error correction 2 Finally replace the calibration unit by the power meter and ...

Page 314: ...nce R S ZNB ZNBT 299 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 During the power calibration substep the upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part displays the power meter connection Cal Softtool ...

Page 315: ...med for every required test port pair for every possible path if external switch matrices are involved and during system errof correction for every required standard Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg ACQuire SENSe Ch ...

Page 316: ... calibration wizard The results are applied to the active channel or to all channels in the active recall set if all channels are calibrated The current instrument settings are stored with the cor rection data To avoid incompatibilities older calibration data is deleted unless it has been transfer red into the calibration Pool using the Calibration Manager Dialog Use the Power Cal Wizard to perfor...

Page 317: ...ement data for all standards that are required for the selected system error calibration type s Calculate the error terms and apply the result to the active channel b Acquire the power calibration data at the selected source port and use this result to correct the absolute receiver powers at all calibrated ports Background and related information The Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard feature is d...

Page 318: ...selected system error correction opens the Define Calibration Dialog dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre selected Next Proceeds to Step 2 Connections Inactive as long as no SMARTerCal is defined Define Calibration Dialog In MultiCal mode the Define Calibration dialog allows to define the individual SMAR TerCals by selecting the test ports to be calibrated as well as the ca...

Page 319: ...ersion 2 10 uncalibrated ports were disabled in the related channel s If only one of the physical ports forming a balanced port was calibrated the balanced port was dissolved and only the uncalibrated single ended port was disabled In earlier FW versions there was no such port deactivation mechanism Since FW version 2 40 an uncalibrated port is only disabled if it is not used by a measurement i e ...

Page 320: ...ts on page 163 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT CATalog SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT STANdard CATalog SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL SDATa Query further cal unit properties SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL DATE SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL FRANge SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PORTs SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL WARMup STA...

Page 321: ...panel depends on the number of test ports available Figure 5 19 Multiple port assignments Similar functionality as for the SingleCal version of the wizard see Step 2 Connec tions on page 296 select the adequate calibration in the Cal Type Ports table to display and edit the corresponding port asssignment s Start Proceeds to Step 3 SMARTerCal If the configured port assignments are invalid this acti...

Page 322: ...ration Background and related information Refer to Chapter 4 5 7 SMARTerCal on page 172 for background information See Chapter 5 4 1 10 SMARTerCal Wizard Manual MultiCal on page 314 for the MultiCal variant of the wizard Use the Power Cal Wizard to perform an additional source flatness calibration see Chapter 4 5 7 3 Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration on page 174 If the active chan...

Page 323: ...Power Port Note Calibration and port de activation The way the analyzer fimware activates deactivates ports after a successfull calibration system error correction or power calibration has slightly changed In all FW releases calibrated ports that were previously disabled are automatically enabled as single ended logical ports Starting with FW version 2 10 uncalibrated ports were disabled in the re...

Page 324: ...Devices on page 622 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect PMETer ID Power Port Selects the port for the scalar source power calibration Calibrate all Channels Check this box to apply the acquired correction data to all channels in the active recall set Leave it unchecked preset setting to apply them only to the active channel Note that this option is available only if the active recall set conta...

Page 325: ...e number of test ports available Figure 5 21 SMARTerCal Manual Step 2 Connectors and Cal Kits 4 ports The upper part of the panel shows the previously configured port s and calibration type The lower part gives access to the connector and cal kit settings Connector Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated For symmetric sexless connector types e g 7 mm PC7 Gender...

Page 326: ...ics Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection GENDers Import Cal Kit Opens the Import Calibration Kit dialog that allows to import a cal kit file For back ground information see Chapter 4 5 2 4 Cal Kit Files on page 156 Remote command MMEMory LOAD CKIT Back Go back to Step 2 Connectors and Cal Kits Start Start Step 3 SMARTerCal Step 3 SMARTe...

Page 327: ...h their related measurements and visualizes the measurement progress Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep each diagram contains a single S parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard If switch matrices are involved a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S parameter trace is shown see Chap te...

Page 328: ...r meter has been acquired successfully A green checkmark after the port symbol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed Tip Optional calibration measurements If the selected calibration kit comprises a Sliding Match then for every required Match measurement either the Match or at least three positions of the Sliding Match must be measured See Ch...

Page 329: ... Cal Wizard to perform an additional source flatness calibration see Chapter 4 5 7 3 Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration on page 174 Note Checks during the calculation of correction data Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type the standards and the channel settings may cause the calibration to be inaccurate The analyzer auto detects poten tial sources of errors and d...

Page 330: ...ion Step 1 Ports and Type The first page of the wizard presents the list of already configured SMARTERCals and allows to Add new SMARTerCals Delete or Modify existing SMARTerCals Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal SMARTerCal Start Manual Calibrate all Channels Check this box to apply the acquired correction data to all channels in the active recall set Leave it unchecked preset setting to apply them onl...

Page 331: ...s no calibration is defined Define Calibration Dialog Selects the calibrated analyzer ports the calibration type and specifies the power meter connection Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 7 2 Calibration Types on page 173 Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal SMARTerCal Start Manual Add Modify The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available Figure 5 23 Define SMARTerCal...

Page 332: ... not required by any trace of the related channel Remote command The port parameters in many calibration commands define the calibrated port s Type Selects the calibration type to be performed For background information see Chap ter 4 5 7 2 Calibration Types on page 173 SMARTerCal is based on a full n port calibration n 1 Adapter Removal is a 2 port calibration all other calibration types can be u...

Page 333: ... port pair and calibration standard where required depends on the selected ports and calibration type as well as power correction data from the power meter Same functionality as for the SingleCal version of the wizard see Step 3 Calibra tion on page 280 Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal SMARTerCal Start Manual Next Next The order of the system error correction and power calibration sweeps is arbitrary ...

Page 334: ...he buttons in the Cal Devices tab open the following dialogs Cal Connector Types See Chapter 5 4 2 1 Cal Connector Types Dialog on page 319 Cal Kits See Chapter 5 4 2 2 Calibration Kits Dialog on page 322 Characterize Cal Unit See Chapter 5 4 2 3 Characterize Cal Unit Dialog on page 327 5 4 2 1 Cal Connector Types Dialog The Cal Connector Types dialog displays and modifies the list of available co...

Page 335: ...ange its name offset model and reference impedance Switching between sexed and sex less will delete all kits assigned to the connector type Char Imp The characteristic impedance or reference impedance Char Imp Z0 for the connec tors is a critical value that has an impact on various parameter conversions Z0 enters into The calculation of the S parameters for the calibration standards associated wit...

Page 336: ...ype Loss in units of dB sqrt GHz into an Agilent type Offset Loss in units of GΩ s and vice versa see View Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog on page 325 The Electrical Length and Delay values in the View Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog are directly entered and therefore independent of εr For waveguides the low frequency cutoff frequency fc is important because no wave propagation is possible at freq...

Page 337: ...e contents of the Available Cal Kits table vary depending on the selected Con nector Type The table may also contain kits with ideal or typical parameter values see Cal Kit Parameter Types The Agilent Model is an optional scheme to character ize the offset parameters of the standards see Offset Parameters on page 326 Cal kit labels Assigning a Label to user defined calibration kits is optional How...

Page 338: ...e For user defined or imported kits you can modify the contents See Kit Standards Dialog on page 323 Remote command The following commands create and modify calibration kits SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType SELect SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType LSELect SENSe CORRection CKIT DMODe SENSe CORRection CKIT DELete Query connector types and calibration kits SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog SENSe CORR...

Page 339: ... Gender describe the calibration standard type for an overview see Chapter 4 5 2 1 Calibration Standard Types on page 152 Label is a user defined name of the standard The label can help you identify a standard or distinguish different standards with similar parameters Min Freq and Max Freq define the rated frequency range of the standard Dur ing calibration the analyzer checks whether the sweep ra...

Page 340: ...n kit The properties of the standard can be edited in the table Copy creates a new standard based on the properties of an existing standard Delete deletes the selected standard View Modify opens the View Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog This dialog shows the circuit model for the selected standard For user defined standard you can modify the circuit model parameters See View Modify Cal Kit Standard...

Page 341: ...parameters depend on whether or not the circuit model is defined as Agi lent Model see Chapter 5 4 2 1 Cal Connector Types Dialog on page 319 In an Agilent Model a calibration standard is characterized by its Delay in s its characteristic impedance Z0 in Ω and its Offset Loss in GΩ s Otherwise the standard is characterized by the R S ZVR compatible parameters Electrical Length in m Char Imp in Ω a...

Page 342: ...ce L are both assumed to be frequency dependent and approximated by the first four terms of the Taylor series around f 0 Hz See also description of the load parameters for the different standard types in Chap ter 4 5 2 1 Calibration Standard Types on page 152 Remote command SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType 5 4 2 3 Characterize Cal Unit Dialog The Characterize Cal Unit dialog displays the propert...

Page 343: ...L ADDRess ALL SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Authentication Allows you to set a password to protect the characterization dialog and the Characteri zation Wizard from unauthorized access and operation Set Password opens a dia log to enter the password and activate password protection at the next time the Set Password dialog is opened Enter an empty string no password to deactivate pass wor...

Page 344: ... STANdard CATalog SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL SDATa Characterization Wizard The Characterization wizard guides you through the automatic characterization of a calibration unit Access Characterization Wizard Start Characterization The guided characterization consists of the following steps 1 Characterization Select the characterized ports and cal unit standards and ini tiate the characterizatio...

Page 345: ...UTO PORTs CONNection SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs Take OSM Take All OSM and Through Starts a calibration sweep for the selected port s Take All OSM and Through ini tiates a series of calibration sweeps the R S ZNB ZNBT acquires a full set of one port and two port data This is required for the transmission normalizations and for a One Path Two Ports calibration see Dependency between ca...

Page 346: ...unit Activate this checkbox to save the characterization data to the SD card Tip If the characterized CalUnit doesn t have an SD card slot the checkbox is hidden If the CalUnit has an SD card slot but the SD card isn t accessible the checkbox is greyed out File Name Comment Optional Selects a filename to reference the characterization data set in the Characterize Cal Unit and Calibration Unit dial...

Page 347: ...ration settings You do not need any of the buttons in the Pwr Cal Settings tab Select Cal Power if you use an amplifier between the source port and the DUT Select Transm Coefficients if you want to modify the power calibration proce dure Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 6 Scalar Power Calibration on page 166 Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs Cal Power see Chapter 5 4 ...

Page 348: ... in each sweep as controlled by the calibrated reference receiver a wave receiver is multiplied by the selected convergence factor With a conver gence factor larger smaller than 1 the source power correction after each flatness calibration step is larger smaller than the measured deviation from the desired power For analyzer test ports a convergence factor 1 is appropriate Convergence factors dif ...

Page 349: ...enter of the dialog visualizes the settings and results below Access CHANNEL CAL Pwr Cal Settings Cal Power Related information The settings in the Modify Cal Power dialog are also used to define port specific source powers in arbitrary mode with option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 refer to Modify Cal Power Dialog on page 364 Port Overview The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer Each port is ...

Page 350: ...wer Example Use of an amplifier in the signal path Assume that a DUT requires a constant input power of 25 dBm and that the mea surement path contains an amplifier with a 30 dB gain After a reset of the analyzer the channel power Pb is 10 dBm With a Port Power Offset of 5 dB at the calibrated source port and a Cal Power Offset of 30 dB the source power calibration ensures that the constant input p...

Page 351: ...ct 5 4 3 3 Power Meter Transmission Coefficients Dialog The Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog allows you to modify the scalar power calibration data in order to account for an additional two port device in the test setup with known transmission coefficients Configuration of the transmission coeffi cients and activation are independent from each other Access CHANNEL CAL Pwr Cal Settings ...

Page 352: ... loss list The buttons in the dialog provide different ways of cre ating and modifying the list Use Insert Delete Delete All to edit the list manually In a power time or CW mode sweep one point at the fixed CW frequency is sufficient In a frequency sweep it is possible to enter several coefficients to account for a fre quency dependent attenuation Transmission coefficients are interpolated between...

Page 353: ...ile Imports the transmission coefficients from a trace file The imported file must be either in Touchstone s n p or in csv format see also Chapter 4 4 2 Trace Files on page 134 Remote command MMEMory LOAD CORRection TCOefficient Recall Save You can save the displayed power loss list to a power meter correction list file with extension pmcl and re load it in later sessions Remote command MMEMory LO...

Page 354: ... each channel and trace appears in the setup information Setup Info Setup Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection STATe Load Match Correction Enables the the load match correction for frequency conversion measurements The load match correction prevents a possible impairment of the transmission S parameter measurements due to the influence of the waves reflected at the receive load ports The load match ...

Page 355: ...341 Note A label PCal Off appears behind the trace list of a wave quantitiy or a ratio if the power calibration is switched off see also Chapter 4 5 6 3 Power Calibration Labels on page 170 The calibration status of each channel and trace appears in the setup information see Setup Tab on page 613 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection PCAL Manage Cals Recall Last Cal Set Loads and activates the recall...

Page 356: ...at each generator port Power calibrations can be enabled or disabled after the necessary calibration data has been acquired see Chapter 5 4 1 6 Power Cal Wizard on page 287 Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection STATe SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection GENerator Gen STATe SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt STATe SENSe Ch CORRection PCAL 5 4 4 3 Calibration Manager Dialog The Calibration Manage...

Page 357: ...in the pool is overwritten by the new calibration To continue the calibration confirm by using button Overwrite Current File or Resolve Pool Link on page 343 Channel State The Channel State table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration Channels can use either the active channel calibration if available a previously stored user correction data or the fact...

Page 358: ...command MMEMory STORe CORRection MMEMory LOAD CORRection MMEMory LOAD CORRection MERGe Pool Delete from Pool The Pool table shows all correction data sets CalGroup_name cal in the direc tory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data The name of a pool data set can be modified directly in the corresponding table cell Delete from Pool deletes a cal group file from the pool Note how...

Page 359: ...CORRection DATE SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter Sfk SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter Sfk PORT PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter COUNt SENSe Chn CORRection SSTate 5 5 Channel Config Softtool The Channel Config functions select create and delete channels configure the source and receive ports of the R S ZNB ZNBT and optimize the measurement process Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG hardkey 5...

Page 360: ...ation time By default the channels are named Ch1 Ch2 so that Ch n 1 precedes Ch n This order is always maintained even if channels are renamed invisible because no traces are assigned to them or distributed over several diagram areas Tip You can simply tap a line in the channel list to activate the corresponding channel Remote command The numeric suffix Ch appended to the first level mnemonic of a...

Page 361: ... Manager dialog Tips Use Add Trace to create a new trace in the active channel To create a new channel and a new trace and display it in the active diagram area use Add Ch Trace Remote command CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe ON CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED Delete Channel Deletes the current channel including all the traces assigned to it...

Page 362: ...TATe 5 5 1 2 Channel Manager Dialog The Channel Manager dialog provides convenient access to certain actions of the Channels Tab allows to rename channels and to toggle single sweep mode Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Channels Channel Manager Background information Refer to Chapter 4 1 3 3 Active and Inactive Traces and Channels on page 78 Channel table The rows and columns of the channel table rep...

Page 363: ...command CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe 5 5 1 3 RFFE Config Dialog for R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 02 The RFFE Config dialog gives access to the channel specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces and GPIO ports provided by variant 02 of the internal external RFFE GPIO extension board R S ZN B15 Z15 Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Channels RFFE If variant 03 of the extension board is used a different user inter...

Page 364: ...r table allows to define and set the GPIO pin voltages see Basic GPIO Configuration on page 355 Sweep Sequencer Tab Gives access to the Sweep Sequencer functionality see Chapter 5 5 1 7 Sweep Sequencer on page 357 5 5 1 4 RFFE Config Dialog for R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Controls the channel specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces and GPIO ports provided by variant 03 of the internal external RFF...

Page 365: ...10 2 5 RFFE GPIO Interface on page 1265 RFFE Tab The RFFE tab is divided into two parts The upper part gives access to the RFFE interface settings and allows manual command execution and result display see Basic RFFE Interface Settings and Command Execution on page 352 The lower part allows to define and apply test voltages and to execute voltage and current measurements on the RFFE pins see RFFE ...

Page 366: ...y the GPIO pin voltages see Basic GPIO Configuration on page 355 The right part allows to define and execute voltage and current measurements on the GPIO pins see Basic GPIO Configuration on page 355 The Apply button activates both the Output Voltage and Range Shunt resist ance settings The Meas button starts the voltage and current measuerements 5 5 1 5 RFFE Interface Configuration Access Control...

Page 367: ...eceived response if success fully read Seq Enables disables the corresponding RFFE interface in the Sweep Sequencer see Chapter 5 5 1 7 Sweep Sequencer on page 357 Remote command CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings STATe CLK VIO VLow VHigh These columns allow to set the physical properties of the RFFE interfaces clock rate CLK supply voltage VIO and the voltage levels of the data signal SDATA VLow and cl...

Page 368: ...mode this section is hidden For details and background information see the MIPI Alliance Specification for RF Front End Control Interface Remote command CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus COMMand DATA SEND Use the SEND button to send the previously defined command e g before starting the sweep for the related channel On a R S ZN B15 Z15 var 03 before the command is executed the related shunt resistance is set to...

Page 369: ...d CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO Range Shunt Defines the current range for the voltage and current measurement on the respective RFFE pin The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance The Output Voltage and Range Shunt settings will not be activated until Set is pressed Remote command CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA...

Page 370: ... of the voltage current measurements on the related RFFE pins Remote command CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST DATA VOLTage CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk VOLTage CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST VIO VOLTage CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST DATA CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST VIO CURRent 5 5 1 6 GPIO Configuration Access Control Tab of the RFFE Config dialog if the analyzer is equipped with a R S ZN...

Page 371: ...put Voltage Sets the default voltage of the respective GPIO pin for R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 02 Var 03 Remote command CONTrol Ch GPIO Port VOLTage DEFault Set Use the Set button to apply all RFFE GPIO configuration changes and to activate the configured voltage and Range Shunt settings to the RFFE GPIO pins Remote command CONTrol Ch GPIO VOLTage OUTPut GPIO Voltage and Current Measurements Defines and e...

Page 372: ... Ch GPIO Port RANGe CONTrol Ch GPIO Port SHUNt Meas Starts the voltage and current measurement Note that Start Meas does not automatically activate the Voltage and Range Shunt settings of the current channel Use Set to activate them manually The measurement sampling time can only be set via remote command It is not channel specific and applies to RFFE and GPIO measurements Remote command CONTrol C...

Page 373: ...y 3 Make the appropriate settings in the sweep sequencer table a Define the RFFE commands to be sent RFFE columns b Set the GPIO port voltages to be applied GPIO columns c Specify the delays to be introduced between subsequent commands switches and before the sweep segment start Wait column 4 Use Delete to remove the selected item or Delete All to clear or the command switch sequence 5 Use OK to a...

Page 374: ... Table The Wait column allows to specify delay times between subsequent sequence steps and between the final sequence step and the sweep segment start Remote command Unsegmented sweeps CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr DELay Segmented sweeps CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr DELay 5 5 2 Port Config Tab Configures the source and receive ports of the R S ZNB ZNBT for measurements on frequency converting DUTs d...

Page 375: ...r Selects either the channel base frequency power or one of the port frequencies powers as the stimulus axis in all diagrams of the active recall set The selected stimulus axis is displayed in the channel line Select the axis according to your port configuration and measurement results Example Port 1 provides the RF input signal for a mixer the IF output signal is measured at Port 2 The port frequ...

Page 376: ...ecific frequencies arbitrary mode and other port specific source set tings Arbitrary mode requires software option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 seeChapter 4 7 3 Mixer and Frequency Conversion Measurements on page 203 If any of the port frequencies are changed from their preset values the frequency con version mode is activated on pressing Apply or OK in the dialog An Arb label appears in the channel line Reset...

Page 377: ...nal Switch Matrices are part of the RF connection configuration opera tion with Internal Second Source is not supported In this case the Gen flag is only enabled for generator ports Switching on the signal source permanently eliminates the power settling times of the DUT but may introduce measurement inaccuracies e g due to crosstalk between two ports Therefore Gen must be switched off to perform ...

Page 378: ...he conversion formula has been modeled according to the needs of a typical fre quency converting measurement where mixer products intermodulation products or harmonics occur With a base ratio a 1 an offset ratio b 1 and a frequency offset equal to the LO frequency the formula is appropriate for mixer measurements If the RF signal is at the channel base frequency the port frequency is at the freque...

Page 379: ...ower range for power sweeps or fixed power for frequency time and CW Mode sweeps see Modify Cal Power Dia log on page 364 In the default configuration the channel base power Pb is used The result is displayed in the Power Result column Slope Defines a linear factor to modify the port specific source power as a function of the stimulus frequency The Slope is added to the power conversion it increas...

Page 380: ...ialog visualizes the settings and results below The control elements in the Modify Cal Power dialog are described in the following sections Port Power Offset on page 335 Cal Power Offset on page 335 Receiver Level Tab Provides access to the receiver step attenuator settings Receiver step attenuators are optional hardware They are not available for R S ZNB20 R S ZNB40 and R S ZNBT20 For background ...

Page 381: ...bitrary mode depending on the cur rent port configuration If individual port frequencies are selected the arbitrary mode is activated If individual port powers but no individual frequencies are selected the current mode is maintained If all port frequencies are equal to the channel base frequency and all port powers are equal to the channel base power e g after Reset Port Settings the arbitrary mo...

Page 382: ...when Enabled is selected as shown in Figure 5 27 A R S ZNB ZNBT with two internal sources allows parallel measurements with Fre quency Offset which can be configured in the corresponding tab on the right Figure 5 27 Define Parallel Measurement R S ZNB For the R S ZNBT the table and controls in the lower left part allow to define the avail ble DUTs along with their physical ports The visualization ...

Page 383: ... a parallel measurement of mul tiple identical DUTs assuming the DUTs are fully connected in an aligned way i e port j 1 Port Count of DUT i 1 Number of DUTs is connected to VNA port i 1 Port Count j In particular this requires Number of DUTs Port Count to be less or equal than the number of available physical VNA ports For instance on a 16 port R S ZNBT you can set up 4 four port DUTs in a few se...

Page 384: ...related DUT Auto lets the VNA firmware select the default drive port order An explicit drive port ordering can be specified as a complete comma separated list of the respective DUT port numbers 1 Port Count see Define Parallel Measurement R S ZNBT8 with 24 ports above For background information see Chapter 4 1 4 2 Parallel Measurements on Multi ple DUTs on page 80 Define physical port connections ...

Page 385: ...eir use is sufficiently explained in the above procedures The remote control implementation of the Multiple DUTs feature introduces an addi tional port group layer where a DUT s port group consists of the logical VNA ports that are actually connected to this DUT Remote command SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts SOURce Ch GROup COUNt SOURce Ch GROup Grp NAME SOURce Ch GROup Grp DPORt COUNt SOURce Ch GROup ...

Page 386: ...of the dialog now displays the selected DUT 2 Activate the Reference Impedance tab 3 In the DUT perspective toggle select one of the related DUT port s 4 Use the controls in the Reference Impedance tab to specify the impedance set tings The user interface is identical to the one described in Reference Impedance Tab on page 443 Frequency Offset Tab The Frequency Offset tab allows to activate Parall...

Page 387: ... SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset DVALue SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset BWFactor State indication warning When attempting to activate the Parallel Measurement with Frequency Offset i e on closing the Define Parallel Measurement dialog with the OK button the VNA Firm ware checks whether the requested settings are technically feasible If this is not the case the firmware disables paral...

Page 388: ...ial sweep before the hardware settings are changed and the next partial mea surement is carried out in an additional sweep This is usually faster than Chop ped mode In Chopped sweep mode the analyzer completes the necessary sequence of partial measurements at each sweep point and obtains the result measurement point before proceeding to the next sweep point A trace is obtained from the beginning o...

Page 389: ...rious signals Tip In the presence of several spurious signals setting the Image Suppr parameter globally may not be sufficient To improve the result perform a segmented frequency sweep and assign independent LO frequencies to the individual sweep segments Application example Consider the following test setup with strongly reflecting DUT e g a bandpass in its stop band that is measured in transmiss...

Page 390: ...gh RF overdrive reserve and is appropriate for high RF input lev els Low Noise corresponding to a higher internal A D converter input level This set ting increases the dynamic range and is appropriate for low RF input levels Low Dist and Low Noise can also be selected statically completely disabling the adaptive behavior This is appropriate if the characteristics of the input paths must be constan...

Page 391: ... be statically set to Low Dist or Low Noise the refer ence receiver AGC mode is always set to Auto see AGC Mode on page 375 With the option available also the AGC of the reference receivers the a waves can be set statically The increase in measurement speed for settings Low Dist and Low Noise is not achieved if the AGC mode of one of the receivers is set to Auto Range If Segmented AGC is enabled e...

Page 392: ...r the individual sweep segments drive ports receivers as follows if LD was selected for any of the related measurement points then LD is assigned otherwise LN is assigned In other words LN is assigned if and only if LN was selected for all related measure ment points Note Before running the Learn Sweep create the adequate port configuration and add the required traces The Learn Sweep is not availa...

Page 393: ...asurement Dialog on page 383 Frequencies Powers See Chapter 5 5 4 4 Frequencies and Power Dialog on page 386 Generators See Chapter 5 19 4 4 External Generators Dialog on page 625 Intermod Pwr Cal See Chapter 5 5 4 5 Intermod Pwr Cal Wizard on page 387 Reset Frequency Conv Intermod Disables the intermodulation measurement mode and switches back to normal mode no frequency conversion The intermodul...

Page 394: ...ency 2 GHz lower tone position of marker M1 Tone Distance 3 MHz defines the upper tone position of marker M2 Max IM Order 9 The peaks correspond to the intermodulation products lower IM9 lower IM7 lower IM5 marker M6 lower IM3 marker M5 lower tone upper tone upper IM3 marker M3 upper IM5 marker M4 upper IM7 upper IM9 Add CW Mode Activates a new channel for the spectrum measurement The CW Frequency...

Page 395: ...zard The wizard proceeds in 4 steps 1 Configure intermodulation measurement see Chapter 5 5 4 3 Define Intermodu lation Distortion Measurement Dialog on page 383 2 Define the frequency or power sweep ranges for the lower tone see Chap ter 5 5 4 4 Frequencies and Power Dialog on page 386 Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 396: ...GUI Reference R S ZNB ZNBT 381 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 3 Select the measurement results see Chapter 5 9 4 Intermod Tab on page 452 Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 397: ...GUI Reference R S ZNB ZNBT 382 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 4 Finish the wizard with or without power calibration see Chapter 5 5 4 5 Intermod Pwr Cal Wizard on page 387 Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 398: ...he OK button is available as soon as a valid configuration has been defined Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Intermod Define Intermod Independent sources for the lower and upper tone requires a R S ZNB ZNBT with two internal sources see Chapter 4 7 7 Internal Second Source on page 212 Alterna tively an external generator can be used see Chapter 4 7 3 3 Intermodulation Mea surements on page 207 Channe...

Page 399: ...econd source is available the upper tone must be provided by a previously configured external generator Note If External Switch Matrices are part of the RF connection configuration opera tion with internal second source is not supported In this case only external generators can be used as upper tone generator Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation UTONe Receiving Port Selects the receiving ...

Page 400: ... Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation TDIStance Prepare Measurement of IM Order Selects the order s of the measured intermodulation products Each order requires an additional measurement at a different frequency therefore the measurement time increases with the number of selected orders If a higher order IM is selected its fre quency may exceed the upper or lower frequency limit of the an...

Page 401: ...Frequency Power CW Frequency The sweep range settings depend on the active sweep type frequency or power sweep The frequency and power settings for the lower tone are identical with the Stimulus settings see Chapter 5 8 Stimulus Softtool on page 429 Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP SENSe Ch FREQuency CW SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP SOURce Ch...

Page 402: ...r tone source are combined via the external combiner The calibration is performed in three steps Source power calibration for the lower tone signal The external power meter is connected to the combiner output It measures the source power at the calibration plane input of the DUT During the lower tone source power calibration the upper tone is switched off If a frequency conversion measurement is a...

Page 403: ...on ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt IMODulation ACQuire Apply Applies the power calibration results and closes the calibration wizard 5 5 5 Pwr Cal Settings Tab Replicates the Pwr Cal Settings tab of the Cal softtool see Chapter 5 4 3 Pwr Cal Settings Tab on page 332 5 5 6 Mixer Mode Tab Controls the measurement of the mixing products generated by mixer under test MUT that is supplied with ...

Page 404: ...al Man ual Wizard for Mixer Mode on page 398 SMARTerCal Repeat launches the adequate Mixer Meas specific wiz ard to repeat the currently active SMARTerCal if available Generators See Chapter 5 19 4 4 External Generators Dialog on page 625 Reset Frequency Conversion Reset Frequency Conversion disables all frequency conversion measurements including e g an active intermodulation measurement A Mix la...

Page 405: ...ed Depending on your selection the required channels and traces are set up automatically the active channel and its first trace will be renamed all other channels and traces in the active recall set will be deleted Table 5 2 Auto created channels and traces Measurement Parameter Channel Name Trace Name Conversion Gain S j i Ch_M Conv RF Reflection S i i Ch_M RF_Refl IF Reflection S j j Ch_M IF_Ref...

Page 406: ...A port was selected as the respective LO in the previous step This in turn requires a second internal source see Chapter 4 7 7 Internal Second Source on page 212 3 The configuration of the mixer measurement is now prepared and can be applied using the Finish button If changes were made in the previous wizard steps it is highly recommended to recalibrate the channel Depending on your selection the ...

Page 407: ...Mixer Mode Mixer Meas Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 7 3 2 Scalar Mixer Measurements on page 204 Two Stage Mixer Measurements on page 205 In the upper part the Define Mixer Meas dialog shows a diagram with the RF and LO signals the mixing product IF and the current frequency and power ranges for all sig nals The diagram is adjusted according to the 2nd Mixer selec...

Page 408: ...ency tab The Frequency tab controls the frequency of the RF and the LO signal s and the analyzer IF signal frequency The table in the Frequency tab contains the following columns Type specifies how the frequency for each signal is defined One of the mixer input and output signals is at the analyzer s channel base frequency Base Freq the signal is swept if a frequency sweep is active it is at fixed...

Page 409: ...nd LO 2 ports The Base Pwr setting overwrites the power settings in the STIMULUS softtool panels For power sweeps Base Pwr is the power sweep range For the other sweep types it is the fixed Power value The Fixed power settings also appear in the Port Configuration dialog The Start CW power for the IF port sets the IF source power for the reverse sweep This setting is only relevant if Load Match Co...

Page 410: ... the LO frequency is above the RF input frequency IF LO RF means that the LO signal is down converted lower sideband The analyzer automatically switches to IF RF LO if the RF input frequency is above the LO frequency IF LO RF means that the RF input signal is up converted To perform measurements at different mixer output frequencies e g to analyze the isolation for IF RF or higher order mixing pro...

Page 411: ...de SMARTerCal Start Cal Unit Offers similar functionality as the general SMARTerCal Wizard Cal Unit with the fol lowing differences Always all channels are calibrated The affected test ports are already preselected and labeled according to their role in the mixer measurement The adequate calibration type is already preselected A source flatness calibration can be automatically included as a the fi...

Page 412: ...397 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 If the R S ZNB ZNBT is used as LO and only a 2 port Cal Unit is available Multi ple Port Assignments are required 2 Perform a SMARTerCal Figure 5 29 System Error Correction Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 413: ...s of the RF and IF ports is calibrated while the LO ports are activa ted 5 5 6 5 SMARTerCal Manual Wizard for Mixer Mode Allows to perfom a variant of a manual SMARTerCal that is specially tailored to the Mixer Mode Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Mixer Mode SMARTerCal Start Manual Offers similar functionality as the general SMARTerCal Wizard Manual with the fol lowing differences Always all channel...

Page 414: ...calibration step Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 7 SMARTerCal on page 172 for background information The wizard proceeds as follows 1 Specify the remaining non fixed properties of the manual SMARTerCal required hardware ports connections etc 2 Perform a SMARTerCal Figure 5 32 System Error Correction Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 415: ...e flatness of the RF and IF ports is calibrated while the LO ports are activa ted 5 6 Trigger Softtool The Trigger softtool provides trigger and sweep control settings Access CHANNEL TRIGGER hardkey 5 6 1 Trigger Tab Selects the source of the trigger signal and provides additional trigger settings Trigger system of the analyzer The trigger system is used to synchronize the analyzer s actions with ...

Page 416: ...t delay use the FreeRun trigger type Background information Refer to Chapter 4 1 4 1 Partial Measurements and Driving Mode on page 79 Output trigger The R S ZNB ZNBT provides a configurable output trigger signal to synchronize exter nal devices with the measurement This signal is available at the rear panel connector EXT TRIG OUT Configuration of the output trigger signal is a remote control featu...

Page 417: ...nerated by the Manual Trigger button If Multiple Triggers is active the trigger sources for different triggered measure ment sequences the trigger slope and the trigger delay can be selected individu ally using the Trigger Manager Dialog Trigger Manager dialog In particular it is possible to use two different external trigger sources Remote command TRIGger Ch SEQuence SOURce Manual Trigger Generat...

Page 418: ...art of the measurement The Delay entered must be zero or positive so that the trigger event precedes the start of the measurement post trigger If Multiple Triggers is active the Delay can be selected individually using the Trigger Manager Dialog Remote command TRIGger Ch SEQuence HOLDoff Slope Level Specifies the External trigger mode in detail Rising Slope Falling Slope means that the rising or f...

Page 419: ...e rear panel External 1 and 2 means that the measurement sequence is initiated after the ana lyzer has received an event from both external trigger signals External 1 or 2 means that the measurement sequence is initiated after the ana lyzer has received an event from either external trigger 1 or external trigger 2 Manual means that the trigger event is generated manually by selecting the Man ual T...

Page 420: ... the calibrated reference plane and the DUT It also con tains advanced functions for deembedding embedding the DUT from into more general physical virtual matching networks placed between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT Access CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED hardkey Background information Refer to Chapter 4 6 Offset Parameters and Embedding on page 175 5 7 1 Offset Embed Dock Widget On activating ...

Page 421: ...5 7 1 2 Offset Panel Allows to activate or deactivate offset loss correction for selected physical ports and to set related parameters Access Overview Panel Offset Figure 5 37 Offset Embed dock widget Offset panel The Offset panel can also be activated by selecting the Offset Tab or One Way Loss Tab Refer to its description for background information additional parameters and remote commands Activ...

Page 422: ...he Single Ended Tab softtool tab Refer to its description for background information parameters and addi tional remote commands Active The checkbox in the Active column activates or deactivates the selected Single Ended de embedding Network i e adds or removes it to from the calculation flow without changing its parameters Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt ST...

Page 423: ...e Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET DEEMbedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding DELete CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET EMBedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DELete Move Up Move Down Allows to modif...

Page 424: ...ssary use the button on the right hand side to open the Balanced Ports Dialog and change the balanced port configuration This panel can also be activated by selecting the Balanced Tab Refer to its description for background information parameters and additional remote commands Active The checkboxes in the Active column activate or deactivate the configured de embeding for the related balanced port...

Page 425: ...t to from the calculation flow without changing its parameters Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding STATe CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding STATe 5 7 1 7 Impedance Renormalization Panel This panel provides an alternative access to the reference impedance settings see Reference Impedance Tab on page 443 Access Overview Panel Impedance Renor Active The Act...

Page 426: ...from the calculation flow without chang ing its parameters Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt STATe 5 7 2 Offset Tab Defines length offset parameters for each port Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate length loss compensation for selected ports see Chapter 5 7 1 2 Offset Panel on page 406 The marker function Zero Delay at Marker func...

Page 427: ...Se Ch CORRection commands identifies the physical port Delay Electrical Length Mech Length Defines the length offset at the selected port as a delay an electrical length or a mechanical length The three quantities are related by r mech r mech L Length Electrical c L Delay and overwrite each other See also Chapter 4 6 1 1 Definition of Offset Parameters on page 176 Note The entered parameters must ...

Page 428: ... command SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt DIELectric Adjust Time Gate Activates the operating mode where the time gate is moved in the opposite direction when the Delay setting or any other length offset parameter is changed The button is available if a time gate is active see Time Gate on page 499 In time domain a positive delay shifts the time gate to the left a negative delay shifts it to the r...

Page 429: ...s the entire sweep range If Delay is the selected trace format the entire trace is shifted in vertical direction and centered around zero In phase format the Auto Length corrected trace shows the deviation from linear phase If the measured quantity is a ratio or if it is derived from a ratio its receiving port is given as the index of the wave quantity in the numerator If the active trace shows an...

Page 430: ... Length and Loss vs Direct Compensation on page 180 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect FIXTure LMParameter STATe SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt DFComp STATe Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R S ZNB ZNBT performs the sweeps for a given termination type Open and or Short see Measurement Type on page 416 If unchecked it performs the sweeps for Open Short without interruption implicitly ...

Page 431: ... you through the previously configured fixture compensation measurements Figure 5 39 Measure Fixture dialog Auto Length and Loss To acquire the necessary data proceed as indicated in the information area With Prompt for Each Port disabled Take acquires data for all selected ports in one go Otherwise sweeps are taken port by port For Direct Compensation it is also possible to save the acquired data...

Page 432: ...Calculate the compensation data for different ports using mixed Open and Short standards Refer to the program example for SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure STARt SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure SAVE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure EXPort SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure IMPort 5 7 3 ...

Page 433: ... total loss is approximated by an expression of the following form DC ref DC ref Loss f f Loss f Loss f Loss This means that all three loss parameters enter into the calculation of the loss See also Chapter 4 6 1 2 Definition of Loss Parameters on page 176 Note The entered parameters define the loss for a signal traveling in one direction through the transmission line To account for the propagatio...

Page 434: ...llows to specify 2 port deembedding embedding networks for each physical port Such a network is either defined via its S parameters stored in a two port Touchstone file s2p or by selecting a predefined lumped element model and specifying the available parameters resistances conductances capacitances inductances Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate dembedding embedding for se...

Page 435: ...ning networks are defined by lumped elements Their parameters are displayed below the graphical list See Chapter 4 6 2 3 Circuit Models for 2 Port Networks on page 183 Tip Drag and drop the network symbols in horizontal or vertical direction to switch to the next symbol The lumped elements are numbered from top to bottom Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt STAT...

Page 436: ...rs e g S12 S21 when loading the file Note The loaded file is stored in the active recall set Recall sets contain the full de embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed EMBedding PhyPt 5 7 5 Port Sets Tab Selects transformation networks for deembedding embedding arbitrary port...

Page 437: ...ed either via lumped element models in combination with s2p Touchstone files or via a s4p Touchstone file see Chapter 4 6 2 5 Port Pair De Embedding on page 186 For m 3 4 there are no predefined lumped element models available the deembedding embedding network has to be defined via a s 2m p Touchstone file The symbol selects no network and disables de embedding for the selected port set The D1 and...

Page 438: ...ase the port number conventions of the loaded Touchstone file differ from network analyzer conventions see description of Logical Port it is possible to Switch Gates The analyzer will interchange the port numbers when loading the file Note The loaded file is stored in the active recall set Persisted recall sets contain the full de embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments...

Page 439: ...anced Ports configuration The transfor mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit the DUT ports are on the right side You can define independent transformation networks for all balanced ports Remote command The LogPt numeric suffix in the embedding deembedding commands identifies the logical port see e g CALCulate Ch TRANsform VN...

Page 440: ...h TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters G Cmp D1 D2 The D1 and D2 buttons are enabled ...

Page 441: ...nel on page 409 Background information Refer to Chapter 4 6 2 7 Ground Loop De Embedding on page 189 If the Fixture Simulator is disabled for the related channel see Fixture Simulator on page 346 this tab is inactive i e all controls except the Overview button are greyed out Overview See Overview on page 412 Type Switches between Deembedding and Embedding network definition Network The graphical l...

Page 442: ...cted This net work is defined by its S parameters stored in a one port Touchstone file s1p No additional parameters are required Note The loaded file is stored in the active recall set Persisted recall sets contain the full de embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop DEEMbedding MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop EMBedding Set ...

Page 443: ...can define independ ent embedding networks for all balanced ports Remote command The LogPt numeric suffix in the embedding deembedding commands identifies the logical port see e g CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt STATe Network The graphical list contains the available 2 port networks for Differential Match embed ding The symbol selects no network and disables different...

Page 444: ...uments Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters DATA 5 8 Stimulus Softtool The Stimulus softtool provides access to the stimulus parameters of the active chan nel If the active trace is represented in Time Domain it also allows to configure the observation interval Access STIMULUS START STOP CENTER SPAN hardkey While in Cartesian diagrams the x axis r...

Page 445: ... non segmented frequency sweeps For a Lin Freq sweep setting Start Frequency and Stop Frequency or Center Fre quency and Span Frequency are alternatives For a Log Freq only Start Frequency and Stop Frequency can be set Note For segmented frequency sweeps the start and stop frequencies and the num ber of sweep points are defined per segment See Chapter 5 3 2 2 Define Segments Dialog on page 248 Rem...

Page 446: ... power at the test ports for the sweep types Lin Freq Log Freq CW Mode and Time Also determines the default output power for Segmen ted sweeps where the output power can be set per segment The setting has no effect for Power sweeps where the source power is varied over a continuous range Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude CW Frequency Sets the fixed frequency for Power ...

Page 447: ...ected sweep type Figure 5 41 Stimulus Power softtool tab left R S ZNB ZNBT with 4 physical ports right R S ZNB ZNBT with 4 physical ports on the VNA and connected switch matrices Most of the Power settings are also available in the Stimulus tab Refer to the fol lowing sections Power on page 431 Start Power Stop Power on page 431 RF Off All Channels RF Off All Channels switches the internal power s...

Page 448: ...maximum attenuation to the closest step UP and DOWN increment decrement the attenuation in 10 dB steps Note Receiver Step Attenuators are not available for R S ZNB20 R S ZNB40 and R S ZNBT20 If the number of physical ports on the VNA and connected switch matrices is higher than 4 the Step Attenuators input fields in the Power softtool are replaced by a Step Attenuators button that opens the follow...

Page 449: ...he Cartesian diagram Time Center corresponds to the center of the Cartesian diagram i e Time Start Time Stop 2 Time Span corresponds to the diagram width i e Time Stop Time Start Time Start and Time Stop or Time Center and Time Span are alternative set tings Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STARt CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STOP CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME CENTer CALCulate Chn TRANsfo...

Page 450: ...iver For transmission measurements the distance is calculated as the propagation time times the velocity of light in the vacuum times the velocity factor of the receiving port Distance Time c0 Velocity Factor The velocity factor of the receiving port can be defined using CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED Offset see Permittivity Velocity Factor on page 413 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME XAXis 5 9 M...

Page 451: ...reverse direction Background information Refer to Chapter 4 3 1 S Parameters on page 110 5 9 1 1 Controls on the S Params Tab Some of the buttons on the S Params tab open dialogs S Param Wizard see Chapter 5 9 1 2 S Parameter Wizard on page 438 Balanced Ports see Chapter 5 9 1 3 Balanced Ports Dialog on page 440 If either Multiple DUTs are configured see Chapter 5 5 2 3 Define Parallel Measure men...

Page 452: ...Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure SENDed CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine SENDed S out in softkeys Selects one of the four elements of the standard 2 port S parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name S11 S12 S21 S22 Create new trace and select trace name and ...

Page 453: ...ne port impedances Assign reference impedances to all physical and balanced test ports selected in the previous step The reference impedances can be complex This step corre sponds to the Reference Impedance tab of the Balanced Ports dialog see Pre defined Config Tab on page 440 Tip The default reference impedance of the physical analyzer ports is Z0 50 Ω The default reference impedances for balanc...

Page 454: ...owers have been selected according to the following criteria The large measurement bandwidth Fast Sweep ensures that the noise of an S21 trace at minimum source power and 0 dB attenuation is smaller than 0 1 dB The default source power for a passive DUT ensures that the analyzer receiver is in its linear range no compression if a passive DUT with 0 dB attenuation is measured The default source pow...

Page 455: ...ts Measurements do not necessarily require all of the physical and logical ports of the network analyzer To save measurement time it is recommended to specify the ports that are not used in the current test setup as Unused ports Unused ports will not be considered for the calculation of mixed mode Z and Y parameters Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 3 5 Unbalance Bal...

Page 456: ...er of type of predefined configurations depends on the port number of the analyzer They comprise the fully single ended unbalanced case where the logical ports correspond to the physical ports and all balanced configurations where two adja cent physical ports are connected to a logical port In addition configurations with one or more unused ports are provided Remote command SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt S...

Page 457: ...xclude logical ports from the measurement select them and tap Unused To re assign a number to a logical port select it and enter a new Logical Port Number in the corresponding field To number the logical ports in line with the physical ports tap Identity 1 1 For balanced ports the lower of the two physical port numbers is selected To number the logical ports consecutively from top to bottom tap Al...

Page 458: ... n test ports supports a maximum of n 2 n even or n 1 2 n odd logical ports Furthermore provides functions for renumbering the logical ports To define a balanced port select two physical ports and tap Balanced To dissolve a balanced port select it and tap Single To exclude a physical port from the measurement select the port and tap Unused Remote command SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt...

Page 459: ...fferential and for common mode Balanced port Single ended port Differential mode Zref Z0d Common mode Zref Z0c DUT Single ended unbalanced port Zref default Zconnector 2 3 1 2 Physical Port no Logical Port no Analyzer 1 Balanced port Single Ended Mode Common Mode Differential Mode Defines arbitrary reference impedances Single Ended Mode is available for single ended logical ports only Common Mode ...

Page 460: ...connector type Remote command SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZDEFault STATe Renormalization according to Theory of Selects the waveguide circuit theory for renormalization The conversion formula of both theories differ only if the reference impedance of at least one test port has a non zero imaginary part Refer to Chapter 4 3 6 Reference Impedances on page 125 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform IMPedanc...

Page 461: ...meter S21 forward transmission coefficient b2 a2 Source Port 2 is the ratio of the wave quantities b2 and a2 measured at port 2 This ratio corresponds to the S parameter S22 output reflection coefficient b1 a2 Source Port 2 is the ratio of the wave quantities b1 and a2 and corresponds to the S parameter S12 reverse transmission coefficient The analyzer can also measure arbitrary ratios for other s...

Page 462: ...pull down list and the port number assignment right pull down list of the wave that forms the numerator of the ratio Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name B2 A1 Create new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name B2 A1 Denominator Selects the type left pull down list and the port number assignment right pull down list of the...

Page 463: ...te new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name Ratio the parameter name Ratio can also contain the source port Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the displayed measurement points from the raw data For details refer to Chapter 4 3 4 3 Detector Settings on page 119 Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name R...

Page 464: ... wave received at test port 1 In a standard S parameter measurement this is the reflected wave at port 1 of the DUT forward measure ment b2 Source Port 1 is the wave received at test port 2 In a standard S parameter measurement this wave is transmitted at port 2 of the DUT forward measure ment a2 Source Port 2 is the wave transmitted at test port 2 In a standard S parameter measurement this wave i...

Page 465: ...Access TRACE MEAS Wave More Wave Quantities Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 3 4 1 Wave Quantities on page 118 Chapter 4 3 4 2 Ratios on page 118 The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana lyzer The a waves are the outgoing transmitted waves at the analyzer s test ports The b waves are the incoming measured waves The source p...

Page 466: ...rectivity of the internal test set s directional element Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name A1 Create new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name A1 the parameter name Ratio can also contain the source port Show as Selects the physical unit of the displayed trace It is possible to display the measured Voltage V or conver...

Page 467: ...ly configured on the Intermod tab of the Channel Config softtool see Chapter 5 5 4 Intermod Tab on page 377 Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 7 3 3 Intermodulation Measurements on page 207 Intermodulation Quantities on page 211 The labels for the intermodulation quantities in the trace list are identical to the param eters used for remote control see CALCulate Ch PAR...

Page 468: ...ichever is larger The Major IM3 Product reveals the worst case performance of the DUT Major IP3 at DUT Out is the third order major intercept point at the output of the DUT This quantity corresponds to the fictitious DUT output level Lower Tone at DUT Out measured at the lower tone frequency where the major third order inter modulation suppression the ratio of the Major IM3 Product at DUT Out to t...

Page 469: ...lation products are measured at frequencies above the upper tone Lower The Lower intermodulation products are measured at frequencies below the lower tone Remote command Assign a measurement result to an existing trace CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Create new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Relative If Relative is selected the intermodulation p...

Page 470: ...w trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Side Defines the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones Major Denotes the lower or upper intercept point whichever is smaller The Major intercept point reveals the worst case performance of the DUT Upper The Upper intercept point are measured at frequencies above the upper tone Low...

Page 471: ... impedances are calcula ted from the measured S parameters Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 3 2 Impedance Parameters on page 113 Chapter 4 3 2 1 Converted Impedances on page 114 Z S out in selector Selects a converted impedance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace For an n port vector network analyzer the pull down list provides the full set of n2 i...

Page 472: ...ansfer impedances respectively Use the Smith chart to obtain an alternative graphical representation of the converted impedances in a reflection measurement Tip Use the Y Z Params tab to measure Z parameters including the transfer param eters Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name Z S11 Z S12 Z S21 Z S22 Create new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate C...

Page 473: ...rse transmission and reflec tion measurements Y11 is the input admittance at port 1 of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at port 2 with the reference impedance Z0 matched circuit admittance measured in a forward reflection measurement Y22 is the input admittance at port 2 of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at port 1 with the reference impedance Z0 matched circuit admittance measured in a reverse ref...

Page 474: ...3 2 Impedance Parameters on page 113 Chapter 4 3 3 Admittance Parameters on page 116 Chapter 4 3 2 2 Z Parameters on page 115 Chapter 4 3 3 2 Y Parameters on page 117 Y Z Parameter Selects an Y parameter or Z parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace For an n port vector network analyzer the pull down list provides the full set of n2 Y and Z parameters Y and Z parameters are expressed ...

Page 475: ...e Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Create new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Z11 Z12 Z21 Z22 Selects one of the 2 port Chapter 4 3 2 2 Z Parameters on page 115 as a measured quantity for the active trace The Z parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports I 0 The four 2 port Z parameters can be interpreted as foll...

Page 476: ...the Opens a dialog of the same name that allows you to measure the differential mode imbalance of a DUT with balanced input and output ports connected to a balanced test port and two single ended test ports Imbalance CMRR Selects an imbalance or CMRR parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace These parameters are expressed as Imb out in or CMRR out in where out and in denote the logical...

Page 477: ...e and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name IMB21 IMB12 CMRR21 CMRR12 Balanced Ports Opens a dialog to define a balanced port configuration See Chapter 5 9 1 3 Balanced Ports Dialog on page 440 5 9 8 2 Imbalance Differential Dialog Allows to measure the differential mode imbalance of a DUT with balanced input and output ports connected to a balanced ...

Page 478: ... output the single ended logical ports j and k as the input and calculates the imbalance parameter Imbi jk Sac Sad Sbc Sbd Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name IMB i j k IMB j k i Create new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name IMB i j k IMB j k i 5 9 9 Stability Tab Selects one of the three two port stability factors K...

Page 479: ...e Trace_Name KFAC21 MUF121 MUF221 Create new trace and select trace name and measurement parameter CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name KFAC21 MUF121 MUF221 μ1 21 μ2 21 K 21 Selects one of the standard 2 port stability factors as a measured quantity for the active trace The buttons are available if none of the logical ports 1 and 2 is defined as a balanced port Remote command CALCulate Ch PAR...

Page 480: ...abel below displays the type and serial number of the selected power meter Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure TraceName PmtrD1 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine TraceName PmtrD1 Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the power meter which must be disconnec ted from the RF power see Zeroing on page 223 A message indicates that zeroing is finished Remote command SYSTem COMMuni...

Page 481: ...at WQUType 5 9 11 DC Tab Selects the ranges for the DC voltages fed to the DC INPUT 1 4 connectors at the rear panel as measured quantities and opens the PAE measurement dialog The DC input connectors are available as option R S ZNB ZNBT B81 see Chapter 4 7 17 DC Inputs on page 219 5 9 11 1 Controls on the DC Tab The PAE button opens the Power Added Efficiency dialog DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 Source Por...

Page 482: ...e ranges should be adjusted to the measured signals To protect the instrument all ranges are pre set to 20 V the widest range If the actual voltage of the input signal exceeds the selected range the measurement is incorrect and a DC overload message is displayed Remote command SENSe Ch DC DCInp RANGe 5 9 11 2 Power Added Efficiency PAE Dialog The Power Added Efficiency PAE dialog configures the me...

Page 483: ...surements For an overview see Table 4 24 Note The measurement types for Constant Voltage Source and Voltage and Cur rent require an additional non zero known precision resistor R Remote command SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Formula Shows the formula for the calculation of the DC supply power PDC depending on the selected measurement type The parameters R U0 and or I0 must be entered in accordance with the pro...

Page 484: ...ormats is available for markers To convert any point on a trace create a marker and select the appropriate marker format see Marker Format on page 535 Marker and trace formats can be applied independently Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 2 3 Trace Formats on page 102 Chapter 4 2 3 3 Measured Quantities and Trace Formats on page 109 dB Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram...

Page 485: ... alternative formats The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale It is possible to view the real and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase Both the magnitude and phase are dis played in the polar diagram As an alternative to direct phase measurements the ana lyzer provides the derivative of the phase response for a frequency swee...

Page 486: ...rties The SWR or Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR is a measure of the power reflected at the input of the DUT It is calculated from the magnitude of the reflection coefficients Sii where i denotes the port number of the DUT according to 1 1 ii ii S S SWR The superposition of the incident and the reflected wave on the transmission line con necting the analyzer and the DUT causes an interference pat...

Page 487: ... axis also scaled linearly Application Real measurement data i e the Stability Factors and the DC voltages are always displayed in a Lin Mag diagram Tip alternative formats The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a logarithmic scale It is possible to view the real and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase Remote command CALCulate Chn FORMat MLINear Inv Smith Selects...

Page 488: ...cale Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram Remote command CALCulate Chn FORMat IMAGinary Delay Calculates the group delay from the measured quantity primarily from a transmis sion S parameter and displays it in a Cartesian diagram Properties The group delay τg represents the propagation time of wave through a device τg is a real quantity and is calculated as the nega...

Page 489: ...sweep point no m is calculated as follows If n is even n 2k then Δf m f m k f m k and ΔΦ m ΔΦ m k ΔΦ m k If n is odd n 2k 1 then Δf m f m k f m k 1 and ΔΦ m ΔΦ m k ΔΦ m k 1 The calculated phase difference and thus the group delay is always assigned to the frequency point no m For linear sweeps and odd numbers of aperture steps the cen ter of the aperture range is f m k f m k 1 2 f m 1 2 i e half a...

Page 490: ... deviations from linear phase which are narrower in fre quency than the aperture tend to be smeared over and cannot be measured Remote command CALCulate Chn GDAPerture SCOunt Default Marker Frmt Defines the default marker format of the active trace Default means formatted according to the selected trace format New markers will be formatted with the trace s Default Marker Frmt existing markers will...

Page 491: ... activated automatically when a display format diagram type is selected Scale settings that are not compatible with the current display format are unavailable grayed Relations between the scaling parameters The scaling parameters Scale Div Ref Value Ref Pos Max and Min are cou pled together in the following manner Max Min Scale Div Number of graticule divisions Max Ref Value when Ref Value is 10 M...

Page 492: ...on page 550 Scale Div Sets the value of the vertical diagram divisions in Cartesian diagrams Scale Div corresponds to the increment between two consecutive grid lines The unit depends on the display format dB for display format dB Mag degrees for Phase and Unwr Phase ns for Delay U units for all other dimensionless formats Scale Div is not available for circular diagrams Polar Smith Inv Smith Remo...

Page 493: ...r with the Ref Pos Ref Pos is not available grayed for polar diagrams Polar Smith Inv Smith Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe RPOSition Max Min Define the upper and lower edge of a Cartesian diagram Max and Min are not available grayed for polar diagrams Polar Smith Inv Smith Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe TOP DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe BOTTom...

Page 494: ...ovides the graphical and numerical zoom functions A zoom magnifies a rectangular portion of a diagram zoom window to fill the entire diagram area Zoom Select or the zoom area Overview Select Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical numerical zooming Refer to the following sections Chapter 3 3 6 Scaling Diagrams on page 60 Chapter 5 11 1 Scale Values Tab on page 475 Chapt...

Page 495: ...mmand DISPlay WINDow Wnd OVERview STATe Max Min Start Stop Defines the coordinates of the zoom window for the active diagram Max and Min define the response axis range Start and Stop define the stimulus axis range The input fields are enabled if Zoom Select or Overview Select is selected they are upda ted after a graphical zoom Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM BOTTom DISPlay WIND...

Page 496: ... line in a diagram to achieve this This function is disabled if only one trace is defined Add Trace Creates a new trace in the active Diagram Channel and makes it the Active Trace The new trace is created with the settings of the former active trace but displayed in another color The former and the new active trace overlay each other but can be easily separated e g by changing the reference positi...

Page 497: ... Dialog on page 483 Use the undo function to restore a trace that was unintentionally deleted Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALL Diagram Channel Displays the active diagram and channel i e the diagram and channel of the Active Trace Allows you to move the active trace to another diagram or channel Show Trace Name Hide All ...

Page 498: ...allows you to select the S Parameter for the new trace left softkeys up to 9 logical ports right numeric input 10 or more logical ports 5 12 1 3 Trace Manager Dialog The Trace Manager dialog performs operations on traces Access TRACE TRACE CONFIG Traces Trace Manager All existing traces of the current recall set are listed in a table with several editable white or non editable gray columns Table A...

Page 499: ...yntax of trace names The first character of a trace name can be either one of the upper case letters A to Z one of the lower case letters a to z an underscore _ or a square bracket or For all other characters of a trace name the numbers 0 to 9 can be used in addi tion Note The analyzer does not accept illegal or ambiguous trace names If an illegal or ambiguous name is specified the entry is denied...

Page 500: ...cales Decouple All Scales Couple All Scales couples the scale settings of all traces to the scale settings of the active trace The scale settings of the other traces are lost Decouple All Scales applies independent scale settings to all traces If trace A is coupled to trace B then B s scale settings are copied to A Remote command n a 5 12 2 Mem Math Tab Stores traces to the memory and performs mat...

Page 501: ... data trace e g the Stimulus range also affect the display of the memory traces If the sweep type of a data trace is changed so that the stimulus types of the data traces and the memory traces become incompatible all coupled memory traces are removed from the diagram area and deleted Active Trace vs Active Data Trace In the context of memory traces we distinguish between the active trace and the a...

Page 502: ...operations Active Trace Math functions A shift of the data trace see Shift Trace on page 507 Data to Destination stores the raw trace without the trace functions Data Func to Destination stores the trace after it has been transformed using the trace functions For the relation between a data trace and its associated memory traces see Coupling of data and memory traces on page 485 Remote command CAL...

Page 503: ...ided by subtracted from the corresponding measure ment point of the memory trace If the memory trace represents the result of a previous sweep with unchanged settings the divided subtracted curve is typically centered around 1 0 dB 0 it shows the variation of the results in subsequent sweeps The result of the division is a mathematical trace and replaces the active data trace in the diagram area T...

Page 504: ...oint no i of the mathematical trace is calculated from a set of constant values c1 cn plus the trace points Trc1i Trcmi of all traces 1 to m in the mathematical relation Mathi Fct c1 cn Trc1i Trcmi i 1 no of points Different traces can be used in the same mathematical relation provided that they con tain the same number of points The analyzer places no further restriction on the com patibility of ...

Page 505: ...ied by their trace names Data denotes the active data trace Mem is the memory trace associated with the active data trace or the first created one if several memory traces are associated with the active data trace StimVal is the array of stimulus values see footnote for Table 5 4 The trace operands denote unmodified data and memory traces Trace math and other trace functions Smoothing Hold Shift T...

Page 506: ...applied Otherwise no conversion is per formed and dB Mag results are referenced to 1 μV If Result is Wave Quantity is disabled the analyzer assumes that the result of the mathematical expression is dimensionless Examples for dimensionless expres sions are all terms proportional to ratios of wave quantities e g Data Mem2 Trc1 The selected trace format is applied without previous conversion Result i...

Page 507: ...ecalls saves a mathematical expression from to a trace math string file Trace math string files are ASCII files with the default extension mth and contain the math ematical expression as it is written in the User Def Math dialog It is possible to change or create math string files using a text editor Remote command CALCulate Chn MATH WUNit STATe 5 12 3 All Mem All Data Tab Performs actions on all ...

Page 508: ...mory traces the current trace data are cop ied to the first associated memory trace overwriting existing data For data traces without associated memory trace the current trace data are copied to a new mem ory trace associated to this data trace New For each data trace the current trace data are copied to a new memory trace associated to this data trace New memory traces are named Mem n Data_Trace ...

Page 509: ...elects the time domain representation for the active diagram area The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active see Lin Freq on page 243 The ana lyzer automatically quits time domain representation as soon as a different sweep type is selected The time domain results are obtained by transforming the measured frequency sweep data into the time domain using an appropriate mathematical...

Page 510: ...ee Chapter 5 12 4 2 Low Pass Settings Dialog on page 496 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STIMulus Impulse Response Selects a window type which the R S ZNB ZNBT uses to filter the trace in the fre quency domain The drop down list shows the impulse response of a constant trace over a finite sweep range i e a rectangular function that was filtered using t...

Page 511: ...al resolution enhancement factor depends on the properties of the DUT In dis tance to fault measurements on cables factors between 3 and 5 turned out to be a good choice Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME RESolution EFACtor 5 12 4 2 Low Pass Settings Dialog The Low Pass Settings dialog defines the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms Access TRACE TRACE CONFIG Time Domain Low ...

Page 512: ...ional sweep points introduced The three grids can be calculated repeatedly in any order the analyzer always starts from the original set of sweep points For more information refer to Chapter 4 7 2 4 Harmonic Grid on page 195 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs Automatic Harmonic Grid If enabled default the frequency grid is automatically kept harmonic Remote command SENSe Ch HARMonic...

Page 513: ...olation is repeated after each sweep Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam CONTinuous CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam EXTRapolate CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPFRequency 5 12 5 Time Gate Tab Defines and activates a gate in the time domain An active time gate acts on the trace in time domain as well as in frequency domain...

Page 514: ...he unambiguous range which is given by Δt 1 Δf where Δf is the Freq Step Size Simply reduce the time span until the warn ing disappears Remote command CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME CENTer CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SPAN CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME STARt CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME STOP Show Range Lines Displays or hides two red lines indicating the start and stop of the time gate in a t...

Page 515: ...e two red vertical lines represent the Start and Stop values defining the size of the time gate See also Chapter 4 7 2 5 Time Gates on page 197 Remote command CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SHAPe CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME WINDow Side Lobe Level Defines the side lobe suppression for an Arbitrary Gate Shape Dolph Chebychev gate The entered value is the ratio of the power of the central lobe to ...

Page 516: ...ected evalu ation range Eval Range Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values xi and n cor responding response values yi measurement points The statistical values are obtained as follows Min and Max are the largest and the smallest of all response values yi Pk Pk is the peak to peak value and is equal to the difference Max Min Mean is the arithmetic mean value of all...

Page 517: ...aces Smith Polar are calculated ZVAB the results are based on unformatted wave quantities voltages R jX the results are based on the impedance values R and X G jB the results are based on the admittance values G and B In the two latter cases the RMS value is not displayed Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics FORMat Phase El Length Displays or hides the phase delay Phs Dly and the electrical len...

Page 518: ...r calculates for the selected evalua tion range Eval Range Suppose that A and B denote the trace points at the beginning and at the end of the evaluation range respectively Gain is the larger of the two stimulus values of points A and B Slope is the difference of the stimulus values of point B minus point A Flatness is a measure of the deviation of the trace in the evaluation range from linearity ...

Page 519: ...uation The example above is based on an attenuation of 20 8 dB hence Cmp Out 24 9 dB 20 8 dB 45 7 dBm The info field shows invalid results if the wrong sweep type or trace format is selected or if the trace contains no x dB compression points in the selected evaluation range Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP STATe CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RESult CALCulate Chn STATis...

Page 520: ...Start xi Stop The evaluation ranges are defined similar to the marker search ranges For more infor mation see Chapter 5 14 4 Search Range Dialog on page 539 Note A restricted evaluation range is indicated in the Trace Statistics info field Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER STARt CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER STOP Range Limit Lines On Di...

Page 521: ...ernative method of compensating for random effects on the trace by averaging consecutive traces Compared to smoothing the sweep average requires a longer measurement time but does not have the drawback of aver aging out quick variations of the measured values See Chapter 5 2 3 Average Tab on page 238 Remote command CALCulate Chn SMOothing STATe Aperture Defines how many measurement points are aver...

Page 522: ... restarted any time using Restart It is also restarted auto matically when the channel or trace settings are changed so that the previous mea surement results are no longer compatible Note A memory trace is unformatted by definition Therefore a to memory operation on a Hold trace actually stores the last measured trace data instead of the current Max Hold or Min Hold values Remote command CALCulat...

Page 523: ...s a real trace in vertical direction leaving the imaginary part unchanged The Imag inary value added constant shifts an imaginary trace in vertical direc tion leaving the real part unchanged Tip Shifting the trace by means of constant values is a simple case of trace mathe matics Use the User Def Math dialog to define more complicated mathematical oper ations see Chapter 5 12 2 2 User Def Math Dia...

Page 524: ...y trace which is coupled to the active data trace Access TRACE TRACE CONFIG Trace Data Import Background information Refer to Chapter 4 4 2 Trace Files on page 134 On loading data from a trace file with several traces the analyzer displays a dialog to select one or more of the traces stored in the file see Chapter 5 12 8 3 Select Parameter Dialog on page 513 E g for an s2p Touchstone file the box ...

Page 525: ...reviously no memory trace assigned to this data trace Remote command MMEMory LOAD TRACe 5 12 8 2 Export Data File Type Dialog The Export Data File Type dialog stores data or memory traces to a trace file Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format Access TRACE TRACE CONFIG Trace Data Export snp Files TRACE TRACE CONFIG Trace Data Export Data export can serve many purposes e g To proces...

Page 526: ...CII csv or Mat lab dat file For Touchstone file export it is possible to export the traces in the active channel or in all channels See also Conditions for Touchstone file export on page 136 Output Format Selects the format of the exported raw complex measurement values The exported values can be represented by the real and imaginary parts the linear magnitude and phase or dB magnitude and phase s...

Page 527: ... trace formats involving Cartesian diagrams dB Mag Real Imag the stimu lus value and a single real response value is exported For circular diagrams both the real and imaginary part of the response value is exported The trace values are the fully processed values as they appear in the diagram area They correspond to the results in the marker info field All possible stages of the trace data flow e g...

Page 528: ...g trace data import selects deselects all traces contained in the opened trace file Auto Distribute Available for trace data import only If checked a selected trace Sij is imported as a memory trace for all data traces in the current recall set that are measuring Sij Remote command MMEMory LOAD TRACe AUTO 5 12 8 4 Select Ports Dialog The Select Ports dialog defines the port assignment for the crea...

Page 529: ... Remote command MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs Assign Selects the port number assignment in the created s n p file By default analyzer and s n p port numbers are identical You can interchange the port assignment in order to change the order of the S parameters in the created Touchstone file Each of the analyzer port numbers must be assigned to one s n p port number Active Channel All Channels Selects d...

Page 530: ...imits visualizes them in the diagrams and activates deactivates the limit check Limit lines are available for all cartesian diagram types dB Mag limits can also be checked in complex diagrams Smith Polar Background information Refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Limit Check on page 129 5 13 1 1 Controls on the Limit Test Tab The Define Limit Line button opens the Define Limit Lines dialog see Chap ter 5 13 1 2...

Page 531: ...it DISPlay STATe Limit Check Switches the limit check of the active trace on or off When the limit check is switched on a movable PASS or FAIL message is dis played in the diagram If the limit check fails at a measurement point the point is marked with a colored square The Limit Fail Trace color is defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog Display Display Config Define User Color An acoustic ...

Page 532: ...te Chn LIMit STATe CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer STATe CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer STATe CALCulate Chn LIMit FAIL CALCulate LIMit FAIL ALL CALCulate Chn LIMit STATe AREA Limit Fail Beep Activates or deactivates the fail beep The fail beep is a low tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit No fail beep can be gen erated if the limit check is switched off Remo...

Page 533: ... switched on Monitoring several traces If a channel contains several traces is possible to assign them one after another to each pass fail signal The procedure divides the traces of the channel into four groups that are either assigned to signal 1 to signal 2 to both signals or to none of them If several traces with independent limit check are assigned to a pass fail signal then the TTL signal is ...

Page 534: ... connect ing two points Access TRACE LINES Limit Test Define Limit Line Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to efficiently create and handle limit lines To define limit lines with only a few segments use Add Segment and edit each segment in the segment table individually Select a data or memory trace as a limit line Import Trace or import a trace stored in ...

Page 535: ...n LIMit SEGMent Seg AMPLitude STARt CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg AMPLitude STOP CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DATA CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol SHIFt CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer DATA CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer SHIFt CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer DATA CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer FEED Add Insert Delete Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the lis...

Page 536: ... Lines on page 133 Remote command MMEMory LOAD LIMit MMEMory STORe LIMit Get Trace Import File Get Trace opens a dialog to load a limit line from a data or memory trace in the active recall set The active trace must be cartesian and the Format of the imported trace must be the same as the Format of the active trace Import File opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file see Chap ter 5 12...

Page 537: ... imported segments belong to the Upper or Lower limit line A third option is to import the segments but disable the limit check Off Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer FEED CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer FEED 5 13 2 Ripple Test Tab Defines ripple limits for the measurement results visualizes them in the diagrams and activates deactivates the ripple limit check A ripple test is a special type of li...

Page 538: ... limit line and limit check are independent of each other Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check Remote command CALCulate Chn RIPPle DISPlay STATe Ripple Check Switches the ripple limit check of the active trace on or off When the limit check is switched on a movable info field shows the pass fail informa tion and the measured ripple in each ripple limit range If the ripple limi...

Page 539: ...l beep The fail beep is a low tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded ripple limit No fail beep can be generated if the ripple limit check is switched off Remote command CALCulate Chn RIPPle SOUNd STATe Show Results All Traces Shows or hides the info fields for all traces in the active recall set for which a limit check is enabled irrespective of the activ...

Page 540: ... Save Ripple Test Recall Ripple Test Background information Refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Limit Check on page 129 The Define Ripple Test dialog contains a table to edit the individual ranges of the rip ple check ranges The buttons below the table extend shorten or reorder the range list and save recall ripple test data Range List Defines the individual ripple limit ranges The table contains an automatica...

Page 541: ...range before the active range marked by a blue background in the first column of the range list The new range extends from the Stop Stimulus value of the range before the active range to the Start Stimulus value of the active range Its ripple limit is estimated according to the measured ripple of the trace in the created range The range numbers in the list are adapted If no range is active Insert ...

Page 542: ... active diagram is a circular diagram Background information Refer to Chapter 4 4 1 3 Circle Limits on page 132 Show Limit Circle Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a polar diagram area The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog see Chap ter 5 17 3 2 Define User Color Scheme Dialog on page 569 You can choose between various options Assig...

Page 543: ...ep and a TTL signal indicating pass or fail can be generated in addition The appearance of the limit fail symbols is defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog see Chapter 5 17 3 2 Define User Color Scheme Dialog on page 569 You can choose between various options Change the trace color between failed measurement points Show or hide the colored squares Note Limit check and display of the limit ...

Page 544: ...ate Chn LIMit CIRCle CLEar Draw Circle Activates touchscreen or mouse operation tap the diagram at one border of the limit circle and draw the circle to the required size and position Remote command n a Radius Center X Center Y Defines the limit circle by its radius and its center on the X axis and Y axis Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DATA Global Check See Global Check on page 517 TTL ...

Page 545: ...te command CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DISPlay STATe Limit to Circle On Off If enabled only trace points within the configured Display Circle are shown whenever the related trace is displayed in complex format At the same time the active limit tests line circle are restricted to the configured Display Circle left FAIL Circle Test enabled but not limited to Display Circle right PASS Circle Test ena...

Page 546: ...order to retrieve the response values It also shows which parts of a trace are above or below a definite response value The controls on this tab are active only if the active trace is currently displayed in carte sian format Show Horiz Line Displays or hides the horizontal line Remote command CALCulate Chn DLINe STATe Response Value Defines shows the response value of the horizontal line Tip Use t...

Page 547: ...r properties Markers are available for all trace for mats A first marker labeled M1 is automatically created when the MARKER hardkey is pressed The Mkr 1 Mkr 10 and Ref Mkr softkeys enable the corresponding markers Related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 2 1 3 Markers on page 91 Chapter 3 3 4 Handling Diagrams Traces and Markers on page 53 Mkr i Stimulus Ref Mkr Stimulus Allo...

Page 548: ... definitely lost when the associ ated trace is deleted Tip To disable a single marker drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the Delete icon Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk AOFF Delta Mode Enables disables the Delta Mode for the active marker At the same enables the Ref Mkr This function is inactive if the reference marker is the active marker Remote c...

Page 549: ...ote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence STATe CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence Y Coupled Markers Couples the markers of all traces in the active recall set to the markers of the active trace While marker coupling is active the active trace markers assume the role of master markers the other markers behave as slave markers following any change of position of the master marker Coupled markers...

Page 550: ...to Default i e formatted according to the selected trace format For background information on marker formats see Marker Format on page 93 In Arbitrary Marker Mode if the transformation between trace format and marker for mat requires a concrete stimulus value some result values in the marker info field may be unavailable Those values are displayed as a sequence of dashes Remote command CALCulate C...

Page 551: ...ulus the marker can be moved horizontally This adjusts the markers s stimulus value but it s response value remains fixed Arbitrary freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value Tracking is disabled The marker stores the stimulus value and in addition its X and Y coordinates in the current Marker Format The marker can be moved freely inside the diagram di...

Page 552: ...al markers M1 M2 M3 assigned the memory trace has no markers Remote command MMEMory STORe MARKer Decimal Places Opens the User Interface tab of the System Config dialog which allows to define the maximum number of decimal digits for different units See User Interface tab on page 607 5 14 3 Marker Search Tab These Marker Search functions moves the active marker to a local maximum or minimum of the ...

Page 553: ...rch Max and the Peak Type for the peak search functions Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute MINimum MAXimum CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult Center Marker See Center Marker Start Marker Stop Marker Span Marker on page 549 Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum in the search range depending on the selected Peak Type Remote command CALCulate ...

Page 554: ...min peak or target searches or select Sweep Tracking to track the position of the sweep cursor Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute Tracking Enables disables tracking of the active marker for Marker Search and Target Search modes which causes the marker to be updated after each sweep Tracking for bandfilter search can be activated separately see Tracking on page 548 Among the Ma...

Page 555: ...lects the Search Range to be assigned to the selected marker Full Span means that the Search Range is equal to the sweep range Besides it is possible to store up to 10 customized search ranges The Search Range s are bordered by the Start and Stop values Start must be smaller than Stop otherwise the second value is automatically adjusted Search Range properties The ten Search Range s are valid for ...

Page 556: ...Ction DOMain USER STARt CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER STOP Range Limit Lines On Displays or hides the range limit lines in the diagram area Range limit lines are two vertical lines at the Start and Stop values of the active search range Range 1 to Range 10 Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER SHOW 5 14 5 Multiple Peak Tab Multiple peak search allows to find mu...

Page 557: ...llows you to set the domain for the multiple peak search A modified domain will take effect the next time Max Min Search Mode is used Tracking Enables or disables tracking for multiple peak search If enabled a new multiple peak search is performed for each sweep creating deleting markers as needed Define an Eval Range to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power inter val Remote comma...

Page 558: ...r particular phase values in Smith charts Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk TARGet Target Format Selects the format in which the Target Value shall be specified The selected target format applies to the current marker only each marker may have a different target format The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z x jy is converted Target Format Description Formula Lin Mag...

Page 559: ...value of the search range and the active marker position If the target value occurs at several stimulus values the marker is placed to the search result with the largest stimulus value i e the one which is closest to the active marker position The other measurement points with the same target value can be located using Search Left repeatedly If the target is not found e g because the active trace ...

Page 560: ... search can be used for a broad range of measured quantities see Chap ter 5 9 Meas Softtool on page 435 To obtain real filter parameters the trace format must be dB Mag the measured quantity must be a transmission S parameter and a frequency sweep must be performed However for other formats measured quantities or sweep types the Bandfilter functions may still be useful to analyze general trace pro...

Page 561: ...cated bandpass region is the tallest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion as specified by the Bandwidth parameter If Bandpass Ref to Max is selected the analyzer uses or creates the four markers M1 to M4 to locate the bandpass region M1 indicates the maximum of the peak Max M2 indicates the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum minus the band...

Page 562: ...fo field Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPRMarker CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute BFILter Bandstop Ref to Max Activates the search for a bandstop region on the active trace and activates bandfilter Tracking A bandstop region is the lowest peak local minimum in the search range provided that its level is at least Bandwidth below the maximum passband value If Ba...

Page 563: ...he lower and upper band edges is calculated as the response value at the active marker position plus minus x where x is equal to the Bandwidth value To be valid the peak must be above below the response value for the band edges Bandpass Bandstop Absolute Level The bandpass bandstop is the tallest lowest peak in the search range To be valid the peak must be above below x where x is numerically equa...

Page 564: ... equal to the stimulus value of the active marker leaving the end stop value unchanged The active marker appears at the left edge of the diagram Stop Marker sets the end stop of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker leaving the beginning start unchanged The active marker appears at the right edge of the diagram Span Marker is only available if the active marker is in Del...

Page 565: ...plied to a trace which is displayed in group delay format The trace is shifted in vertical direction so that the delay at the marker position vanishes The delay represents the propagation time of the wave across the DUT so this opera tion corresponds to a electrical length compensation i e to a shift of the reference plane by adding to or subtracting from the test port a simulated lossless transmi...

Page 566: ... File softtool allows to work with recall sets and trace data Access SYSTEM FILE hardkey 5 15 1 Recall Sets Tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system channel trace and display settings It can be stored to a VNA recall set file znx File Softtool ...

Page 567: ...of the VNA is too high new setups can only be created via New or Open Recall if the existing ones are closed This is indicated by the following dialog Run the Windows Task Manager to check the current memory consumption of the Vna exe process and use the Save action to save unpersisted changes New Creates a new recall set The default names for recall sets are Set1 Set2 Recall sets are accessible v...

Page 568: ... page 634 and to physically remove the switch matrix from the RF paths If the recall set to be loaded contains a switch matrix configuration and no differences to the current switch matrix configuration are detected the recall set is loaded without further enquiry Otherwise you are asked whether or not you want to adapt the configu ration Select Cancel to abort the recall process or OK to open the...

Page 569: ...h Matrix Configuration dialog guides you through this process In the dialog proceed as follows 1 Reassign Matrices For each Matrix in Recall Set select a switch matrix of the same driver type as Assigned Matrix If no switch matrix of the same type exists tap Switch Matrix to open the External Matrices Dialog that allows you to register configure additional switch matrices 2 Restore RF connections ...

Page 570: ... Chapter 4 7 20 External Switch Matrices on page 226 View Matrix RF Connections This dialog presents the RF connections of a selected switch matrix as specified in the recall set you are about to load It is a read only version of the Switch Matrix RF Connections Dialog you can subse quently use to modify the actual configuration 5 15 2 Favorites Tab The Favorites tab allows to manage a list of fav...

Page 571: ...are no more spare positions new favorites can only be added after existing ones were removed Add Active Recall Set Adds the active recall set to the list of favorites This button is only active if the current setup was loaded from or saved to a recall set Import Opens a file browser that allows you to add an arbitrary recall set to the favorites list Remote command MMEMory FAVorite FavId Favorites...

Page 572: ...opened trace replaces the active trace Exit Persists the current state of all loaded recall sets and ends the analyzer session These states are automatically recalled when the analyzer application is re started Tip This button is equivalent to the Windows Close window command and to the close icon in the title bar of the main firmware application window 5 16 Print Softtool The Print softtool consi...

Page 573: ...ter and page settings before start ing to print see Chapter 5 16 2 Printer Setup Dialog on page 558 To File The Save Image dialog selects a file and file format to store the current diagrams See also Save Dialog on page 101 Remote command HCOPy DESTination To Clipboard Copies the current diagram to the clipboard from where you can paste it into another application 5 16 2 Printer Setup Dialog The P...

Page 574: ... following options are offered No Diagram at all Active Diagram only All diagrams on one page All diagrams on their own page and Hard copy of the diagram The latter is the new print option which preserves colors and layout If selected in the Print other information group the content of the Info Table see Info Table Show Position on page 569 and or Setup Info see Setup Tab on page 613 is printed on...

Page 575: ...g Dialog to restore default settings 5 17 Display Softtool The Display softtool provides all display settings and the functions for activating modifying and arranging different diagrams Access SYSTEM DISPLAY hardkey Related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 1 3 Traces Channels and Diagrams on page 76 Chapter 4 2 1 Display Elements of a Diagram on page 87 Chapter 3 3 4 Handling ...

Page 576: ... At the same time the active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram Trc3 in the figure below The analyzer provides several tools for activating diagrams tap on a point in the diagram to activate the diagram including the last active trace in the diagram tap on a trace list to activate the trace including the corresponding diagram Some of the functions of the Traces Tab...

Page 577: ...SYSTEM UNDO Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe OFF Maximize toggle The toggle buttons in the Maximize section either maximize the active diagram right button or restore the previous diagram arrangement left button For other split types use the functions on the Split Tab Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd MAXimize Title Defines a title for the Active Diagram The visibility of the title area can...

Page 578: ...d complex diagrams The active trace and active channel is highlighted The scaling of the axes corresponds to the active trace Tip To hide all traces except one activate the context menu of the respective trace name segment in the trace list and select Hide all other Traces Remote command No command display configuration only Split All Creates a separate diagram for each trace in the active recall ...

Page 579: ... Split tab Remote command No command display configuration only Additional Functionality Zoom The zoom icons in the toolbar magnifiy a rectangular portion of a diagram zoom win dow with or without overview See also Chapter 5 11 3 Zoom Tab on page 479 or Chapter 3 3 6 1 Using the Graphic Zoom on page 60 5 17 2 Split Tab Arranges different diagrams on the screen Display Softtool ...

Page 580: ...ons Overlay All on page 563 Split All on page 563 Dual Split Triple Split Quad Split Splits the window into two three four diagrams and distributes the traces among the diagrams separating diagrams with different trace format and channel settings e g Cartesian and complex diagrams if possible Example of four traces in Quad Split display Display Softtool ...

Page 581: ...s is as defined in the corresponding input fields If the selected number of Diagrams exceeds the number of traces some of the new diagrams are created with a default trace Tip To vary the size and position of the diagrams drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the Diagram tab Remote command DISPlay LAYout Diagrams Rows Columns Selects the number of Diagrams or Rows and Columns...

Page 582: ...Color schemes are global settings and apply to all active recall sets The following predefined color schemes are optimized for the analyzer screen and for color hardcopies respectively Dark Background sets a black background color The traces and information ele ments in the diagram areas are displayed in different colors This setting is usually suitable for observing results on the analyzer screen...

Page 583: ...Scheme Dialog on page 569 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay COLor Hide Sensitive Information Unmasks or masks all stimulus value occurrences in the VNA GUI for the current recall set When you check Hide Sensitive Information for a particular recall set to mask the stimulus values you are asked to set a password If this password non empty it will be is requested the next time someone tries to uncheck H...

Page 584: ...configuration only Font Size Selects the font size of all textual information elements in the diagrams This comprises the trace and channel lists and the marker info fields Remote command DISPlay RFSize 5 17 3 2 Define User Color Scheme Dialog The Define User Color Scheme dialog modifies the predefined color schemes changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements User defined col...

Page 585: ...uch of the trace Instead of using the limit fail symbols you can colorize the trace to highlight failed trace sections Remote command DISPlay CMAP LIMit FSYMbol STATe Limit Test Colorize Trace when Failed Assigns a different trace color to failed trace segments The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement p...

Page 586: ...a s color scheme Color scheme of the new diagram area is independent restarts with the first colors Consequently the new trace is displayed with a color that has been already used Off Trace keeps its color Color scheme of the new diagram area continues color scheme of the previously active area The new trace is displayed with a new color See also program example for DISPlay CMAP TRACe COLor STATe ...

Page 587: ...ote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR STATus STATe Hard Key Panel Toggles the visibility of the Hard Key Panel For background information see Chapter 3 3 2 6 Hardkey Panel on page 50 The Hard Key Panel can also be closed via the X button in its top right corner Remote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR HKEY STATe Title Bar Task Bar Toggles the visibility of the title bar of the VNA application window and the Win...

Page 588: ...tent entries This tab is not available on a R S ZNBT Enabled Lock Diagrams Lock Screen Enabled touchscreen control of the R S ZNB ZNBT fully enabled All control elements are active Lock diagrams drag and drop functions in the diagrams are disabled all other control elements e g the softtool panels are still active Lock screen all control elements are locked Pressing any front panel key on the anal...

Page 589: ...lication The External Tools application gives access to pre installed and user defined exter nal tools Access SYSTEM APPLIC External Tools GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer obtain an overview of all implemented remote control programs test programs compile and run test scripts For a detailed description refer to Chapter 6 1 2 GPIB Explorer on page 642 Protocol W...

Page 590: ...This tool allows you to enter characters in particular letters if an input field cannot call up the analyzer s own on screen key board and if no external keyboard is connected See also Chapter 3 3 5 4 Using the Windows On Screen Keyboard on page 60 Windows Explorer Opens the WindowsExplorer and shows you the contents of the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna External Tools appli cation sho...

Page 591: ...ransfor mation which is then used to analyze the time domain behavior of the DUT eye dia gram rise time skew Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR TDR Setup The TDR Setup contains the following sections controls Topology Opens the Balanced Ports dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports see Chapter 5 9 1 3 Balanced Ports Dialog on page 440 Applic Softtool ...

Page 592: ...s Dialog This dialog allows to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation and subsequent TDR simulation Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR TDR Setup Stimulus After the settings are made the resulting sweep parameters are shown in the lower part of the dialog as can be seen in the screenshot below Opening the dialog automatically activates the Automatic Harmo...

Page 593: ...ternatively its velocity factor 1 sqrt εr The velocity factor is a measure for the velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a dielec tric with permittivity εr relative to its velocity in a vacuum velocity factor 1 Permittivity and velocity factor are coupled parameters i e setting one of them deter mines the other A higher permittitivity implies a smaller mechanical length but leaves delay and elect...

Page 594: ...s the output power of the R S ZNB stimulus IF Bandwidth and Average Factor determine the operation of the related R S ZNB ZNBT receiver For a description and related remote control commands see Chapter 5 2 Power Bw Avg Softtool on page 236 DC Value Defines how to calculate the DC gain of the DUT since the R S ZNB ZNBT cannot measure down to 0 Hz These parameters are the same settings as for the st...

Page 595: ...s on the simulated digital signal generator Advanced Settings If the active trace is an eye diagram the Advanced Settings button opens the Advanced Settings Dialog that allows in depth configuration of the simulated digital sig nal generator and receiver Display Measurements If the active trace is an eye diagram the Display Measurements button in the Eye Diag Tab softtool tab toggles the display o...

Page 596: ...ht Eye Width Time Bit Period Rise Time Fall Time Jitter Pk Pk Jitter RMS Duty Cycle Dist Duty Cycle Pct Crossing Percent Opening Factor SNR For a description of the result values see Eye Diagram Results on page 200 Export Measurements If the active trace is an eye diagram the Export Measurements button opens the Export Eye Measurements ASCII Files dialog that allows to save the Eye Diagram Results...

Page 597: ...zed The Topology to the right is upda ted accordingly Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Bit Stream Describes the bit stream generated by the virtual generator Bit Stream can either be a pseudo random binary sequence PRBS of the selected Length or a user defined bit stream The PRBSs are generated using a linear feedback shift register with generator polyno mials allowing the maximal run...

Page 598: ...x30 0 and 0x31 1 will be interpreted all other codes including whitespace and line endings are ignored Remote command MMEMory LOAD EYE BPATtern Symbol Rate The Symbol Rate baud rate defines the number of symbol changes per unit time or equivalently the symbol period 1 Symbol Rate In order to convert symbol rate to data rate multiply the symbol rate with the number of bits per symbol 2 bits per sym...

Page 599: ... DUT so this measured rise time may not be equal to the setting made in this dia log Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe DATA CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe THReshold Define Colors Opens a dialog that allows to change the color gradient of the eye diagram as a heat map Trace Cumulative Low Color is the color that is used for the occurrence value 1 Trace Cumulative High Color is the color t...

Page 600: ...alization at the virtual receiver A green LED indicates that the respective building block is active However the calcula tion chain can also be shortened using the Slider control below the buidling blocks Slider Allows to shorten the simulation calculation chain without deactivating the building blocks at the tail end Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE VIEW Define Colors See Define Colors on page 58...

Page 601: ...y of eye measurements will not be available the buttons in the lower section of the Eye Diag Tab are grayed out Display of eye mask and eye mask test will not be available the buttons on the Eye Mask Test Tab are grayed out Remote command not yet implemented High Level Low Level see High Level Low Level on page 583 Encoder Enables or disables 8b 10b encoding of the original bit stream Remote comma...

Page 602: ...sses for high fre quencies This type of equalization is done using finite impulse response FIR filters using between 2 and 4 taps The filter s sampling time is identical to bit period The coefficients of the FIR filter are not provided directly but in terms of pre and post cursor values The cursor value is defined as voltage ratio of two adjoining bits Since up to four taps can be used the bit pat...

Page 603: ... of the first bit after a transition Below an example for Post 1 Cursor 3dB The FIR filter coefficients are found by solving the equations c 1 c0 c1 c2 Va c 1 c0 c1 c2 Vb c 1 c0 c1 c2 Vc c 1 c0 c1 c2 Vd subject to the normalization condition c 1 c0 c1 c2 1 Active Enables disables pre emphasis Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE EMPHasis STATe Cursor Settings Sets the weights of the filter taps in the...

Page 604: ...user defined If enabled the jitter is added at the start of each symbol period and its magnitude depends on the parameters specified in the dialog Active This button must be first checked in order to activate any of the jitter sources At this point each of the individual jitter sources can be activated Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer STATe Random Random jitter is determined from a normal G...

Page 605: ... each entry in the file equal to the jitter to be added at each symbol period Such a Jitter File must be a 7 bit ASCII compatible text file the Byte Order Mark BOM that is common with UTF encodings is not allowed The file must consist of floating point values in parsable format separated by any whitespace and or line end ings Each value describes the jitter for a symbol transition even when the cu...

Page 606: ...te Chn EYE NOISe STATe RMS Defines the root mean square noise level Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE NOISe RMS DUT The Define DUT dialog allows to switch between different transmission and reflec tion paths of the DUT and to configure its DC properties In addition it allows to switch between the real DUT with measured frequency response and an ideal one with flat frequency response which can be us...

Page 607: ...ge 497 Mode Allows to temporarily switch between the real DUT with measured frequency response and an ideal one with flat frequency response Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE DUT MODE Equalization The Define Equalization dialog allows to activate and define a continuous time linear equalization at the receive side for the simulated eye diagram measurement Access Equalize button in the Advanced Sett...

Page 608: ...es disables equalization Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE EQUalization STATe CTLE Equalizer Specifies the parameters of the equalizer a two pole filter with single zero With angular frequencies ω 2πf the transfer function is given by H s DC Gain ωPole 1 ωPole 2 ωZero s ωZero s ωPole 1 s ωPole 2 The default values are taken from the USB 3 0 standard for the Long Channel model Remote command CALCula...

Page 609: ...ASK SHOW Mask Test On This check box determines whether the eye mask test shall be run after every recalcu lation of the eye diagram If the mask test is enabled an info field with the test results is displayed Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe CALCulate Chn EYE MASK DATA CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL Mask Fail Beep This check box determines whether the R S ZNB ZNBT should make an audible b...

Page 610: ...IC TDR Eye Mask Test Define Mask There are three mask areas that can be set up for the eye diagram test center poly gon top rectangle and bottom rectangle Testing against these mask areas can be selectively enabled Polygon Setup Allows to define the center polygon and to activate it in the mask test The center poly gon can either be an octagon a hexagon or a rectangle Shape combo box The sizes of ...

Page 611: ...e POLYgon HORizontal CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe POLYgon VERTical Top Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles Both rectangles are horizontally centered at the Mask Center and also their vertical off sets are specified relative to this point Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP STATe CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP HORizontal CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP VE...

Page 612: ... will result in a mask fail condition Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL CONDition CALCulate Chn EYE MASK VIOLation TOLerance CALCulate Chn EYE MASK VIOLation RATE Save Load Mask Configuration Opens a dialog that allows to save load the mask test configuration to from a 7bit ASCII file mask An example is shown below Mask Top Active true Width Top 9e 009 Offset Top 6 Mask Bottom Active true...

Page 613: ...ication Rise Time menu Rise Time Enables disables the rise time measurement The rise time measurement can only be performed if the active trace is Real Time Domain is enabled and the Low Pass Step time domain transform is used The latter in turn requires the stimulus grid to be harmonic If the rise time measurement can not be enabled a message is displayed Instead of performing the required config...

Page 614: ...b allows to enable and configure the Skew Measurement Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR Skew Skew Enables disables the skew measurement between the active trace and the Reference Trace The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for both the active trace and the reference trace the trace format is Real Time Domain is enabled the Low Pass Step time domain transform is used...

Page 615: ...kew Position Defines the percentage of the step size that defines the position of the reference points on the current and the reference trace The Skew value is the delta between the X coordinates of these reference points Remote command CALCulate Chn DTIMe POSition Extended Info Defines whether the info field for the skew measurement shall only provide basic infor mation default or extended inform...

Page 616: ...2 Pass see Chapter 5 13 1 Limit Test Tab on page 515 5 18 2 10 Time Gate Tab Replicates the Time Gate tab of the Trace Config softtool see Chapter 5 12 4 Time Domain Tab on page 494 Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR Time Gate Since for the eye diagram the time axis always equals two times the symbol time the display of the time gate range lines Show Range Lines does not make sense and is therefore not avai...

Page 617: ...esented as an eye diagram the X Axis Settings are grayed out as shown above If the active trace is represented as a rise time or skew diagram the X Axis Set tings allow to adjust the center span or start stop no matter if the X axis repre sents Time or Distance see also Time Distance on page 435 5 19 Setup Softtool The System menu provides functions which you can use to to return to a defined inst...

Page 618: ...s that the vector network analyzer application needs to be re started to activate a different lan guage English is the preinstalled language A setup file for additional languages Vector Net work Analyzer Translation Setup is available for download from the Rohde Schwarz Internet site The setup file is identical for all analyzers of the R S ZNx family however it is impor tant to chose the correct F...

Page 619: ...ument reset See Chapter 4 1 1 Global Persistent Settings on page 75 Access SETUP Setup System Config Presets Tab 604 Calibration Tab 605 User Interface tab 607 Messages Tab 609 Channel Bits Tab 610 Advanced Tab 610 Power Tab 612 Presets Tab Specifies the behavior of the R S ZNB ZNBT upon a preset Preset Scope Qualifies whether a preset affects all open recall sets Instrument or the active recall s...

Page 620: ...ries for storing trace data limit lines calibration data and all settings in the Printer Setup dialog to default val ues See Chapter 5 16 2 Printer Setup Dialog on page 558 Remote command n a Preset Configuration Specifies whether System Preset will perform a factory preset or restore the settings stored in a user preset file A user preset file is an arbitrary recall set znx file to be stored usin...

Page 621: ...d apply averaging to reduce trace noise In contrast to regular aver aging see Chapter 5 2 3 Average Tab on page 238 the number of calibration sweeps is calculated automatically Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect AVERage Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard Enables disables multiple calibrations in the calibration wizard which allows to set up and perform multiple calibrations in one manual cali...

Page 622: ...her directory None means that no cal kit files are loaded on start up Use the special directory to make sure that you do not have to import kits manually even after terminating the VNA application improperly in which case previously impor ted cal kit files will not be stored to the recall set file Remote command MMEMory LOAD CKIT UDIRectory User Interface tab Provides general user interface config...

Page 623: ... and Chapter 4 6 2 4 Circuit Models for 4 Port Net works on page 185 If active the resistance R i is displayed and specified as conductance G i 1 R i Remote command SYSTem DISPlay CONDuctancesn a Decimal Places Defines the number of fractional digits for quantities with different physical units The settings affect entries and results e g the values in the marker lists Note If your instrument is eq...

Page 624: ...Show Instrument Messages unchecked these buttons are disabled However their checked state is memorized Remote command SYSTem ERRor DISPlay INFO SYSTem ERRor DISPlay WARNings SYSTem ERRor DISPlay ERRor Show Remote Error Info Messages Defines whether information popups shall be displayed whenever a remote control command error occurs The displayed information can be useful for program development an...

Page 625: ...ng effect 0 means that no output signals are enabled at any of the pins 8 9 10 11 and 16 17 18 19 1 enables the output signal at pin 8 The signal is switched on while the R S ZNB ZNBT performs a measurement sweep in the selected channel All other signals are inactive 2 enables the output signal at pin 9 3 enables the output signals at pins 8 and 9 255 enables the output signals at all pins See als...

Page 626: ... be retrieved using the Save Report function of the Info dialog see Save Print Save Report on page 614 For further infomation see Chapter 9 Error Messages and Troubleshooting on page 1245 Remote command DIAGnostic DUMP SIZE Touchstone Export Options Configures whitespace insertion during Touchstone file export The default export format is explained in chapter Chapter 4 4 2 1 Touchstone Files on pa...

Page 627: ...arator Power Tab The settings in this tab define how the VNA sets the output power between sweeps This applies to all sweep modes but is particularly useful in single sweep mode Keep Auto Reduce Power Time Settling Delay End Measurement Restart Sweep Figure 5 56 Power control at sweep end in Single Sweep mode power sweep By default at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is re...

Page 628: ...put power is not altered if there s only a single channel with a single driving port performing a Time or CW Mode sweep In triggered mode the analyzer always uses the settings of the first measurement point while waiting for the trigger signal Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt SWEepend MODE Settling Delay Reset Delay If Power Mode at Sweep End is set to Reduce or Keep the Settling Delay defines...

Page 629: ...which you may send in for fault diagnosis see Chapter 9 3 Obtain ing Technical Support on page 1248 Remote command DIAGnostic DEVice STATe SYSTem DFPRint Options Tab Shows the installed software and hardware options You can also enable additional software options using the option key supplied with the option Proceed according to the instructions in the dialog For an overview of options refer to Ch...

Page 630: ...RODuct OPTion INFO Hardware Tab Gives an overview of the analyzer s hardware configuration and basic hardware related instrument settings Configured External Switch Matrices The Hardware tab also provides information about connected switch matrices In par ticular for mechanical matrices the current relay switch counts are reported if suppor ted by the matrix Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVi...

Page 631: ...he service functions require a service level 0 that is protected by a pass word Those service functions should be used by a Rohde Schwarz service repre sentative only Refer to the service manual for more information Password Enter a password here to activate the required service level Remote command SYSTem PASSword CENable Service Function Identifier of the service function in dotted textual examp...

Page 632: ...r a second R S ZNB ZNBT net work analyzer External The external reference clock signal must be applied to the REF IN con nector at the rear of the instrument The external reference signal must meet the specifications of the data sheet its frequency must be specified in the Ext Fre quency field The internal reference signal is synchronized to the external signal The external signal is also looped t...

Page 633: ... Chapter 7 3 SCPI Command Reference on page 678 The ZVABT language ensures compatibility with network analyzers of the R S ZVA B T family E g compared to the DEFAULT language the command set does not include INITiate CONTinuous ALL and INITiate IMMediate ALL The function of INITiate CONTinuous and INITiate IMMediate DUMMy is modified refer to the remote control docu mentation in Chapter 7 3 9 INIT...

Page 634: ...mpatible ID and option strings are set Binary data is transferred in a device specific bit order however the bit order can be changed using HP xxxx specific commands The ID and option strings can be changed or reset to the R S factory ID string Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing SYSTem IDENtify FACTory SYSTem OPTions STRing SYSTem OPTions FACTory FORMat BORDer Advanced Opens a dialog that allow...

Page 635: ...ay of instrument messages as information popups in particular the display of remote control command errors 5 19 4 External Devices Tab Allows to set up and configure external power meters generators and calibration units and to enable error logging for the current session Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 7 18 External Power Meters on page 222 Chapter 4 7 19 External...

Page 636: ... S ZVAB B44 order no 1302 5544 03 Option R S ZVAB B44 consists of an adapter and a driver software The driver software is installed on the network analyzer Connect the USB port of the adapter to any of the master USB connectors on the front or rear panel of the analyzer Connect the GPIB port of the adapter to the external device An appropriate Virtual Instrument Software Architecture VISA library ...

Page 637: ...n auto detect the instrument type driver and the serial number of the connected power meter To control external devices via GPIB the pre installed RS Visa library visa32 dll must be replaced by the NI Visa library Known Devices Table with all power meters that the analyzer detects to be on line i e connected and switched on Scan Instruments refreshes the table copies a detected instru ment to the ...

Page 638: ...I VISA library ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement Automation Explorer Otherwise Scan Instru ments will send an identification query IDN causing the analyzer to close the External Power Meters dialog without executing Scan Instruments and to activate the remote screen Remote command n a LAN Detection Activate LAN Detection to include the LAN...

Page 639: ...ysical interface connector Interface protocol Address Remarks LAN VXI 11 IpAddress e g 127 0 0 0 Full VISA resource string TCPIP board Address INSTR SOCKET IpAddress PortNo e g 127 0 0 0 50000 LAN connection with pure TCP IP protocol refer to your VISA user documentation GPIB GPIB0 GPIB9 Address e g 20 Full VISA resource string GPIB board Address INSTR LAN or USB Other Interface specific e g for S...

Page 640: ...es 1GP70 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr SPCorrection STATe 5 19 4 4 External Generators Dialog The External Generators dialog configures external generators so that they can be used for measurements and power calibrations Access SYSTEM SETUP External Devices Generators Background information Refer to section Chapter 4 7 19 External Generators on page 223 The configuration of...

Page 641: ...nerator dialog may be changed in the dialog The following generator properties are not defined in the Add External Generator dia log but configurable here Ext Ref switches the generator to either external box checked or internal fre quency reference The setting does not affect the frequency reference settings of the analyzer SYSTEM SETUP Freq Ref Make sure to establish consistent settings in your ...

Page 642: ...an Instru ments will send an identification query IDN causing the analyzer to close the External Generators dialog without executing Scan Instruments and to activate the remote screen Remote command n a LAN Detection Activate LAN Detection to include the LAN interface in the autodetection sequence see Scan Instruments Note LAN detection will only work for external devices sharing the same IP subne...

Page 643: ...Remarks LAN VXI 11 IpAddress e g 127 0 0 0 Full VISA resource string TCPIP board Address INSTR SOCKET IpAddress PortNo e g 127 0 0 0 50000 LAN connection with pure TCP IP protocol refer to your VISA user documentation GPIB GPIB0 GPIB9 Address e g 20 Full VISA resource string GPIB board Address INSTR USB USB VISA ManID ProdID SerialNo e g 0x0AAD 0x0047 100098 2733 0x0AAD is the manufacturer ID of R...

Page 644: ...switch matrix is configured Optimization Allows to select between different switch matrix routing optimizations Speed switch as little as possible Precision always use the best possible route in terms of quality priority See Chapter 4 7 20 4 Multiple Paths Precision vs Speed on page 230 for back ground information The selection is only enabled if at least one of the connected switch matrices has m...

Page 645: ...log allows to discover and register external switch matrices Access SYSTEM SETUP External Ports Switch Matrix Background information Refer to section Chapter 4 7 20 External Switch Matrices on page 226 The registration of a new external switch matrix typically involves the following steps 1 connect the switch matrix to your R S ZNB ZNBT using LAN or USB interface 2 If the switch matrix is connecte...

Page 646: ...f an adapter and a driver software The driver software is installed on the network analyzer Connect the USB port of the adapter to any of the master USB connectors on the front or rear panel of the analyzer Connect the GPIB port of the adapter to the external device Finally the pre installed RS Visa library visa32 dll must be replaced by the NI Visa library Known Devices Table with the discovered ...

Page 647: ...a USB and not via Direct Control or LAN interface Otherwise the button is disabled Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine Scan Instruments Performs an autodetection of Known Devices on the supported interfaces Note Unintentional switchover to remote control When using the NI VISA library ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measure...

Page 648: ...lect the appropriate driver file Otherwise manually select the Driver Matrix driver files matrix are stored in the Resources ExtDev subdirectory of the analyzer s program directory Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine Delete All Unregisters all switch matrices automatically deleting all switch matrix RF connections Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix DELete 5...

Page 649: ... The Switch Matrix RF Connections dialog allows to define the RF connections between the VNA and the switch matrices and the RF connections to the DUT test ports Access SYSTEM SETUP External Ports RF Connections The following configuration rules apply Every VNA port must either be connected to a matrix port or directly assigned to a DUT test port Every matrix that was added to the connection confi...

Page 650: ...n page 226 The definition of the RF connections typically involves the following steps 1 Add one or more switching matrices These matrices must have been registered before see Chapter 5 19 5 3 External Matrices Dialog on page 630 for details 2 For every matrix VNA port the north ports in the graphical representation specify the VNA port to which this matrix VNA port is physically connected or set ...

Page 651: ...n case no matrix has been added to the RF connection configuration yet If the RF configuration configuration already contains all registered switch matrices the Add button is disabled Remote command n a Delete Opens the Delete Switch Matrix dialog Select some matrices and tap OK to remove them from the RF connection configura tion or tap Cancel to quit the dialog without removing a switch matrix f...

Page 652: ... use this function at any time to number the used test ports in ascending order e g after editing port connections Note however that in general this will not preserve any manually created test port connections Remote command n a Edit Matrix VNA Port Connections To edit a matrix VNA port connection tap on the corresponding port symbol In the Edit dialog select the appropriate VNA port or tap Set Un...

Page 653: ... softtool but perform an immediate action PRESET HARDKEY Performs a preset of all instrument settings or of the active recall set depending on the settings in the Presets tab of the SYSTEM SETUP Setup System Config dia log See Presets Tab on page 604 A preset may be a factory preset or a user defined preset It does not change e g the data related to global resources e g cal pool cal kit data the p...

Page 654: ...everses a preceding UNDO On the virtual Hardkey Panel the corresponding hardkeys are disabled grayed out if this is not possible In general UNDO and REDO are disabled if the size of the active recall set file exceeds 1 MB Tip You can also use UNDO after a PRESET HARDKEY in order to restore your pre vious instrument settings Additional SYSTEM Hardkeys ...

Page 655: ...case for R S ZNB40 variants 82 and 84 and the R S ZNBT20 A VISA installation on the remote control PC is required The network analyzer can itself act as a master and control external devices e g power meters generators via LAN USB or GPIB interface A VISA installation on the analyzer is a prerequisite for this remote control type The Virtual Instrument Software Architecture VISA library is include...

Page 656: ...programming details depend on the library version used and on the programming language For this reason the examples in chapters Com mand Reference and Programming Examples are reduced to the mere SCPI syntax Example controller programs may be obtained from the Rohde Schwarz support cen ters In many cases it can be preferable to integrate the controller program into post processing tools e g Micros...

Page 657: ...zer Bin After the GPIB Explorer is started the interface and protocol for the connection to the instrument can be selected in a dialog The following options are provided NT named pipe not supported at present GPIB address for connection to controllers equipped with a National Instruments GPIB interface using the GPIB bus connector RSIB VISA TCPIP and VISA HSLIP for LAN connection requires an appro...

Page 658: ...all received commands to the file C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RemoteLog 6 1 3 Switchover to Remote Control On power up the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be oper ated via the front panel controls The instrument is switched to remote control as soon as it receives a command from the controller If the instrument is controlled via RSIB or VXI 11 protocol the...

Page 659: ...ote screen you can use Clear Error Messages to delete it The remaining controls are for future extensions Display on and off states Switching on the display means that the analyzer shows the measurement screen with the current recall sets diagram areas and traces without leaving the remote state In this operating mode it is possible to observe the screen while a remote control script is executed a...

Page 660: ...ted when this is triggered by the remote control command SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the GUI or via remote control see Chapter 6 1 3 2 Returning to Manual Operation on page 646 You can also lock the remote touch screen using SYSTem TSLock SCReen A tooltip across the bottom of the remote screen indicates a remote co...

Page 661: ...be disabled e g by the Local Lockout Message via GPIB LLO see Chapter 10 2 3 2 Interface Mes sages on page 1256 This prevents unintentional switch over i e return to manual control is possible via remote control only Returning to manual control via the front panel keys can be enabled again e g by deactivating the REN control line of the GPIB bus 6 1 4 Combining Manual and Remote Control Using a re...

Page 662: ...e instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the output level to some value Queries cause data to be provided for output on the GPIB bus e g for identifi cation of the device or polling the active input 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 Common commands have a function and syntax that is exactly defined in stan dard IEEE 4...

Page 663: ...s are not automatically adapted Therefore GPIB bus control programs should always define an initial device status e g with the command RST and then implement the required settings 6 2 2 1 Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an aster isk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET resets the instrument ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bi...

Page 664: ...nes the trigger source external trigger The following command has the same effect TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Note The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself is case insensitive Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a wh...

Page 665: ...ommon When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below TRIG The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows TRIG SOUR EXT TIM 0 1 However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG THR LOW 6 2 2 4 Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explici...

Page 666: ...so permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the default unit is used Example SOUR RFG FREQ 1 5GHz is equivalent to SOUR RFG FREQ 1 5E9 Special numeric values The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numeric values A query returns the associated numerical value Example Setting command SENSe FREQuency STARt MINimum The query SENSe FREQuency...

Page 667: ...trings Strings must always be entered within single or double quotation marks or Example CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 or CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 6 2 3 5 Block Data Format Block data is a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter with definite length has the following structure Example HEADer HEADer 45168x...

Page 668: ... control Moreover all commands follow SCPI syntax rules and SCPI confirmed commands have been used whenever possible These principles largely simplify the development of remote control scripts The GUI and the remote control command set both aim at maximum operating conven ience In manual control this generally means that the control elements are easy to find and intuitive to handle and that the ef...

Page 669: ...ber 9 trace suffix 9 to it 6 3 2 Active Traces in Remote Control In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and traces defined The active channel contains the active trace see Chap ter 4 1 3 1 Trace Settings on page 77 In remote control each channel contains an active trace unless the channel contains no trace at all so the notion of active ch...

Page 670: ...ctive trace in channel 1 and create a marker Mkr 1 The marker is assigned to Trc2 Example CALC PAR SEL Trc1 CALC1 MARK ON Select the old default trace Trc1 as the active trace for remote control Create a new marker to verify that Trc1 is now the active trace in channel 1 In the SCPI command description the numeric suffix Ch is used for channel settings it denotes the configured channel whereas Chn...

Page 671: ...emes for addressing traces and channels and for querying trace and channel names The following tables give an overview Table 6 1 Addressing channels Method Commands Example Channel number Ch as a numeric suffix CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe ON Query all channel names CONFigure CHANnel CATalog returns the names of all channels Assign or query channel name of a channel num bered Ch CONFigure CHANnel Ch...

Page 672: ...ame CONFigure TRACe Trc CHANnel NAME ABCD returns the channel name for trace ABCD the trace suffix is ignored Query channel number for a trace referenced by its trace name CONFigure TRACe Trc CHANnel NAME ID ABCD returns the actual channel number for trace ABCD the trace suffix is ignored 6 4 Command Processing The block diagram below shows how commands are serviced in the instrument IEC IEEE bus ...

Page 673: ...he syntax check the range of the numerical parameters is checked if required If the command recognition detects a delimiter or a DCL it also requests the data set to perform the necessary instrument hardware settings Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process further commands This means that new commands can already be serviced while the hardware is still being set overlapping execution 6 ...

Page 674: ...as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit sends the error message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data is sent on the GPIB bus or via the Ethernet the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI 6 4 6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defi...

Page 675: ...lements INITiate IMMediate commands as overlapped commands Assuming e g that INITiate IMMediate DUMMy takes longer to execute than OPC sending the command sequence INIT OPC results in initiating a sweep and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR Sending the commands INIT OPC CLS still initiates a sweep Since the operation is still pending when the analyzer executes CLS forcing it into the ...

Page 676: ...s Hierarchy of status registers As shown in section Overview of Status Registers the status information is of hierarch ical structure STB SRE The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRE form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB pro vides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level registers...

Page 677: ...ace no 10 Limit trace no 9 Limit trace no 8 Limit trace no 7 Limit trace no 6 Limit trace no 5 Limit trace no 4 Limit trace no 3 Limit trace no 2 Limit trace no 1 LIMit2 summary 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 Register not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used Limit trace no 16 Limit trace n...

Page 678: ...ition The CONDition part is permanently overwritten by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents always reflect the current instrument state This register part can only be read but not overwritten or cleared Reading the CONDi tion register is nondestructive PTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the condition part none 0 to 1 1 to 0...

Page 679: ... contribute to the sum bit ENAB bit 1 If the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be overwritten and read by the user at will Its contents are not affected by reading The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instru ment automatically genera...

Page 680: ...6 of the SRE is ignored because it corresponds to the summary bit of the STB The bits in the STB are defined as follows Bit No Meaning 2 Error Queue not empty If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request SRQ Thus an error can be recognized and further pinned down by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message 3 QUEStionable ...

Page 681: ...re status infor mation in a single bit It can be queried by means of a Parallel Poll The Parallel Poll Enable PPE register determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results Related common commands The IST flag is quer...

Page 682: ...r in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which describes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control or when a user defined softkey i...

Page 683: ...g 0 LIMit2 register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 1 Failed limit check for trace no 1 This bit is set if any point on trace no 1 fails the limit check 14 Failed limit check for trace no 14 This bit is set if any point on trace no 14 fails the limit check The bits in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 registe...

Page 684: ...it is set to 1 The STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware register can be queried using the commands STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware CONDition or STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware EVENt The bits in the STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware register are defined as follows Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Reference frequency lock failure With external reference signal System External Referen...

Page 685: ... set if the analyzer detects an excessive source level at one of the ports The signal is turned off and the sweep halted Check signal path for the received wave especially check external components Then restart the sweep INITiate Ch IMMediate 10 Problem concerning external generator This bit is set if an external generator has been configured but cannot be controlled or pro vides error messages Ch...

Page 686: ...initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why Parallel poll of all devices Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue 6 5 4 1 Service Request The R S ZNB ZNBT can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request causes an interrupt to which the control program can react appropri ately Initiating an SRQ As s...

Page 687: ...is set then 2 STAT QUES EVENT query STATus QUEStionable register If bit 10 QUEStionable LIMit1 summary bit is set then 3 Query STAT QUES LIMit1 EVENT query STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 register If bit 1 is set then the first trace failed the limit check The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service...

Page 688: ...ypes of commands The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level registers The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers e g STATus OPERation All queries return a decimal number which represents the bit pattern of the status regis ter This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on its ...

Page 689: ...e below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the R S ZNB ZNBT Event Switching on supply voltage Power On Status Clear DCL SDC Device Clear Selected Device Clear RST or SYS Tem PRE Set ALL STA Tus PRE Set CLS Effect 0 1 Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear PPE yes Clear EVENt parts of the reg isters yes yes Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QU...

Page 690: ...ull use of the R S ZNB ZNBT features but do not need R S ZVR compatibility you should use the commands listed in Chapter 7 3 SCPI Command Reference on page 678 7 1 Special Terms and Notation This section explains the meaning of special syntax elements used in the SCPI com mand reference sections The following information is provided in the reference sections Complete command syntax and parameter l...

Page 691: ...e included zero or more times 7 1 3 Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters Parame ters either provide alternative options setting a or setting b or setting c see special character or they form a list separated by commas setting x y Parameter1 Parameter2 In the command tables and lists parameters are generally described by a name Parameter1 Parameter2 writt...

Page 692: ...ry Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer and the tooltip error messages for remote control ESE Event Status Enable 0 255 Sets the event status enable register to the value indicated The query ESE returns t...

Page 693: ...t the contents of the power on status clear flag The response can be 0 or 1 RST ReSeT no query Sets the instrument to a defined default status The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet DUMMy The RST value of each command is reported in the reference description See also SYSTem PRESet SCOPe SRE Service Request Enable 0 255 Sets the service request enable register to the value indicated Bit 6 MSS m...

Page 694: ... system In continuous sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous on page 909 ON the R S ZNB ZNBT automatically starts a new sweep Usage Event 7 3 2 CALCulate Commands The CALCulate commands perform post acquisition data processing Functions in the SENSe subsystem are related to data acquisition while the CALCulate subsys tem operates on the data acquired by a SENSe function 7 3 2 1 CALCulate CLIMits The CA...

Page 695: ...at depending on the FORMat DATA setting If block data format is used it is recommended to select EOI as a receive terminator SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator EOI CALCulate DATA ALL 680 CALCulate DATA DALL 681 CALCulate DATA TRACe 681 CALCulate Ch DATA CALL 682 CALCulate Ch DATA CALL CATalog 683 CALCulate Ch DATA CHANnel ALL 683 CALCulate Ch DATA CHANnel DALL 683 CALCulate Ch DATA SGRoup 68...

Page 696: ...race refer enced by its trace name TraceName The set direction allows to import formatted or unformatted trace data to an existing trace data access point 3 or 2 in Chapter 4 1 5 Data Flow on page 85 Note Unformatted trace data SDATa can only be imported to memory traces Formatted trace data FDATa can only be imported to live traces if the related channel is in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTin...

Page 697: ...must match After importing data downstream parameters in the data flow can be changed and their effect is shown directly Any request for new data from the hardware Restart Sweep in single sweep mode or switching to continuous sweep mode discards imported data and switches back the display to measured data Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Format SDATa FSIData SDATa Output as unformatted trace da...

Page 698: ...hannel number Query parameters Format FDATa SDATa MDATa Output format for the S parameter data see CALCulate Chn DATA Return values Data Trace data either in ASCII or block data format depending on the current FORMat DATA setting Usage Query only CALCulate Ch DATA CHANnel DALL Format Reads the current response values of all data traces of the selected channel Use CALCulate Ch DATA CHANnel ALL to q...

Page 699: ...single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuousOFF The trace can be any of the traces acquired dur ing the single sweep cycle Tip This command can only be used for SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt 1 Ensure that the single sweep is terminated before using this command otherwise the results of the trace count will be unpredictable see example below Alterna tively use the CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt command Suffix ...

Page 700: ...e can be any of the traces acquired during the single sweep cycle Tip This command can only be used for SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt 1 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example See CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt Usage Query only CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt Format FwCount FwCountEnd Reads the response values of a trace or a consecutive group of traces acquired in sin gle swee...

Page 701: ...eving the Results of Previous Sweeps on page 1231 Usage Query only CALCulate Chn DATA Format Data CALCulate Chn DATA Format The query reads the response values of the selected channel s active trace or reads error terms of the selected channel The set command either imports formatted or unformatted trace data to the selected channel s active trace data access point 3 or 2 in Chapter 4 1 5 Data Flo...

Page 702: ... 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 CALC DATA FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace In the FDATa setting 20 comma separated ASCII values are returned CALC DATA STIM Query the 20 stimulus values of the created trace 20 comma separated ASCII values are returned CALC2 PAR SDEF Trc2 S11 Create ...

Page 703: ...e point for Cartesian diagrams 2 values for polar diagrams SDATa Unformatted trace data Real and imaginary part of each measurement point 2 values per trace point irrespective of the selected trace format The trace mathe matics is not taken into account MDATa Unformatted trace data see SDATa after evaluation of the trace mathematics NCData Factory calibrated trace data the values are obtained righ...

Page 704: ...For the factory calibration the query form is allowed only no change of factory calibration data Tip Use the generalized command SENSe Ch CORRection CDATa to read or write error terms for arbitrary analyzer ports For additional programming examples refer to Chapter 8 2 5 3 Saving and Recalling Error Terms on page 1236 CALCulate Chn DATA STIMulus Reads the stimulus values of the active data or memo...

Page 705: ...rameters Boolean ON OFF horizontal line on or off RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn DLINe Manual operation See Show Horiz Line on page 531 7 3 2 4 CALCulate DTIMe Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the skew measurement provided with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R S ZNB ZNBT K20 CALCulate Chn DTIMe DATA 690 CALCulate Chn DTIMe LIMit FAIL 691 CALCulate Chn DTIMe LIMit FA...

Page 706: ...on current trace Y value of ref point on current trace X value of ref point on reference trace Y value of ref point on reference trace Stimulus axis distance skew distance skew distance skew time X value of ref point on cur rent trace Y value of ref point on current trace X value of ref point on reference trace Y value of ref point on refer ence trace CALCulate Chn DTIMe LIMit FAIL Returns a 0 or ...

Page 707: ...ctivates the skew limit check Use CALCulate Chn DTIMe LIMit LIMit to set the applicable limit Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON Skew limit check active OFF Skew limit check inactive RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Skew Check On on page 600 CALCulate Chn DTIMe POSition SkewPos Defines the position of the skew measurement Suffix C...

Page 708: ...n See Skew on page 599 CALCulate Chn DTIMe TARGet SkewRefTrace Selects the reference trace for the skew measurement See CALCulate Chn DTIMe STATe for conditions on both the active and the refer ence trace Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters SkewRefTrace Reference trace identified by its name within channel Chn Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Referen...

Page 709: ... MASK CENTer VERTical 706 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK DATA 706 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL 707 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL BEEP 708 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL CONDition 708 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom STATe 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe POLYgon STATe 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP STATe 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom HORizontal 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP HORizontal ...

Page 710: ...se an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Emphasis in the generator simulation for eye diagram measurements is enabled using CALCulate Chn EYE EMPHasis STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace 1 2 1 2 1 for the Post 1 filter tap 2 for the Post 2 filter tap Parameters Weight Weight relative to the Cursor tap RST 0 dB Default uni...

Page 711: ...ions R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Active on page 588 CALCulate Chn EYE EQUalization CTLE DC DC Gain Specifies the DC gain of the CTLE a two pole filter with single zero at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram The equalizer can be enabled disabled using CALCulate Chn E...

Page 712: ...ve trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram The equalizer can be enabled disabled using CALCulate Chn EYE EQUalization STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters CTLE Zero Default unit Hz Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See CTLE Equalizer on page 593 CALCulate Chn EYE EQUalization STATe Boolean Enables disables the CTLE at the receiver simulat...

Page 713: ... can be loaded from a 7 bit ASCII file see MMEMory LOAD EYE BPATtern and is repeated until the configured bit length is reached see CALCulate Chn EYE INPut LENGth BITS If not loaded from file the default pat tern 10 is repeated Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Bit Stream on page 582 CALCulate Chn EYE INPut DRATe DataRate Defines the data trate of the bit stream generator for the relat...

Page 714: ... ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Length on page 582 CALCulate Chn EYE INPut LENGth PRBS PrbsLength Defines the length of the pseudo random binary sequence to be simulated for the rela ted eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Before executing this command the pattern type must be set to PRBS see CALCulate Chn EYE ...

Page 715: ... Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters RiseTime Default unit s Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Rise Time Rise Time Definition on page 584 CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe THReshold RiseThreshold Selects the appropriate rise time definition for the low pass in the binary signal genera tor simulation of the related eye diagram The rise time itself can be c...

Page 716: ...he Dirac jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Dirac jitter insertion can be enabled using CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE PERiodic Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters DiracProbability Probability of the jitter occurring at each symbo...

Page 717: ...CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE PERiodic Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters PeriodicMagnitude RST 1 ns Default unit s Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Periodic on page 590 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic PHASe PeriodicPhase Defines the phase of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram This command will raise an exec...

Page 718: ...ion of the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram The individual jitter sources can be selectively enabled using CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE DIRac CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE PERiodic CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE RANDom CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE USER This command will raise an execution error if the ...

Page 719: ...ude frequency and phase of the jitter can be specified using CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic MAGNitude CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic FREQuency and CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic PHASe respectively Note that jitter will not be applied unless the jitter functionality is activated using CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Bool...

Page 720: ...applied unless the jitter functionality is activated using CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See User Specific on page 590 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK AUTO Automatically creates an eye mask based on the current eye measurement settings Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify ...

Page 721: ...mber used to identify the active trace Parameters VerticalOffset Vertical offset relative to the 0 V level i e the Voltage level of the center Default unit V Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Mask Center on page 597 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK DATA Returns the detailed results of the mask test in the related eye diagram i e the con tents of the corresponding result info field This command w...

Page 722: ...ge 594 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL Returns Pass or Fail to indicate the result of the limit check in the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram if the eye test is not enabled CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe ON or if the mask is empty see CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOT Tom TOP POLYgon STATe Tip Use CALCulate CL...

Page 723: ... CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL CONDition FailCondition Defines whether the fail condition for the eye mask test of the related eye diagram is specified in absolute or relative terms This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters FailCondition SAMPles RATE SAMPles The e...

Page 724: ...tangle in the eye mask of the related eye dia gram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Use CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom STATe or CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP STATe to activate or deactivate the area in the eye mask The eye mask test is enabled disabled using CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe Suffix Chn Channel number us...

Page 725: ... vate the area in the eye mask The eye mask test is enabled disabled using CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters PolygonType OCTogon HEXagon RECTangle Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Polygon Setup on page 595 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe POLYgon HORizontal Main Minor Defines the main and minor width of the center polygon i...

Page 726: ... STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Main Default unit V Minor Default unit V Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Polygon Setup on page 595 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHOW Boolean Defines the visibility of the configured eye mask in the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an...

Page 727: ...ionRate Default unit percent Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Test Settings on page 597 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK VIOLation TOLerance ViolationTolerance Defines the violation tolerance i e the number of bad samples for the mask test in the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram This tolerance will o...

Page 728: ...298 V Eye Amplitude 2 596 V Eye Height 2 596 V Eye Width 10 000 ns Bit Period 10 000 ns Rise Time 115 000 ps Fall Time 115 000 ps Jitter Pk Pk 50 125 ps Jitter RMS 0 000 s Duty Cycle Dist 0 000 s Duty Cycle Pct 0 000 Crossing Percent 50 000 Opening Factor 1 000 SNR 0 000 Usage Query only Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Display Measurements on page 580 CALCulate Chn EYE MEASurement ST...

Page 729: ...ussian noise in the generator simulation of the related eye dia gram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram The noise RMS level can be set using CALCulate Chn EYE NOISe RMS Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Active on page 591 CALCu...

Page 730: ...related eye diagram measurement The low pass is defined using its rise time see CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe DATA on page 700 and rise time definition see CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe THReshold on page 700 This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean RST ...

Page 731: ...ITTER and subsequently CALCulate1 EYE JITTer STATe is turned OFF the calculation chain is further shortened to the next active building block Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Slider on page 585 7 3 2 6 CALCulate FILTer GATE The CALCulate FILTer GATE commands define the properties of the time gate which is used to optimize the time domain response CALCulate FILTer GATE TIME AOFFset 716...

Page 732: ... gate position The response is 1E 009 2E 009 Manual operation See Adjust Time Gate on page 413 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME TYPE TimeGateFilter Selects the time gate filter type defining what occurs to the data in the specific time region Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters TimeGateFilter BPASs NOTCh BPASs Band pass filter Pass all information in specified time...

Page 733: ...olph Chebyshev time gate The command is only available if a Dolph Chebyshev time gate is active CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME WINDowDCHebyshev Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters SidebandSupp Sideband suppression Range 10 dB to 120 dB Increment 10 dB RST 32 dB Default unit dB Example RST CALC FILT TIME WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph Chebyshev t...

Page 734: ...E SHOW Boolean Enables or disables permanent display of the gate limits Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON time gate permanently displayed OFF time gate hidden RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME CENTer Manual operation See Show Range Lines on page 499 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SPAN Span Defines the span of the time gate Suffix Chn...

Page 735: ...time gate permanently Manual operation See Axis Pair on page 499 Note If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency the stop frequency is set to the start frequency plus the minimum frequency span CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SPAN If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency the start fre quency is set to the stop frequency minus the minim...

Page 736: ...t processing of the mea sured data in order to obtain various display formats CALCulate Chn FORMat Type Defines how the measured result at any sweep point is post processed and presented in the graphical display Note The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities see Chapter 5 10 Format Softtool on page 469 and CALCulate Ch PARameter commands Nevertheless it ...

Page 737: ...cale PHASe Phase of z displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis UPHase Unwrapped phase of z displayed in a Cartesian dia gram with a linear vertical axis POLar Magnitude and phase displayed in a polar diagram SMITh Magnitude and phase displayed in a Smith chart ISMith Magnitude and phase displayed in an inverted Smith chart GDELay Group delay displayed in a Cartesian diagram REA...

Page 738: ...sed to identify the active trace Parameters Steps Number of steps Range 1 to 10000 RST 10 Example RST CALC FORM GDEL Select group delay calculation for the active trace CALC GDAP SCO 15 Select an aperture of 15 steps Manual operation See Aperture Points on page 474 7 3 2 9 CALCulate LIMit The CALCulate LIMit commands define the limit lines and control the limit check CALCulate LIMit CIRCle FAIL AL...

Page 739: ... Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg TYPE 736 CALCulate Chn LIMit SOUNd STATe 737 CALCulate Chn LIMit STATe 737 CALCulate Chn LIMit STATe AREA 738 CALCulate Chn LIMit TTLout Pt STATe 738 CALCulate LIMit CIRCle FAIL ALL RecallSet Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the circle limit check has failed for at least one channel in the referenced recall set 0 represents pass and 1 represents fail Query paramet...

Page 740: ...ve trace Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Test on page 529 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DATA CenterX CenterY Radius Defines a circle limit lines by its center coordinates and its radius Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters CenterX Range Virtually no restriction for center coordinates RST 0 Default unit NN CenterY Range Virtually no restriction for center coord...

Page 741: ...0 repre sents pass and 1 represents fail Tip Use CALCulate CLIMits FAIL to perform a composite global limit check Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle STATe Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit Check on page 528 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle SOUNd STATe Boolean Switches the acoustic signal fail beep on or off The fail beep is genera...

Page 742: ...imit line segments no 1 to n are updated the limit line segments n 1 k are generated with default response values see CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer DATA CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer DATA Note The generated segments are upper or lower limit line segments depending on the CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg TYPE setting CALCulate Ch LIMit CONTrol DATA does not overwrite the type setting Tip To define additiona...

Page 743: ...r limit segments Default unit NN Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define a limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM CONT SHIF 1 CALC LIM CONT Shift the segment by 1 Hz The modified limit line segment ranges from 1000000001 Hz to 2000000001 Hz Usage Setting only Manual operation See Shift Lines on page 519 CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA ...

Page 744: ...sing default response values CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response values of 2 dB and 3 dB CALC LIM DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram Manual operation See Segment List on page 520 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle STATe Boolean Sets queries the state of the display circle for...

Page 745: ... circle is defined using CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DATA Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean If set to ON the line of the display circle is shown whenever the related trace is displayed in complex format Manual operation See Show Border on page 530 CALCulate Chn LIMit DELete ALL Deletes all limit line segments Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify t...

Page 746: ...ce V2 20 of the R S ZNB ZNBT FW the result is automatically recalculated when ever a relevant setting is changed i e a subsequent query will return the updated limit violation state Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM ...

Page 747: ...olete limit line segments 2k 1 2s updates even limit line segments 2 4 2s with type lower and the given response values creates lower limit line segments 2s 2 2s 4 2k with type lower and the given response values creates missing upper limit line segments 2s 1 2s 3 2k 1 with type upper and default response values CALCulate LIMit UPPer deletes obsolete limit line segments 2k 1 2s updates odd limit l...

Page 748: ...N Show the limit line segments in the active diagram Manual operation See Segment List on page 520 CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer FEED StimulusOffset ResponseOffset TraceName CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer FEED StimulusOffset ResponseOffset TraceName Generates a lower or an upper limit line using the stimulus values of a data or memory trace and specified offset values Suffix Chn Channel number used to iden...

Page 749: ...ce in vertical direction Both commands shift all limit lines they have the same func tionality See also Chapter 4 4 1 1 Rules for Limit Line Definition on page 129 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters LimShift Response offset value for all limit line segments Range Virtually no restriction for limit segments Default unit NN Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit ...

Page 750: ...Ch LIMit CONTrol DATA are 40 dB Default unit NN Example CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment segment no 1 in the stimu lus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response val ues of 2 dB and 3 dB CALC LIM SEGM AMPL STAR 5 STOP 5 CALC LIM SEGM TYPE LMIN Change the segment to a lower limit line segment with a con stant response value of 5 dB CALC LIM DATA Q...

Page 751: ...LIM SEGM STIM STAR 1GHZ STOP 2 GHZ CALC LIM SEGM TYPE LMIN Change the segment to a lower limit line segment with a stimu lus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz CALC LIM DATA Query the type the stimulus and response values of the created segment with a single command The response is 2 1000000000 2000000000 2 3 Manual operation See Segment List on page 520 CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg TYPE LimLineType...

Page 752: ...witches the acoustic signal fail beep on or off The fail beep is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF Fail beep on or off RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON SOUN ON Switch the limit check on and activate the fail beep Manual operation See Limit Fail Beep on page 517 CALCulate Chn LIMit STATe B...

Page 753: ...om Vertical position Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit FAIL Manual operation See Limit Check on page 516 CALCulate Chn LIMit TTLout Pt STATe Boolean Switches the TTL pass fail signals on or off The signals are applied to the USER PORT connector as long as the active trace Chn is within limits including the ripple limits Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Pt 1 TTL out pass 1 ...

Page 754: ...HOW 747 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER STARt 747 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER STOP 747 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute 747 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult 748 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SPAN 749 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion STARt 749 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion STOP 749 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MODE 750 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk NAME 750 C...

Page 755: ...anual operation See Mkr 1 Mkr 10 on page 533 CALCulate Chn MARKer DEFault FORMat OutFormat Defines the default marker format of the selected channel s active trace New markers will be formatted with the default marker format previously existing mark ers will be reformatted if and only if their marker format is set to Trace DEFault using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FORMat Suffix Chn Channel number used...

Page 756: ...lean Shows or hides the bandfilter search results in the diagram area Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON show the bandfilter search results If no bandfilter search has been initiated before CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECuteBFILter nothing is displayed OFF hide the bandfilter search results RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth Manu...

Page 757: ...n the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK1 ON MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to the trace no 1 CALC MARK AOFF Remove both markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Off on page 533 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth Bandwidth Sets the bandfilter level for a bandfil...

Page 758: ...ndpass 100 00 dB to 0 01 dB for band stop 0 01 dB to 100 00 dB Increment 0 03 dB RST 3 dB Default unit dB Example CALC MARK FUNC BWID MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search CALC MARK FUNC EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace Create markers M1 to M4 CALC MARK SEAR BFIL RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area CALC MARK BWID 6 Select a 6 dB bandwidth f...

Page 759: ...ple them to the markers of Trc 1 Manual operation See Coupled Markers on page 534 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk DELTa STATe Boolean Switches the delta mode for marker Mk on trace no Chn on or off The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON If the active trace contains no reference marker the command also creates a reference marker Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify t...

Page 760: ...at on page 535 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BandfilterType Selects the bandfilter search mode In contrast to manual control bandfilter tracking is not automatically activated Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use m...

Page 761: ...nge no NumSearchRange to marker no Mk and selects the search range e g in order to display range limit lines or define the start and stop val ues Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Parameters NumSearchRange Number of the search range Range 0 to 10 where 0 refers to the fixed full span search range equal to the sweep range and 1 to 10 r...

Page 762: ...StopSearchRange These commands define the start and stop values of the search range selected via CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER RANGe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Parameters StopSearchRange Beginning or end of the search range Range Maximum allowed sweep range depending on the instrument model and on the sweep type ...

Page 763: ...n on page 538 The analyzer provides the following search modes Mode Find MAXimum Absolute maximum in the search range see CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER RANGe MINimum Absolute maximum in the search range RPEak Next valid peak to the right of the current marker position LPEak Next valid peak to the left NPEak Next highest or lowest value among the valid peaks next peak TARGet Target v...

Page 764: ...to 10 Example RST CALC MARK ON MARK DELTa ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and enable the delta mode CALC MARK X 300MHz Increase the stimulus value of the delta marker by 300 MHz CALC MARK FUNC SPAN Set the sweep range equal to 300 MHz The sweep range starts at the reference marker position i e in the center of the analyz er s frequency range Usage Event Manual operation...

Page 765: ...active trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Parameters Mode CONTinuous DISCrete CONTinuous marker can be positioned on any point of the trace and its response values are obtained by interpolation DISCrete marker can be set to discrete sweep points only RST CONT Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK MODE DISC CALC MARK2 MODE CONT Create marker 1 i...

Page 766: ...reates or removes the marker RST OFF Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK REF ON CALC MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no 1 The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range Manual operation See On on page 533 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence MODE Mode Sets the reference marker to continuous...

Page 767: ...umber in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Parameters MarkerName Marker name string parameter RST R Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk NAME Manual operation See Marker Name on page 535 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence TYPE Mode Sets the marker mode of the related reference marker The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence ...

Page 768: ...at 1 GHz CALC MARK REF ON Create the reference marker and display it in the center of the sweep range CALC MARK REF X 1GHz Set the reference marker to the beginning of the sweep range CALC MARK REF Y Query the measurement value at the reference marker position Manual operation See Mkr i Stimulus Ref Mkr Stimulus on page 532 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence Y RefResponseValue Sets or gets the resp...

Page 769: ...ker tracking mode RST OFF Example Suppose the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON CALC MARK FUNC EXEC MAXimum Create marker no 1 and assign it to trace no 1 Activate a maxi mum search for marker no 1 CALC MARK SEAR TRAC ON Enable the tracking mode for the created marker Manual operation See Tracking on page 539 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch FORMat SearchFormat Selects the...

Page 770: ...ARGet search mode for marker 1 CALCulate1 MARKer1 SEARch FORMat Query the target format of marker 1 The result is DEF and for polar diagrams the default target format is Phase CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion TARGet Query for the default target value for Phase this is 0 degrees CALCulate1 MARKer1 SEARch FORMat MLOGarithmic Change the target search format to logarithmic magnitude CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNC...

Page 771: ...Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Parameters TargetSearchVal Target search value of marker no Mk The value range and reset value depend on the selected target format see CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch FORMat on page 754 Example CALC MARK ON Create marker no 1 and display it in the center of the sweep range CALC MARK TARG 10 FUNC EXEC TARG De...

Page 772: ... and trace format changes The marker stimulus can be set using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk X but the response value remains fixed ARBitrary freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value Tracking is disabled The marker stores the stimulus value and in addition its X and Y coordinates in the current marker format see CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FORMat The marker po...

Page 773: ... If the marker mode is ARBitrary and the trace for mat is complex the value range is 1 to 1 Other wise 9 9E 11 Hz to 9 9E 11 Hz for frequency sweeps 999 dBm to 999 dBm for power sweeps 0 s to 127500 s for time and CW mode sweeps Default unit NN Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 and the sweep range for a frequency sweep starts at 1 GHz CALC MARK ON Create mark...

Page 774: ...the measurement value at the marker position CALC MARK STAT AREA LEFT TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy move the info field to the top left position Manual operation See Mkr i Arb Response Ref Mkr Arb Response on page 533 7 3 2 11 CALCulate MATH The CALCulate MATH commands permit processing of measured data in numeri cal expression format The operators are and use of constants an...

Page 775: ...e memory trace assigned to the active trace Constants e pi 1 1 2 8e9 1 2j 2 1e 9j Constants Real values in decimal or exponential format Complex numbers Operators Basic arithmetic operations for exponentiation Functions linMag dBMag Arg Re Im log ln tan atan sin asin cos acos Min Max Mathematical functions with one or two arguments Special Functions StimVal Current stimulus value see description o...

Page 776: ...f the active data trace to a memory trace If a mathematical trace is active the data trace associated with the mathematical trace is copied The memory trace is named Mem n Data_Trace where n counts all data and memory traces in the active recall set in chronological order and Data_Trace is the name of the associated copied data trace The exact function of the command depends on the number of memor...

Page 777: ...te Chn MATH FUNCtion Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON display the active data trace OFF display the mathematical trace RST OFF Example RST CALC MATH MEM Copy the current state of the default trace Trc1 to a memory trace named Mem2 Trc1 The memory trace is not dis played CALC MATH SDEF Trc1 Mem2 Trc1 Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trac...

Page 778: ...ensionless quantity The y axis range of the mathematical trace now exactly corre sponds to the power sweep range Manual operation See Expression builder on page 490 7 3 2 12 CALCulate PARameter The CALCulate PARameter commands assign names and measurement parameters to traces The commands are device specific CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL 763 CALCulate PARameter DELete MEMory 764 CALCulate Ch PARa...

Page 779: ... creation time The oldest trace is the first the newest trace is the last trace in the list Suffix Ch Channel number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 CALC4 PAR CAT Query the traces assigned to channel 4 If Ch4Tr1 is the only trace assigned to channel 4 the respon...

Page 780: ...th n logical port numbers the com mand generates n2 traces The traces correspond to the follow ing S parameters S log_port1 log_port1 S log_port1 log_port2 S log_port1 log_port n S log_port n log_port1 S log_port n log_port2 S log_port n log_port n e g S11 S12 S21 S22 for log_port1 1 log_port2 2 If only one logical port log_port1 is specified a single trace with the reflection coefficient S log_po...

Page 781: ...n page 437 CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete TraceName Deletes a trace with a specified trace name and channel Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters TraceName Trace name e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in Chap ter 5 12 1 3 Trace Manager Dialog on page 483 Example CALCulate4 PARameter SDEFine Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 C...

Page 782: ...ALCulate Ch PARameter DEFine SGRoup Usage Event CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure TraceName Result Assigns a measurement result to an existing trace The query returns the result assigned to the specified trace no second parameter see example Note To create a new trace and at the same time assign the attributes use CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine To display the trace create a diagram DISPlay WINDow Wnd...

Page 783: ... parameter of the trace and measure the wave quantity a1 CALC4 PAR MEAS Ch4Tr1 Query the measured quantity The response is A1D1SAM Manual operation See S Parameter on page 437 CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure SENDed TraceName Result Assigns a measurement result to an existing trace The query returns the result assigned to the specified trace no second parameter see example Similar to CALCulate Ch PA...

Page 784: ...ll channels and diagrams If a trace with the selected trace name already exists the ana lyzer behaves as follows If the existing trace is assigned to the same channel as the new trace it is deleted The new trace is not automatically assigned to a diagram area see note above If the existing trace is assigned to a different channel no new trace can be created The analyzer returns an error message Re...

Page 785: ... Mag Phase AMP detector A1G2 A01G02 B1G2 B01G02 A1G1SAM A1G1AVG A1G1AMP Wave quantities with an external generator providing the stimulus signal G no for generator no The strings SAM AVG AMP appended to the wave quantities denote a normal sample SAM AVG Real Imag AVG or AVG Mag Phase AMP detector B2 A1 B02 A01 B2 A1SAM B2 A1AVG B2 A1AMP Ratio of wave quantities with port numbers like for normal mo...

Page 786: ...T output intermodulation suppres sion IP3UI IP3UO IP3LI IP3LO IP3MI IP3MO IP5UI IP9MO Intercept point IP order side at DUT where order 3 5 7 9 side U L M for upper or lower or major at DUT I O for input or output NLO Noise level at DUT output UTI UTO LTI LTO Upper or lower tone at DUT input or output Selecting a parameter Y n m or Z n m sets the range of port numbers to be considered for the Y and...

Page 787: ...te another trace named Ch4Tr2 to measure the output reflection coefficient S22 Again this new trace becomes the active trace in channel 4 CALC4 PAR SEL Ch4Tr1 Select the first trace Ch4Tr1 as the active trace CALC4 FORM MLIN Calculate the magnitude of S11 and display it in a linearly scaled Cartesian diagram 7 3 2 13 CALCulate PHOLd The CALCulate PHOLd commands control the max hold peak hold funct...

Page 788: ...GMent Seg STIMulus STOP 780 CALCulate Chn RIPPle SOUNd STATe 780 CALCulate Chn RIPPle STATe 781 CALCulate Chn RIPPle STATe AREA 781 CALCulate RIPPle DISPlay RESult ALL STATe Enable Configures the display of ripple check info fields for the active recall set Parameters Enable ON Info fields are displayed for all traces for which a limit check is enabled OFF Only the info field for the active trace ...

Page 789: ...ple limit check is possible RST FLIN Default unit Hz for FLIN FLOG FSEG and FSINgle s for TLIN and TLOG dBm for PLIN PLOG and PSIN gle Example SWE TYPE POW Select a power sweep CALC RIPP CONT DOM PLIN Delete all existing ripple limit ranges and select level units for the ripple limit of the active trace CALC RIPP DATA 1 10 5 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 10...

Page 790: ...djusted to the sweep type RippleLimit ripple limit in the range The unit is adjusted to the format of the active trace CALCulate Chn FORMat Range Virtually no restriction for ripple limit ranges RST n a no ripple limit line defined after a reset Default unit Stimulus values Hz for frequency sweeps dBm for power sweeps s for time and CW mode sweeps Ripple limit see above Example RST CALC RIPP DATA ...

Page 791: ...des all ripple limit lines including all ranges associated to the active trace Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF ripple limit line on or off RST OFF Example RST CALC RIPP DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB CALC RIPP DISP ON Show the...

Page 792: ...ONTrol DOMain Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters UnitRef COMPlex MAGNitude PHASe REAL IMAGinary SWR GDELay L C Keyword for the physical unit of the response values dimension less numerss relative power phase time inductance capaci tance units RST n a Default unit 1 U for COMPlex REAL IMAGinary and SWR dB for MAGNitude deg for PHASe s for GDE Lay H Henry ...

Page 793: ...ber used to identify the active trace Seg Number of the ripple limit range Parameters Boolean ON OFF Limit check on or off A result is available even if the limit check is disabled see example for CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg RESult RST n a no ripple limit line defined after a reset Example See CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STIMulus STARt Manual operation See Range List on page 525 CALCulat...

Page 794: ...k result is calculated once at the end of each sweep If the ripple limits are changed a new sweep is required to obtain upda ted ripple limit check results In single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF the new sweep must be started explicitly This behavior is different from manual control where a changed ripple limit line can directly affect the pass fail result of the displayed trace Suffix Chn...

Page 795: ...ST n a no ripple limit line defined after a reset Default unit Hz for frequency sweeps dBm for power sweeps s for time and CW mode sweeps Example RST CALC RIPP DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB CALC RIPP SEGM STIM STAR 1GHZ STOP 2 5 GHZ CALC RIPP SEGM LIM 5 Change the range to a sti...

Page 796: ... ripple test info field for the active trace Chn to one of nine predefined positions in the active diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters HorizontalPos LEFT MID RIGHt Horizontal position VerticalPos TOP MID BOTTom Vertical position Example See CALCulate Chn RIPPle FAIL Manual operation See Ripple Check on page 523 7 3 2 15 CALCulate SMOothing The CALCulate S...

Page 797: ...LC SMO APER 0 5 Reduce the smoothing aperture to 0 5 Manual operation See Aperture on page 506 7 3 2 16 CALCulate STATistics The CALCulate STATistics commands evaluate and display statistical and phase information of the trace CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe 783 CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe AREA 783 CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER 784 CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER SHOW 784 CALCulate C...

Page 798: ... CALC STAT RMS ON Display the RMS results in addition CALC STAT EPD ON Display the Phase El Length results in addition CALC STAT SFL ON Display the Flatness Gain Slope results in addition CALC STAT STAT AREA LEFT TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy move the info field to the top left position CALC STAT OFF Hide all results Manual operation See Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std Dev RMS on ...

Page 799: ... STAT DOM USER STARt 1GHZ STOP 2GHZ SHOW ON Select evaluation range no 1 and define the evaluation range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz Display the range limit lines Manual operation See Evaluation Range on page 505 CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER SHOW Boolean Displays or hides range limit lines for the evaluation range selected via CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER Suffix Chn Channel number used...

Page 800: ...field on or off RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe Manual operation See Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std Dev RMS on page 501 CALCulate Chn STATistics FORMat Format For complex valued traces Smith Polar this determines how the MEAN STDDev MAX MIN RMS and PTPeak statistics are calculated see CALCulate Chn STATistics RESult Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Paramet...

Page 801: ...Bm Cmp Out sum of Cmp In plus the magnitude of the measured response value at the compression point in dBm Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST SWE TYPE POW Select a power sweep with default CW frequency and sweep range CALC STAT NLIN COMP LEV 2 Define a compression value of 2 dB CALC STAT NLIN COMP RES Query the compression point results Cmp In Cmp Out An execut...

Page 802: ...ontrol STDDev return standard deviation of all response values MAX return the maximum of all response values MIN return the minimum of all response values RMS return the root mean square of all response values PTPeak return the peak to peak value MAX MIN ELENgth return the electrical length PDELay return the phase delay GAIN return the gain i e the larger of two marker values SLOPe return the slop...

Page 803: ...FF Example See CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe Manual operation See Flatness Gain Slope on page 503 7 3 2 17 CALCulate TRANsform The CALCulate TRANsform commands convert measured data from one repre sentation to another and control the transformation into the time domain with option R S ZNB ZNBT K2 CALCulate Chn TRANsform COMPlex 789 CALCulate Chn TRANsform IMPedance RNORmal 789 CALCulate Chn TRANs...

Page 804: ...99 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 j i j i Z Z Z S Z Z S Y ij j i ij j i ij ij Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Result S Y Z S parameters Y parameters Z parameters Example RST CALC PAR MEAS Trc1 Y S22 Select the converted admittance Y S22 as measurement parameter of the default trace CALC TRAN COMP S Convert the converted Y parameter into an S parameter CALCulate Chn TRANsform ...

Page 805: ...nt activating a frequency sweep and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace CALC TRAN TIME LPAS TIME STIM STEP Select a low pass step transformation CALC TRAN TIME LPAS KFST Calculate a harmonic grid keeping the stop frequency and the number of points Manual operation See Type on page 495 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME CENTer CenterTime Defines the center time of the diagram in t...

Page 806: ...20 dB Increment 10 dB RST 32 dB Default unit dB Example RST CALC TRAN TIME WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph Chebyshev window for filtering the data in the frequency domain CALC TRAN TIME DCH 25 Set the sideband suppression to 25 dB Manual operation See Side Lobe Level on page 495 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs Algorithm Calculates the harmonic grid for low pass time domain tran...

Page 807: ...te a harmonic grid maintaining the stop frequency and the number of points CALC TRAN TIME LPAS DCSP 0 2 Set the DC value CALC TRAN TIME LPAS DCSP EXTR CALC TRAN TIME LPAS DCSP Extrapolate the measured trace overwrite the defined DC value and query the new value CALC TRAN TIME LPAS DCSP CONT ON Switch over to continuous extrapolation e g because you noticed a discrepancy between the manually entere...

Page 808: ...alculates the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms keeping the stop frequency and the number of points Tip Use CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs if you wish to use one of the other algorithms for calculating the grid Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example See CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE Usage Event Manual operation See DC Value on page 497 CALCulate...

Page 809: ...domain Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters StartTime Start time of the diagram Range 100 s to 99 999999999998 s Increment 0 1 ns RST 1E 009 s Default unit s Example RST CALC TRAN TIME STAT ON Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace CALC TRAN TIME STAR 0 STOP 10 ns Set the start time to 0 ns...

Page 810: ...e Selects the type of stimulus to be simulated in the low pass transformation process Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Type IMPulse STEP IMPulse impulse response in bandpass or lowpass mode STEP step response only in lowpass mode a bandpass mode setting CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE BPASs is automatically changed to lowpass RST IMP Example See CALCulate Ch...

Page 811: ...active trace Parameters WindowType RECT HAMMing HANNing BOHMan DCHebyshev RECT no profiling rectangle HANN normal profile Hann HAMMing low first sidelobe Hamming BOHMan steep falloff Bohman DCHebyshev arbitrary sidelobes Dolph Chebychev RST HANN Example See CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME DCHebyshev Manual operation See Impulse Response on page 495 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME XAXis Unit Switches ove...

Page 812: ...ans of predefined character data parameters They are different for single ended and balanced port de embedding Table 7 5 Circuit models for balanced port and port pair de embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import generic 4 port s4p no circuit model STSL Serial Touchstone s2p data shunt L STSC Serial Touchstone s2p data shunt C SLST Shunt L serial Touchstone s2p data SCST Shun...

Page 813: ...eter Circuit model Pictogram CSSC Serial Cs shunt C LSSL Serial Ls shunt L SLCS Shunt L serial Cs SCLS Shunt C serial Ls SCCS Shunt C serial Cs SLLS Shunt L serial Ls STSG Serial Touchstone s2p data shunt C SGST Shunt C serial Touchstone s2p data SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 814: ...t L LSSG Serial Ls shunt C GSSG Serial Cs shunt C SLGS Shunt L serial Cs SGLS Shunt C serial Ls SGGS Shunt C serial Cs Table 7 6 Circuit models for single ended port embedding deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import generic 2 port no circuit model CSL Serial C shunt L SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 815: ...ual 1173 9163 02 38 Parameter Circuit model Pictogram LSC Serial L shunt C CSC Serial C shunt C LSL Serial L shunt L SLC Shunt L serial C SCL Shunt C serial L SCC Shunt C serial C SLL Shunt L serial L SHLC Shunt L shunt C SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 816: ...ZNB ZNBT 801 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 Parameter Circuit model Pictogram GSL Serial C shunt L LSG Serial L shunt C GSG Serial C shunt C SGL Shunt C serial L SLG Shunt L serial C SGG Shunt C serial C SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 817: ...hunt C Table 7 8 Circuit models for differential match embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import generic 2 port no circuit model SHLC Shunt L shunt C CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt STATe 805 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp 805 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters DATA P...

Page 818: ... LogPt PARameters G Cmp 815 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp 816 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp 816 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition 817 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding STATe 817 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters C 81...

Page 819: ... VNETworks PSET DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 833 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET EMBedding ListId DEFine 833 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt STATe 834 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp 834 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters DATA 835 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARam...

Page 820: ... R3 for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable deembedding Manual operation See Active on page 409 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Capacitance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the capacitance value C Cmp in the different circuit models for balanced port dee...

Page 821: ...LST SCST require S Parameter traces of two 2 port networks to be assigned to the different ports PMAin and PSECondary the FIMPort model requires S Parameter traces of a single 4 port network but no addi tional port assignment Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALa...

Page 822: ... Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 nS 1E 9 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit symbol S Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Possible circuit models character data see Table 7 5 Manual operation See Network on page 424 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Inducta...

Page 823: ...late Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CiruitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CiruitModel Specifies the resistance value R Cmp in the different circuit models for balanced port deembedding In the query form the Resistance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified...

Page 824: ...ogPt TNDefinition CircuitModel Selects the circuit model for balanced port deembedding Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort STSL STSC SLST SCST CSSL LSSC CSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SCCS SLLS STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Possible circuit models character data see Table 7 5 RST CSSL Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced ...

Page 825: ...acitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Number of capacitance in circuit model The total number of capacitances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Capacitance Capacitance C Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 1mF to 1 mF Increment 1 fF 1E 15 ...

Page 826: ...ffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number Port Port assignment for two 2 port networks 1 Port 1 2 Port 2 This parameter is ignored for 4 port networks Setting parameters Interchange FPORts IPORts FPORts the port numbers are not interchanged IPORts Interchange port numbers of loaded trace data This parameter is ignored for 4 port networks arg1 block_data Content of a Touchstone file s2p or s...

Page 827: ...ALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the inductance values L1 L2 L3 in the different circuit models for balanced port embedding In the query form the Inductance parameter must be omitted The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Number of i...

Page 828: ...model Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Number of resistance in circuit model The total number of resis tances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Resistance Resistance R Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 10 MΩ to 10 MΩ Increment 1 mΩ 1E 3 Ω RST 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance 10 MΩ for all resistances connected...

Page 829: ...operation See Network on page 424 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt STATe Boolean Enables or disables differential match embedding for balanced port LogPt Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Parameters Boolean ON OFF embedding active or inactive RST OFF Manual operation See Active on page 411 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMB...

Page 830: ...ial EMBedding LogPt TNDefinitionFIMPort to select the file import model before executing this command Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number Setting parameters Interchange FPORts IPORts FPORts default the port numbers are not interchanged IPORts interchange port numbers of loaded s2p file arg1 block_data Content of a two port Touchstone file s2p in IEEE488 2 Block Data Format Usage Set...

Page 831: ... the Inductance parameter must be omitted Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Must be omitted or set to 1 Parameters CircuitModel SHLC Currently only the Shunt L Shunt C lumped element model is supported Inductance Range 1 H to 1 H Increment 1 pH 1E 12 H RST 1 nH 1E 9 H Default unit H Manual operation See Network on page 428 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFere...

Page 832: ...ircuit models character data see Circuit models for differential match embedding Manual operation See Network on page 428 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding STATe Boolean Enables or disables the deembedding function for ground loops It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while deembedding is enabled Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Boolean ON Deembedding ac...

Page 833: ... DEEM PAR C SC Query the default capacitance for ground loop deembedding The response is 1E 012 1 pF CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM PAR C SC 2 2E 12 Increase the capacitance to 2 2 pF Manual operation See Network on page 426 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters G CircuitModel Conductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters G CircuitModel Specifies the co...

Page 834: ... CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM PAR L SL Query the default inductance for ground loop deembedding The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM PAR L SL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 426 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters R CircuitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters R CircuitModel S...

Page 835: ...SC SG Possible circuit models character data see Circuit models for ground loop port embedding deembedding Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding STATe on page 817 Manual operation See Network on page 426 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding STATe Boolean Enables or disables the embedding function for ground loops It is allowed to change the circuit model and it...

Page 836: ... EMB PAR C SC Query the default capacitance for ground loop embedding The response is 1E 012 1 pF CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB PAR C SC 2 2E 12 Increase the capacitance to 2 2 pF Manual operation See Network on page 426 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters G CircuitModel Conductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters G CircuitModel Specifies the conductanc...

Page 837: ... CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB PAR L SL Query the default inductance for ground loop embedding The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB PAR L SL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 426 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters R CircuitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters R CircuitModel Specifies...

Page 838: ...arameters CircuitModel FIMPort SL SC SG Possible circuit models character data see Circuit models for ground loop port embedding deembedding RST FIMPort Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding STATe on page 820 Manual operation See Network on page 426 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks FSIMulator STATe Enable De activates the Fixture Simulator switch that allows to disable and r...

Page 839: ...t the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model for the first port pair CALC TRAN VNET PPA DEEM1 PAR R3 CSSL 2 2E 3 CALC TRAN VNET PPA DEEM1 ON Increase the resistance R3 for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable deembedding CALC TRAN VNET PPA DEEM DEL Delete the port pair configuration Manual operation See Active on page 408 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFin...

Page 840: ...ding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 1 2 3 Index i of the capacitance C i in the related lumped circuit model If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Par...

Page 841: ...is set to 1 Parameters Conductance Conductance G i for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 nS 1E 9 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit symbol S Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Circuit model whose conductance G i shall be set see Table 7 5 Manual operation See Network on page 422 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DE...

Page 842: ...nce value R i in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding In the query form the Resistance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 1 2 3 Index i of the resistance R i in the related...

Page 843: ...SSC CSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SCCS SLLS STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Circuit model to be used for the addressed port pair see Table 7 5 Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId STATe Manual operation See Network on page 422 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId STATe Boolean Enables or disables the embedding function for port set ListId It is all...

Page 844: ...xtend or partially overwrite the list See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET EMBedding ListId DEFine for general port set definition Suffix Ch Channel number ListId List index denotes the current number of the port pair within the list of port sets for embedding If several port pairs are defined ListId is the number of the first port pair Parameters PP_First PP_Second PP_First Sequence of port ...

Page 845: ...elated lumped circuit model If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters Capacitance Capacitance Ci Range 1 mF to 1 mF Increment 1 fF 1E 15 F RST 1 pF 1E 12 F Default unit F Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSC SCST CSSL LSSC CSSC SLCS SCLS SCCS STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Circuit model whose capacitance C i shall be set see Table 7 5 Example See CALCulate Ch ...

Page 846: ...mple See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId STATe Manual operation See Network on page 422 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId PARameters R 1 2 3 arg0 Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId PARameters R 1 2 3 arg0 Specifies the resistance value R i in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding In the query form t...

Page 847: ...ductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId PARameters G 1 2 3 arg0 Specifies the conductance value G i in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding In the query form the Conductance parameter must be omitted The command returns the conductance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate ...

Page 848: ...istId DEFine Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET EMBedding ListId DEFine Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Defines port set ListId for port set deembedding embedding Note that port pairs i e 2 element port sets can also be created using CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DEFine Use CALCulate Ch TR...

Page 849: ...ircuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable deembedding Manual operation See Active on page 407 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Capacitance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the capacitance value C Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding In the query form the Ca...

Page 850: ...ed DEEMbedding PhyPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com mand MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt to load cir cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R S ZNB ZNBT s file system Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Setting parameters Interchange FPORts IPORts FPORts the port numbers are not interchanged IPORts Interchange...

Page 851: ...y the default component values for the shunt L shunt C circuit model CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM PAR G SHLC 1 Increase the conductance G to 1 Siemens Manual operation See Network on page 420 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Inductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the inductance ...

Page 852: ...te Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters R Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the resistance value R Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port deembedding In the query form the Resistance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of resistance in circ...

Page 853: ...rcuit models character data see Table 7 6 RST CSL Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt STATe Manual operation See Network on page 420 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt STATe Boolean Enables or disables the embedding function for single ended ports It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while embedding is enabled Suffix Ch...

Page 854: ...F 1E 15 F RST 1 pF 1E 12 F Default unit F Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel CSL LSC CSC SLC SCL SCC SHLC GSL LSG GSG SLG SGL SGG Possible circuit models character data see Table 7 6 Example RST CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB PAR C2 CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C shunt C cir cuit model The response is 1E 012 1 pF CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB PAR C2 CSC 2 2E 12 Increase the ca...

Page 855: ...ET SEND EMB PAR G SHLC 1 Increase the conductance G to 1 Siemens Manual operation See Network on page 420 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Inductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the inductance value L Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding In the que...

Page 856: ...istance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of resistance in circuit model The total number of resis tances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Resistance Resistance R Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 10 MΩ to 10 MΩ Increment 1 mΩ 1E 3 Ω RST 0 Ω for al...

Page 857: ...works SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters DATA Interchange arg1 Defines a dembedding network for a single ended port based on the given S Parame ter traces Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com mand MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed EMBedding PhyPt to load circuit data from a Touchstone file located at t...

Page 858: ...rise distance start threshold crossing time start threshold crossing voltage stop threshold crossing time stop threshold crossing voltage Stimulus axis distance rise distance rise distance rise time start threshold crossing dis tance start threshold crossing voltage stop threshold crossing distance stop threshold crossing voltage CALCulate Chn TTIMe STATe Boolean Enables disables the Rise Time Mea...

Page 859: ...threshold as integer percentage Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Start Value Stop Value on page 598 7 3 3 CONFigure Commands The CONFigure commands create and delete channels or traces and assign channel and trace names The commands are device specific CONFigure CHANnel CATalog 845 CONFigure CHANnel MEASure ALL STATe 845 CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe 845 CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STAT...

Page 860: ...TATe Boolean Enables or disables the sweep in all channels of the active recall set This command can be used in combination with CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe to optimize the measurement speed Parameters Boolean ON OFF RST ON Example See CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe Manual operation See Continuous Single on page 254 CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe Boolean Creates or deletes channel no Ch and...

Page 861: ...ON CHANnel3 ON Create channels 2 and 3 in addition to the default channel no 1 The analyzer performs sweeps in all three channels CONFigure CHANnel MEASure ALL OFF Disable the measurement in all channels CONFigure CHANnel2 MEASure ON Re enable the measurement in channel no 2 The analyzer measures in channel 2 the channels no 1 and 3 are not mea sured Manual operation See Continuous Single on page ...

Page 862: ...h Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters TraceName Trace name e g Trace 4 Example RST CONF CHAN TRAC REN Testtrace_1 Reset the analyzer to create a default trace in channel 1 and set this trace as the active trace Rename the trace Testtrace_1 CALC PAR SDEF Testtrace_2 S11 Create a new trace which will become the active trace in chan nel no 1 CONF TRAC REN Testtrace_1 Testtrace_3 Rename the fi...

Page 863: ...Ch2Trc2 CONF CHAN1 TRAC CAT Query the channels in channel no 1 The response is 1 Trc1 CONF TRAC NAME ID Ch2Trc2 Query the trace number for the trace named Ch2Trc2 The response is 2 CONF TRAC2 NAME Query the trace name for trace no 2 The response is Ch2Trc2 CONF TRAC CHAN NAME Ch2Trc2 Query the channel name for trace Ch2Trc2 The response is Ch2 CONF TRAC CHAN NAME ID Ch2Trc2 Query the channel numbe...

Page 864: ...or Trc2 The new trace is currently not displayed so the response is 0 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create a new diagram no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC3 FEED Trc2 Display the trace in the new diagram no 2 assigning the trace number 3 CONF TRAC WIND Trc2 Query the diagram number for Trc2 The the response is 2 CONF TRAC WIND TRAC Trc2 Query the trace number for Trc2 The the response is 3 Usage Query only Manual operatio...

Page 865: ... TRACe CATalog returns a list of all traces in the active recall set with their names Suffix Trc Number of an existing trace Parameters TraceName Trace name e g Ch2Trc2 RST Trc1 Example See CONFigure TRACe CATalog CONFigure TRACe Trc NAME ID TraceName Queries the trace number numeric suffix of a trace with known trace name CONFigure TRACe CATalog returns a list of all traces in the active recall s...

Page 866: ... 854 CONTrol HANDler B DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler C DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler D DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler E DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler F DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler G DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler H DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler A MODE 855 CONTrol HANDler B MODE 855 CONTrol HANDler C MODE 855 CONTrol HANDler D MODE 855 CONTrol GPIO Port SENSe VOLTage 856 CONTrol GPIO Port SENSe CURRent 856 CONTrol GPIO SENSe SUMCurr...

Page 867: ...EST CLOCk 868 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO 868 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA RANGe 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk RANGe 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO RANGe 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk SHUNt 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA SHUNt 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO SHUNt 869 CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST DATA VOLTage 870 CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk VOLTage 870 CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST VIO VOLTage ...

Page 868: ...eep in a channel with non zero channel bits is started They are changed whenever a channel with differ ent channel bits becomes the measuring channel The signals at the USER PORT connector are maintained after the analyzer enters the hold state This happens if all channels use single sweep mode and if all sweep sequences have been terminated Pins 16 to 19 may be reserved for monitoring the drive p...

Page 869: ...rol HANDler A DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler B DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler C DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler D DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler E DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler F DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler G DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler H DATA DecValue The setting commands write data to ports A B C D E F G H To write data to a port the port must be configured as an output port see example By defaul...

Page 870: ...le CONT HAND A MODE OUTP Configure port A as an output port CONT HAND A 192 Write data to port A CONT HAND B MODE INP Configure port B as an input port CONT HAND B Read data from port B CONTrol HANDler A MODE Mode CONTrol HANDler B MODE Mode CONTrol HANDler C MODE Mode CONTrol HANDler D MODE Mode Controls the direction of the data flow at ports A B C D The direction at the com bined ports E F G H ...

Page 871: ...ment on the related GPIO pin or ALL GPIO pins Suffix Port GPIO port 1 10 If ALL voltages are queried this suffix is ignored and can be omitted Return values Measured Measured currents either a single value or a comma separated list Default unit A Usage Query only Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Voltage Current on page 357 CONTrol GPIO SENSe SUMCurrent GpioPorts Returns the sum o...

Page 872: ...urement time for the voltage current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins Same functionality as CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST TIME Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is ignored and can be omitted the measurement time is valid for all channels Parameters MeasTime Measurement sampling averaging time Range 95 μs to 100 ms RST 100 ms Default unit s Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Meas on...

Page 873: ...asurement on the respective GPIO pin The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance which can be queried using CONTrol Ch GPIO Port SHUNt Suffix Ch Channel number Port GPIO port number 1 10 Parameters CurrentRange Range 2 10n μA n 1 5 for ports 1 to 8 100 mA fixed for ports 9 and 10 Default unit A Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Range Shunt on page 357 C...

Page 874: ...ge Sets the output voltage of the respective GPIO port This voltage is applied using CONTrol Ch GPIO VOLTage OUTPut Suffix Ch Channel number Port GPIO port number Parameters Voltage Range 7 to 15 V Increment 5 mV Default unit V Manual operation See Voltage Output Voltage on page 356 CONTrol HANDler EXTension INDex STATe Boolean Selects the digital signal that is routed to pin 20 of the Universal I...

Page 875: ...Example See CONTrol HANDler EXTension INDex STATe CONTrol HANDler INPut Queries whether a high to low transition occurred at the INPUT 1 line pin 2 of the Universal Interface since the last CONTrol HANDler INPut query The query resets the counter to zero A negative pulse fed to this line also causes the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 lines pins 3 and 4 to change to low Return values NumberOfTrans 0 if no t...

Page 876: ...in 4 The parameters MIN MAX DEF are not supported Note RST or Preset do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface Use CONTrol HANDler RESet to restore default values Parameters BinValue 0 high 1 low RST n a default 0 Example See CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt DATA CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt DATA BinValue Writes a 0 or 1 to the output ports pin 3 or 4 of the Universal Interface connector Th...

Page 877: ... POSitive NEGative POSitive high meas PASS low means FAIL NEGative low meas PASS high means FAIL Note RST or Preset do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface Use CONTrol HANDler RESet to restore default values RST n a default POSitive Example See CONTrol HANDler PASSfail MODE CONTrol HANDler PASSfail MODE Mode Specifies the default logical pass fail state and the timing of the PAS...

Page 878: ...e default state of the PASS FAIL line to PASS CONTrol HANDler PASSFail SCOPe GLOBal Set the PASS FAIL line when all sweeps in all channels are complete CONTrol HANDler PASSFail LOGic POSitive Set the PASS FAIL line to positive logic CONTrol HANDler PASSFail POLicy ALLTests Return pass only if all tests pass CONTrol HANDler PASSfail POLicy Policy Specifies how the global pass fail status CONTrol HA...

Page 879: ...ss fail status of the last measurement Return values Status PASS FAIL NONE PASS all measurements that are not in single sweep mode on hold have been swept and all limit checks have been passed FAIL all measurements that are not in single sweep mode on hold have been swept at least one limit check failed according to the specified pass fail policy CONTrol HANDler PASSfail POLicy NONE no pass fail s...

Page 880: ...e CONTrol HANDler PASSfail MODE CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST OUTPut Applies the current output voltage and current range shunt settings to the RFFE GPIO pins Same function as CONTrol Ch GPIO VOLTage OUTPut Suffix Ch Channel number Usage Event Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Set on page 354 CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST TIME MeasTime Sets the measurement time for the voltage current measurements ...

Page 881: ...bus interface number Parameters Command 3 5 35 or 37 hexadecimal digits 0 F defining the com mand to be executed digit 1 is the slave address digits 2 and 3 specify the command number and the remaining digits represent the data part with up to 17 bytes 0 2 32 or 34 hex digits Manual operation See RFFE Command on page 352 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus COMMand SEND CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus COMMand SEND BytesToRead...

Page 882: ...us COMMand DATA Suffix Ch Channel number Bus RFFE bus interface number Parameters EnableInSequence Enabled state Manual operation See Seq on page 352 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings FREQuency ClockFrequency Sets gets the clock frequency for for channel Ch and RFFE bus interface Bus Suffix Ch Channel number Bus 1 or 2 RFFE bus number Parameters ClockFrequency Clock rate Possible values are 52 1664 MHz...

Page 883: ...ts on the RFFE pins Note The voltages for DATA and CLOCk are always identical their values cannot be set independently The output voltages are applied using CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST OUTPut the volt age current measurements are started using CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST SENSe TRIGger Suffix Ch Channel number Bus RFFE bus interface 1 or 2 Parameters OutputVoltage Range 0 V to 2 5 V Increment 1 mV RST 0 V Defaul...

Page 884: ...s R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Range Shunt on page 354 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk SHUNt CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA SHUNt CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO SHUNt Returns the shunt resistance in Ω selected by the analyzer firmware for the config ured current range see CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO RANGe The dependency between current range and shunt resistance is displayed in the tabl...

Page 885: ...E Bus TEST DATA CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST VIO CURRent Returns the results of the current measurement on the related RFFE pin Suffix Bus RFFE bus Return values Measured Measured current Usage Query only Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Voltage Current on page 355 CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence COUNt For segmented sweeps this command queries ...

Page 886: ...witch sequences are defined using CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr RFFE Bus COMMand DATA and CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr GPIO Port VOLTage Suffix Ch Channel number Nr Segment number Nr Sequence number defining the order in which the commands shall be executed For every channel segment and RFFE interface the sequence numbers must be consecutive starting at 1 reusing a sequence number overwri...

Page 887: ...RFFE command s to be executed at the start of each segment Command execution on an RFFE interface can be enabled disabled using CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings STATe Complementary GPIO switches can be defined using CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr GPIO Port VOLTage Suffix Ch Channel number Nr Segment number Nr Sequence number defining the order in which the commands switches shall be executed For ev...

Page 888: ...s COMMand DATA Suffix Ch Channel number Usage Query only Manual operation See Range on page 358 CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr DELay Delay For unsegmented sweeps this command allows to introduce delays between subse quent sequence steps and between the final sequence step and the sweep segment start The command switch sequences are defined using CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr RFFE Bus COMMand DATA and CONTrol Ch ...

Page 889: ...ol Ch SEQuence Nr DELay Port GPIO port number Parameters Voltage Range 6 to 12 V Increment 0 005 V Default unit V Manual operation See GPIO columns sweep sequencer table on page 359 CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr RFFE Bus COMMand DATA Command For unsegmented sweeps this command allows to define the RFFE command s to be executed at the start of each sweep Command execution on an RFFE interface can be enabl...

Page 890: ...ostic DEVice STATe 875 DIAGnostic DUMP SIZE 875 DIAGnostic PRODuct OPTion INFO 876 DIAGnostic SERVice RFPower 876 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction 876 DIAGnostic DEVice STATe Filename Generates a system report and writes it to the specified file See Chapter 9 3 Obtain ing Technical Support on page 1248 Setting parameters Filename String parameter containing the file name If no path is specified the fi...

Page 891: ...DESC On a R S ZNB this returns Time Domain Analysis if installed Usage Query only Manual operation See Software Option Info on page 615 DIAGnostic SERVice RFPower Boolean Turns the internal source power at all ports and the power of all external generators on or off This command is equivalent to OUTPut Ch STATe Parameters Boolean ON OFF switch the power on or off RST ON Example DIAG SERV RFP OFF T...

Page 892: ...ix Wnd and the trace name is not needed Units for DISPlay commands The DISPlay subsystem contains commands to define particular points in the dia gram e g to set the scale or a reference value This requires the entry of a numeric value and a physical unit depending on the parameter type displayed The following table lists the physical units accepted by the analyzer Power DBM DB DBW W MW UW NW PW V...

Page 893: ...NDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM BOTTom 891 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM TOP 891 DISPlay ANNotation CHANnel STATe 892 DISPlay ANNotation TRACe STATe 892 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe 892 DISPlay CMAP LIMit FCOLorize STATe 892 DISPlay CMAP LIMit FSYMbol STATe 893 DISPlay CMAP LIMit STATe 893 DISPlay CMAP MARKer STATe 893 DISPlay CMAP DispEl RGB 894 DISPlay CMAP TRACe COLor STATe 896 DISPlay CM...

Page 894: ...is suffix is ignored the command returns a list of all diagrams Example RST DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram no 2 DISP WIND2 NAME S11 Test Diagram Assign a name to the new diagram DISP CAT Query all diagrams and their names As a default diagram no 1 is created upon RST the response is 1 1 2 S11 Test Diagram The first diagram is not named its default name is equal to the diagram number CALC PAR SD...

Page 895: ...oggle on page 562 DISPlay WINDow Wnd OVERview STATe Boolean Enables the zoom function with an additional overview window for the diagram no Wnd or removes the overview window from a diagram Suffix Wnd Number of the zoomed diagram area Parameters Boolean ON activate the zoom window with overview window OFF remove the overview window RST OFF Example See DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STATe Manu...

Page 896: ...d but should be kept short enough to be displayed in the diagrams Example RST DISP WIND TITL DATA S21 Test Diagram Define a title for the default diagram area The title is displayed below the top of the diagram area DISP WIND TITL OFF TITL DATA Hide the title The title is no longer displayed but still defined so it can be displayed again Manual operation See Title on page 562 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TR...

Page 897: ...trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 DELete Release the assignment between trace no 9 and window no 2 The trace can still be referenced with its trace name Ch4Tr1 Usage Event DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr EFEed TraceName Assigns an existing trace CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine TraceName to a diagram area Wnd and displays the trace Use DISPlay WINDow Wnd T...

Page 898: ... WIND2 TRAC8 FEED CH4TR1 after executing the program example below an error message 114 Header suffix out of range is generated You can open the Trace Manager dialog to obtain an over view of all channels and traces including the traces that are not displayed Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON WndTr Trace number used to distinguish the tra...

Page 899: ...Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON DISP WIND2 TRAC FEED CH4TR1 Create diagram area no 2 and display the generated trace in the diagram area DISP TRAC SHOW DALL OFF Hide both traces in both diagrams DISP TRAC SHOW DALL Query whether all data traces are displayed The response 0 means that at least one trace is hidden M...

Page 900: ...WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used Setting parameters Activate ONCE Activate the autoscale function TraceName Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present both numeric suffixes are ignored trace names must be unique across different cha...

Page 901: ...ame Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present both numeric suffixes are ignored trace names must be unique across different channels and win dows Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display...

Page 902: ...nnel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y PDIV 5 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV 5 CH4TR1 Set the value per division to 5 dB Manual operation See Scale Div on page 477 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe...

Page 903: ...2 TRAC9 Y RLEV 10 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y RLEV 10 CH4TR1 Change the reference level to 10 dB Manual operation See Ref Value on page 477 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe RPOSition RefPosition TraceName Sets the point on the y axis to be used as the reference position as a percentage of the length of the y axis The reference position is the point on the y axis which should equal the RLEVel Suffix...

Page 904: ... See Ref Pos on page 478 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y OFFSet MagnitudeFactor PhaseFactor RealPart ImaginaryPart Modifies all points of the trace WndTr by means of an added and or a multiplied complex constant The response values M of the trace are transformed according to Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON WndTr Existing trace number a...

Page 905: ... is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used Parameters Boolean Enable or disable the zoom OFF also restores the original dia gram size after a zoom function was applied OFF TraceName Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present both numeric suffixes are ignored trace names must be unique across different channels and win dows Example RST D...

Page 906: ...t or right border of the zoom window Range See description above RST Start or stop of the analyzer s sweep range Default unit NN TraceName Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present both numeric suffixes are ignored trace names must be unique across different channels and win dows Example See DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STATe Manual operatio...

Page 907: ...hide information element s RST ON Example RST DISP ANN TRAC OFF CHAN ON FREQ OFF Create diagram area no 1 with default trace and hide the trace list Keep the channel list but hide the swept frequency range Manual operation See Trace Info on page 568 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe Boolean Unmasks or masks all stimulus values in the VNA GUI for the active recall set Parameters Boolean ON OFF unm...

Page 908: ...ine colors are defined via DISPlay CMAP DispEl RGB where DispEl 9 12 The limit line colors are independent of the trace colors OFF all limit lines have the color of the associated trace RST n a a RST does not affect the setting In the fac tory configuration OFF is preset Example DISP CMAP LIMit OFF Use the trace colors for all limit lines associated with each trace Subsequent limit line color defi...

Page 909: ...1 to 20 are listed below Parameters Red Red content of the defined color Range 0 zero intensity corresponding to a 0 in the 24 bit color model to 1 full intensity corresponding to 255 in the 24 bit color model Green Green content of the defined color Range 0 zero intensity corresponding to a 0 in the 24 bit color model to 1 full intensity corresponding to 255 in the 24 bit color model Blue Blue co...

Page 910: ...he second trace green DISP CMAP6 RGB Query the marker color The marker color depends on the set tings made in previous sessions it is not reset A possible response is 0 0 0 for black markers DISP CMAP MARK OFF Change the marker colors M1 turns red M2 turns green Manual operation See Element on page 570 The numeric suffixes DispEl denote the following display elements DispEl Display Element 1 Backg...

Page 911: ...amed Trc2 and display the trace in a new diagram area no 2 The new trace is red like the first trace DISP CMAP TRAC COL ON DISP WIND3 STAT ON Continue the same color scheme in new diagram areas Create a new diagram area no 3 CALC PAR SDEF Trc3 S22 DISP WIND3 TRAC3 FEED Trc3 Create a new trace named Trc3 and display the trace in a new diagram area no 3 The new trace is not red Manual operation See ...

Page 912: ...race Trc1 red See also DISPlay CMAP DispEl RGB Manual operation See Properties on page 570 DISPlay LAYout LayoutMode Arranges the diagrams in the screen leaving the diagram contents unchanged Parameters LayoutMode LINeup STACk HORizontal VERTical GRID LINeup the diagrams are arranged side by side STACk the diagrams are arranged one on top of the other HORizontal the diagrams are arranged in horizo...

Page 913: ...g for horizontal layouts reads h1 w11 w12 w1M 1 h2 w12 w22 w2M 2 hN wN1 wN2 wNM N A semicolon separates different rows a comma separates different diagram widths within a row The definition of a vertical layout is analogous however the role of rows and col umns is interchanged The query returns the layout data in an alternative executable format The executable format is also used by DISPlay LAYout...

Page 914: ...illed with M i diagrams with independent widths wij j 1 2 M i the data string is composed as follows StartFormat N 1 0 00 0 00 RepeatFormati 1 M i 1 00 hi wi1 1 00 wi2 1 00 wiM i 1 00 For a vertical layout with N columns each of width wi i 1 N and filled with M i diagrams with independent heights hij j 1 2 M i the data string is composed as follows StartFormat 1 N 0 00 0 00 RepeatFormati M i 1 wi ...

Page 915: ...out as defined by DISPlay LAYout DEFine RST n a Example See Creating Diagrams Usage Setting only Manual operation See Additional Functionality SCPI Commands on page 566 DISPlay MENU KEY ACTion CATalog Displays the identifiers of the available dialog opener actions as a comma separated list of strings Use DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute to open one of the dialogs Example DISPlay MENU KEY ACTion CATalog re...

Page 916: ...on Setting parameters TabID Identifier of a softtool tab Example RST DISP MENU KEY SEL Meas SParams Activates the S Params tab of the Meas softtool Usage Setting only Tip When working with the GPIB Explorer switch to raw mode Options Raw mode in the IECWIN32 GUI before executing this command DISPlay MENU KEY TOOL CATalog Displays the identifiers of the available softtool tabs as a comma separated ...

Page 917: ...I bytes The numbers are separated by commas as specified in IEEE 488 2 REAL Data is transferred in a definite length block as IEEE floating point numbers of the specified Length See Chap ter 6 2 3 5 Block Data Format on page 652 Note If binary data is transferred to the analyzer the receive terminator should be set to EOI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator EOI to avoid inadvertent inter rupt...

Page 918: ...Py commands control the output of screen information to an external device Part of the functionality of this system is included in the File menu HCOPy IMMediate 903 HCOPy DESTination 904 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 904 HCOPy ITEM ALL 905 HCOPy ITEM LOGO STATe 905 HCOPy ITEM MLISt STATe 905 HCOPy ITEM TIME STATe 905 HCOPy PAGE COLor 906 HCOPy PAGE MARGin BOTTom 906 HCOPy PAGE MARGin LEFT 906 HCOPy PAGE M...

Page 919: ... file format see HCOPy DEVice LANGuage HCOP DEST MMEM HCOP Select Print to file and create the printer file specified before Manual operation See To File on page 558 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage Format Selects a file format for printer files Selecting the format is recommended to ensure that the file defined via MMEMory NAME can be read or imported by an external appli cation Parameters Format BMP PNG JP...

Page 920: ...oes not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP ITEM ALL Select the complete information to be printed HCOP ITEM LOGO ON HCOP Include the logo in the printed output and start printing HCOPy ITEM MLISt STATe Boolean Qualifies whether or not the printed output contains the information in the marker info field marker list Parameters Boolean ON OFF marker list is included or excluded RST n a RST...

Page 921: ...RGin BOTTom LowMargin Defines the distance between the bottom of the page and the bottom of the printed information Parameters LowMargin Lower margin Range 0 01 mm to 10000 mm RST n a RST does not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP PAGE MARG BOTT 10 TOP 10 Set an upper and a lower margin of 1 cm HCOPy PAGE MARGin LEFT LeftMargin Defines the distance between the left edge of the page and...

Page 922: ...tching between LANDscape and PORTrait rotates the hardcopy result by 90 degrees No other settings are changed Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait PORTrait short edge of the paper is the top of the page LANDscape long edge of the paper is the top of the page RST n a RST does not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP PAGE ORI LAND HCOP Select landscape page orientation and start printi...

Page 923: ...in the ZVR or ZVABT compatibility modes Note In contrast to all other commands of the analyzer the INITiate Ch IMMediate commands have been implemented for overlap ped execution see Chapter 6 4 Command Processing on page 657 Example See INITiate Ch CONTinuous Usage Event Manual operation See Restart Sweep on page 255 INITiate CONTinuous ALL Boolean Qualifies whether the analyzer measures in single...

Page 924: ...ty mode is active and INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPeALL is selected this suffix is ignored Example See INITiate Ch CONTinuous Usage Event Manual operation See Restart Sweep on page 255 INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPe Scope Selects the scope of the single sweep sequence The setting is applied in single sweep mode only INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF This command is required in compatibility modes only see SYST...

Page 925: ...1 Channel no 2 is still measured continuously INIT CONT ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels The measurement in channel no 2 is also stopped after the current sweep INIT ALL Re start a single sweep in both channels Example Alternative settings using the R S ZVAB compatibility mode RST SYSTem LANGuage ZVABT RST INIT CONT OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels including chann...

Page 926: ...s in get direction it queries whether at least one RF connection to a switch matrix is configured Parameters Boolean ON 1 setting adds all registered switch matrices to the RF configuration performing a default assignment of VNA ports and test ports OFF 0 setting removes all switch matrices from the RF con figuration 1 query at least one RF connection to a switch matrix 0 query no RF connection to...

Page 927: ... named Set_2 and make it the active recall set MEM CAT Query all recall sets The response is Set1 SET_2 MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets Set_2 znx MEM DEL Set_2 znx Store the active recall set Set_2 to a file renaming it Set_2 znx Close the setup Usage Query only MEMory CATalog COUNt Returns the number of loaded recall sets Usage Query only MEMory DEFine Name ...

Page 928: ... MEM DEF SET_2 Create a recall set named SET_2 and make it the active recall set MEM SEL Set1 Activate the default recall set Set1 MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets Set1 znx MEM DEL Set1 znx Store the active recall set Set1 to a file renaming it Set1 znx Close the recall set 7 3 12 MMEMory Commands The MMEMory commands provide mass storage capabilities for the ...

Page 929: ... most of the folders on the internal hard disk are read only folders Only the following folders can be changed C Users Public C Users Instrument The public and instrument folders may be used to store user data To simplify this task the public folder contains predefined subfolders e g the subfolder C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits is intended for calibration kit data The ...

Page 930: ...ory RDIRectory 941 MMEMory STORe CKIT 942 MMEMory STORe CKIT WLABel 942 MMEMory STORe CMAP 943 MMEMory STORe CORRection 943 MMEMory STORe CORRection TCOefficient 943 MMEMory STORe EYE MASK 944 MMEMory STORe EYE MASK RESults 944 MMEMory STORe EYE MEASurements 944 MMEMory STORe LIMit 945 MMEMory STORe MARKer 945 MMEMory STORe RIPPle 946 MMEMory STORe SEGMent 946 MMEMory STORe STATe 947 MMEMory STORe...

Page 931: ... is specified the factory cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess is used By default this file is also used in manual control A cal kit file name calkit without path denotes a specific cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit A cal kit file name calkit with path denotes a specific cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory Example MME...

Page 932: ... only MMEMory CATalog ALL Directory Returns the contents of the current or of a specified directory and all subdirectories The information is returned in the following format Directory of Directory Used Size FreeDiskSpace FileEntry DirectoryEn try Directory of Subdirectory Used Size FreeDiskSpace FileEntry DirectoryEntry See also MMEMory CATalog Tip Use MMEMory CATalog to query the contents of the...

Page 933: ...le Path to the cal kit file either absolute or relative to the current directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Detail CONNector LABel NAME GENDer If specified the command only returns the corresponding prop erty Return values ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel Gender 1 has a gender 0 doesn t have a gender Usage Query only MMEMory COPY SourceFile NewFile Copies an existing file to a new file Setting parame...

Page 934: ...is used see MMEMory CDIRectory Force FORCe Optional parameter allows you to delete read only files too Example MMEM DEL C Users Public TEST01 HCP Remove file TEST01 HCP from the directory C Users Public The file must not be read only otherwise the additional parameter FORCe is required Usage Setting only MMEMory DELete CORRection CalGroupName Deletes a system error correction data set stored in th...

Page 935: ...s favorite 1 overwriting the previ ous favorite 1 MMEM FAV1 Clears position 1 of the favorites list MMEM FAV1 Returns Manual operation See Import on page 556 MMEMory LOAD CKIT CalKitFile Loads cal kit data from the specified cal kit file Setting parameters CalKitFile String parameter to specify name and directory of the loaded cal kit file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current ...

Page 936: ...ard types and their parameters StandardLabel String parameter addressing a particular calibration standard by its label An empty string means that no label is defined TouchstoneFile String parameter to specify name and directory of the Touch stone file to be loaded A s1p file must be used for one port standards a s2p file for two port standards If no path is specified the analyzer searches the cur...

Page 937: ...alyzer An empty string means that no label is defined StandardType MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MMLine MMLine1 MMLine2 MMLine3 MFLine MFLine1 MFLine2 MFLine3 FFLine FFLine1 FFLine2 FFLine3 MMATten MFATten FFATten MMSNetwork MFSNetwork FFSNetwork MOPen FOPen MSHort FSHort MOSHort MOSHort1 MOSHort2 MOSHort3 FOSHort FOSHort1 FOSHort2 FOSHort3 MREFlect FREFlect MMTCh FMTCh MSMatch FSMatch Standard ty...

Page 938: ... Path for Additional Cal Kits and Connector Types All cal kit files in the specified directory will be re loaded automatically as predefined kits i e read only kits which cannot be modified every time the VNA application is started Parameters Directory String parameter to specify the directory path The directory can be created separately MMEMory MDIRectory An empty string means that no cal kit fil...

Page 939: ...OR CMAP C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna ColorSchemes Test ColorScheme Store the data for the user defined cal kit Newkit and overwrite the cal kit file New_kit calkit Usage Setting only Manual operation See Recall Save on page 571 MMEMory LOAD CORRection Channel CalGroupFile Applies a system error correction data set stored in the cal pool cal group file to chan nel no Ch Parameters Cha...

Page 940: ...nel CalGroupFile CalGroupFile Merges activates several cal group files for channel no Channel so that the query SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine returns a list of all merged calibration types equivalent to the calibration pool list in the Calibration Man ager dialog The merged cal group files can be stored to a common file see exam ple Note that the calibrations to be merged must be based...

Page 941: ...R0103 FRTR0104 MMEM STOR CORR 1 Merged cal Store both sets of calibration data to a common cal group file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add Add All Replace Apply Apply to All on page 343 MMEMory LOAD CORRection RESolve Channel CalGroupFile Resolves the pool link between channel Channel and a correction data set cal group file After resolving the pool link the analyzer keeps the previous ...

Page 942: ...da tory RST n a Trace Optional string parameter For multiport Touchstone files snp n 1 the parameter refers to a particular S parame ter trace S11 S12 For ASCII csv files the parameter references a trace name in the file case sensitive If the parameter is omitted the first trace in the specified file is imported This parameter is not used for power meter correction list files pmcl RST n a Example ...

Page 943: ...ame of the jitter file If the path is omitted the current directory is used see MMEMory CDIRectory Usage Setting only Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See User Specific on page 590 MMEMory LOAD EYE MASK TraceName TraceFile Loads a user defined eye mask from a 7bit ASCII file Setting parameters TraceName Name of the related eye diagram TraceFile String parameter containing the path and fil...

Page 944: ...arches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory See also note on Touchstone files above TouchstoneFile String parameter selects an S parameter from a Touchstone file The parameter must be compatible with the file type e g for one port Touchstone files s1p only the parameter name S11 is allowed RST S11 if all optional parameters are omitted StimulusOffset Stimulus offset for limi...

Page 945: ...ly created Touchstone limit line file and assign the limit lines to Trc1 applying a response offset of 2 dB CALC LIMit DISPlay ON Show the limit line in the diagram Usage Setting only Manual operation See Recall Save on page 521 MMEMory LOAD RIPPle TraceName RippleLimFile Loads a ripple limit definition from a specified file and assigns it to a trace with a speci fied name Ripple limits are create...

Page 946: ...segment definition loaded from the specified ASCII file Setting parameters Channel Channel number SweepSegFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the sweep segment file to be loaded The default extension manual con trol for sweep segment files is SegList although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with ...

Page 947: ...c Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets Set_0413 znx Load the settings stored in Set_0413 znx Usage Setting only Manual operation See Open Recall on page 553 MMEMory LOAD TRACe DestinationTraceName TraceFile SParamOrTraceName Loads trace data from a specified trace file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name Traces are created using the CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine com mand Setting par...

Page 948: ...layed MMEM STOR TRAC TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Trc1 s2p Store the four S parameter traces to a two port Touchstone file MMEM LOAD TRAC TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Trc1 s2p Load the previously created Touchstone file and overwrite the previously generated memory trace assigned to Trc1 with the S11 trace Usage Setting only Manual operation See ...

Page 949: ...ogical port number Setting parameters PortFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Port PMAin PSECondary Port assignment for two 2 port s2p files PMAin Port 1 PSECondary Port 2 The ports must be specified for the import of 2 port s2p files they mus...

Page 950: ...ical port number Setting parameters PortFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Port PMAin PSECondary Port assignment for two 2 port s2p files PMAin Port 1 PSECondary Port 2 The ports must be specified for the import of 2 port s2p files they must ...

Page 951: ... Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding Test s1p Load a Touchstone file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Select File on page 427 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop EMBedding PortFile Loads data from a specified one port s1p Touchstone file defining a ground loop circuit model for embedding Select the ground loop circuit model involving file import CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding TNDefini...

Page 952: ...STSC SLST SCST require two 2 port s2p files to be assigned to the different ports PMAin and PSECondary the FIMPort model requires a single 4 port s4p file but no additional port assign ment Port sets with m 3 or 4 ports require a s 2m p file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Port PMAin PSECondary Port assignment for two 2 por...

Page 953: ...ircuit models STSL STSC SLST SCST require two 2 port s2p files to be assigned to the different ports PMAin and PSECondary the FIMPort model requires a single 4 port s4p file but no additional port assign ment If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Port PMAin PSECondary Port assignment for two 2 port s2p files PMAin Port 1 PSEConda...

Page 954: ...y CDIRectory Interchange FPORts IPORts Interchange port numbers of loaded s2p file FPORts or omitted the port numbers are not interchanged IPORts interchange port numbers The parameter must not be used for 4 port files Example CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM TND FIMP Select the Serial s2p data circuit model MMEM LOAD VNET SEND DEEM2 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna VNET Test s2p Load a Touchsto...

Page 955: ... only Manual operation See Select File on page 421 MMEMory MDIRectory NewDirectory Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in an existing directory Setting parameters NewDirectory String parameter to specify the new directory Either the full path or a subdirectory for the current directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM MDIR C Users Public New_Directory Create the specified directo...

Page 956: ...parameter to specify the file name The supported file for mats are wmf ewmf bmp png see command HCOPy DEVice LANGuage The specified directory must exist otherwise no file can be generated If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory RST Hardcopy Example MMEM NAME C Users Public Screenshots PLOT1 BMP Define a printer file name to be stored in...

Page 957: ...ctory MMEM STOR CKIT New Kit 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits New Kit 1 calkit Store the data for the user defined cal kit New Kit 1 and over write the cal kit file New Kit 1 calkit Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import Cal Kit Export Cal Kit on page 323 MMEMory STORe CKIT WLABel CalKitName KitLabel CalKitFile Stores the data of a calibration kit to a specifie...

Page 958: ... cal and is stored in the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data directory Setting parameters Channel Channel number CalGroupFile String parameter to specify the name of the created cal group file There is no need to specify the directory path and file exten sion the analyzer uses the default cal pool directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data and a ...

Page 959: ... detailed results of the mask test in the related eye diagram to an ASCII file see CALCulate Chn EYE MASK DATA on page 706 This command will raise an execution error if CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe is OFF Setting parameters TraceName The name of the eye diagram whose mask test results shall be exported TraceFile Mandatory string parameter containing the path and file name of the file If the path i...

Page 960: ...Export Measurements on page 581 MMEMory STORe LIMit TraceName LimLineFile Saves the limit lines associated to a specified trace to a limit line file Limit lines are created using the CALCulate Chn LIMit commands Setting parameters TraceName Name of an existing trace in the active recall set string parame ter for which a limit line definition exists LimLineFile String parameter to specify the name ...

Page 961: ...ation See Export Markers on page 536 MMEMory STORe RIPPle TraceName RippleLimFile Saves the ripple limits associated with a specified trace to a ripple limit file Ripple limit definitions are created using the CALCulate Chn RIPPle commands Setting parameters TraceName Name of an existing trace in the active setup string parameter for which a ripple limit definition exists RippleLimFile String para...

Page 962: ... RecallSetFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cre ated recall set file The default extension manual control for recall set files is znx although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Example See MMEMory LOAD STATe Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save on page 553 MMEMory S...

Page 963: ...ional parameter is omitted the command stores unformatted data Format COMPlex LINPhase LOGPhase COMPlex complex values real and imaginary part LINPhase linear magnitude and phase LOGPhase dB magnitude and phase If the second optional parameter is omitted the command stores complex data DecSeparator POINt COMMa POINt decimal separator point COMMa decimal separator comma If the third optional parame...

Page 964: ...the analyzer uses the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces directory FormatInd FORMatted UNFormatted UNFormatted unformatted data export specified by the second optional parameter FORMatted formatted data export for csv and dat files only If the first optional parameter is omitted the command stores unformatted data Format COMPlex LINPhase LOGPhase COMPlex complex values real and imag...

Page 965: ...operation See Save on page 512 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion PLUS arg0 This command defines how positive numbers are prefixed during Touchstone file export by a leading space a plus sign or not at all Parameters arg0 SPACe PLUS VOID Manual operation See Positive Number Prefix on page 612 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion SSEParator Boolean This command defines whitespace insertion during Touchstone file exp...

Page 966: ...ee Con ditions for Touchstone file export on page 136 Setting parameters Channel Channel number in the active recall set TouchstoneFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cre ated Touchstone file The file extension s n p for a n port Touchstone file is mandatory If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Format ...

Page 967: ...e impedances and store them to a two port Touchstone file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save on page 512 7 3 13 OUTPut Commands The OUTPut commands control the characteristics of the analyzer s output ports OUTPut UPORt ECBits 952 OUTPut Ch STATe 952 OUTPut Ch UPORt VALue 953 OUTPut UPORt ECBits Boolean Defines the usage of pins pins 16 to 19 of the USER PORT connector Parameters Boolean...

Page 968: ...easur ing channel i e the channel for which the analyzer performs a sweep This chan nel is not necessarily identical with the active channel The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement sweep in a channel with non zero channel bits is started They are changed whenever a channel with differ ent channel bits becomes the measuring channel The signals at the USER PORT connector are maintained ...

Page 969: ...el no 2 causing it to become the active channel and assign the channel bit value B00000010 The analyzer performs no measurement in channel no 2 therefore the output signal is not changed CALC2 PAR SDEF Ch2Tr1 S11 Create a trace named Ch2Tr1 and assign it to channel 2 While the analyzer measures in channel 2 the output signal changes from pin 8 to pin 9 OUTP UPOR ECB OFF Reserve pin 16 to 19 for mo...

Page 970: ... prompt windows simultaneously Setting parameters AppName String variable containing the name and path of an application program to be executed or of a file to be opened The path can be defined as an absolute path e g c or relative to the cur rent directory MMEMory CDIRectory Blanks in the AppName can be used to separate the applica tion name from optional parameters Example PROGram SELected NAME ...

Page 971: ...p Query the value of the key Receive in the ini file The response is this is a response PROGram SELected INIParameter IniFile Key Value Value Defines and writes one or several key value pairs into the preferences file ini specified by file_path The information is entered into the PARAMETER section This command can be used to supply information to an external application launched by PROGram SELecte...

Page 972: ... future firmware versions Parameters Program PROG Any program running under Windows or any file that can be opened with an application program available on the analyzer RST PROG Example See PROGram SELected EXECute PROGram SELected RETVal Queries the return value of an application or process started via PROGram SELected EXECute This will only be successful if preceded by a PROGram SELected WAIT qu...

Page 973: ...COUNt averaging is always channel specific Both features are completely independent from each other SENSe Ch AVERage STATe 958 SENSe Ch AVERage CLEar 958 SENSe Ch AVERage COUNt 959 SENSe Ch AVERage MODE 959 SENSe Ch AVERage STATe Boolean Enable or disable the sweep average Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Boolean ON OFF enables or disables the automatic calculation of the sweep average over the...

Page 974: ... Manual operation See Factor On Reset on page 238 SENSe Ch AVERage MODE Mode Suffix Ch Parameters Mode AUTO FLATten REDuce MOVing AUTO Automatic selection between REDuce and FLATten mode depending on the trace format FLATten Cumulative moving averages of the linear magnitude and phase values provides the most effective noise suppression for the dB Mag Phase Unwr Phase and Lin Mag formats REDuce Cu...

Page 975: ... on page 211 Bandwidths can be set in 1 1 5 2 3 5 7 steps The analyzer rounds up any entered value between these steps and rounds down values exceeding the maximum bandwidth Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters ResBandw Resolution bandwidth Range See above Increment 1 1 5 2 3 5 7 steps RST 10 kHz Default unit Hz Example BAND 1 1 Set a resolution bandwidth of approx 1 1 Hz for channel 1 BAND The ana...

Page 976: ... data set ASCII or block data can be transferred depending on the selected data transfer format FORMat DATA The sweep must be stopped to transfer calibration data see program example for SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault Note This command affects the active calibration of channel no Ch or the factory calibration if no channel calibration is active For the factory calibration the qu...

Page 977: ... axis in arbitrary mode with option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 Parameters ErrorTerm String parameters describing the different error terms depend ing on the current calibration method see table below Each term contains one complex value real and imaginary part for each sweep point The parameters must be transferred in full length The following strings are allowed DIRECTIVITY directivity at the SourcePort SRC...

Page 978: ...a short standard REFL RSHort REFLTRACK Full one port Refl OSM FOPort DIRECTIVITY SRCMATCH REFLTRACK Two port normalization FRTRans TRANSTRACK One path two port OPTPort DIRECTIVITY SRCMATCH REFLTRACK TRANSTRACK TOSM TOSM DIRECTIVITY SRCMATCH REFLTRACK LOADMATCH TRANSTRACK TOM TSM TRM TRL TNA TOM TSM TRM TRL TNA DIRECTIVITY SRCMATCH REFLTRACK LOADMATCH TRANSTRACK for reading and writing G11 G22 and ...

Page 979: ... DATA setting 7 3 15 5 SENSe CORRection CKIT The SENSe CORRection CKIT commands deal with calibration kits and cal kit data The calibration kits are distinguished by their names CalkitName the optional labels label can be used to carry information about the calibration standard In order to handle several identical calibration kits with different serial numbers use the commands of chapter Chapter 7...

Page 980: ...23 SENSe CORRection CKIT DMODe ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel arg3 Sets gets the delay mode for the related cal kit identified by connector type name and label i e allows to toggle between ZVR compatible and Agilent modelling see Offset Parameters on page 326 Subsequent standard definitions interpret the specified DelayParam accordingly In set direction if a cal kit with the given connector typ...

Page 981: ...reate a new cal kit New Kit 1 and assign an open f standard for the N 50 Ω connector type with specific properties CORR CKIT LAB New Kit 1 Test kit created today Label the previously created kit CORR CKIT LAB New Kit 1 Check the label CORR CKIT DEL New Kit 1 Delete the kit SENSe CORRection CKIT SELect ConnectorType CalKitName Selects the calibration kit to be used specifying its connector type and...

Page 982: ...ATalog to query cal kit names Example See SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CKIT STANdard DATA ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel StandardType DelayMode Port1 Port2 Returns the data of the related calibration standard identified by ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel and StandardType and optionally restricted to the given port s The delay parameter is returned a...

Page 983: ...d by its name Tip For connector types with arbitrary user defined names you can use the command SENSe CORRection CKIT SELect Cal kit naming conventions Calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters The string contains the cal kit name used in the calibration dialogs e g Calibration Presettings a Ω in the name must be replaced by Ohm e g NewKit1 denotes the user defined calibration kit...

Page 984: ... a possibly non ideal 1 port or 2 port calibration standard StandardType within a particular cal kit Depending on the standard type only a subset of the parameters may be used see Table 7 9 Suffix StandardType string Standard type For one port standards the first character denotes the gender for transmission standards the first two characters denote the genders on both ends e g MOPen for a male Op...

Page 985: ...dard Example CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm New Kit 1 0 4000000000 0 0 50 99 2 3 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 Define the properties of the Open f standard for a N 50 Ω con nector type in cal kit New Kit 1 CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm Query the properties of the Open f standard for a N 50 Ω con nector type in the active cal kit CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm New Kit 1 Query the properties of the Open f standard for a N 50 Ω con necto...

Page 986: ...rameter CalKitName Name of the calibration kit Use SENSe CORRection CKIT CATalog to query cal kit names String parameter CalKitLabel Label e g the serial number of the calibration kit for WLABel com mand only String parameter StandardLa bel Label e g the serial number of the standard String parameter MinFreq MaxFreq Min max frequency for which the circuit model is valid Default unit is Hz DelayPar...

Page 987: ...llowing parameters Port restrictions are indicated in brackets Table 7 11 Standard types and their parameters std_type Maning MOPen FOPen Open male m or female f MSHort FSHort Short m or f OSHort 1 2 3 MOSHort 1 2 3 FOSHort 1 2 3 Offset short sexless m or f three standards each For user defined connector types only Suffix 1 can be omitted MMTCh FMTCh Match m or f MSMatch FSMatch Sliding match m or...

Page 988: ...Example See SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CKIT LDELete CalKitName KitLabel Deletes an imported or user defined cal kit which is identified by its cal kit name and label Note It is not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits Setting parameters CalKitName String parameter containing an imported or user defined calibra tion kit available on the ...

Page 989: ...ta for the labelled cal kit to the cal kit file New Kit 1 2012 05 25 calkit CORR CKIT LDEL New Kit 1 2012 05 25 Delete the kit from the internal memory MMEMory LOAD CKIT C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits New Kit 1 2012 05 25 calkit Re load the kit SENSe CORRection CKIT LSELect ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel Selects the calibration kit to be used specifying its connecto...

Page 990: ... Label of the cal kit Example See SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType LSELect CalKitName Label Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type ConnType The kit is identified by its name and label Tip For connector types with arbitrary user defined names and labels you can use the command SENSe CORRection CKIT LSELect Suffix C...

Page 991: ...sistance Port1 Port2 SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType WLABel ConnType CalKitName CalKitLabel Port1 Port2 Defines the parameters of a non ideal 1 port or 2 port calibration standard StandardType where a particular cal kit can be addressed by name and label Apart from the additional CalKitLabel parameter the syntax and semantics of this command is identical to Standard types and their parameters E...

Page 992: ...itLabel SParameter PhysPort1 PhysPort2 Reads the S parameter data for a particular 2 port cal kit standard previously loaded from Touchstone file using MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa or MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa WLABel The cal kit is identified by its name and label Query parameters TwoPortStandard MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MMLine MMLine1 MMLine2 MMLine3 MFLine MFLine1 MFLine2 MFLine3 FFLine FFLine1 FF...

Page 993: ...INSTall 993 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT LOAD 994 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT PORT PhyPt 994 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt 994 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection GENDers 995 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs 996 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DELete 996 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire 997 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure EXPort 998 SENSe Ch CORRec...

Page 994: ...UTO ASSignment DEFine TPORt DEFault 1023 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment COUNt 1024 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment ALL COUNt 1024 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine 1025 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine TPORt 1027 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg ACQuire 1027 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SAVE 1027 SENSe Chn CORRe...

Page 995: ...n the calibration unit Usage Setting only Manual operation See File Name Comment Optional on page 331 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PASSword Password Enters a password to enable a single password protected action in the automatic cali bration or in the characterization wizard If password protection has been activated manually in the Characterize Cal Unit dialog the password is required for an...

Page 996: ...ss The cal kit file can be saved to a directory on the analyzer to the calibration unit s internal flash memory or to an SD card inserted at the calibration unit if available Similar logic as SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT but with flexible port assignment Setting parameters Characterization Location of the created characterization cal kit file string parameter extension calkit If a path is sp...

Page 997: ...1 Number of first test port CalUnitPort1 Number of the calibration unit port to whom test port Test Port1 is assigned TestPort2 Number of the second test port Example Prerequisite SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess MyCalU Sets MyCalU as the active calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PORTs abc Queries the ports of characterization abc returns something like 3 N 50 Ohm MALE 4 N 50 ...

Page 998: ...al aver aging see SENSe Ch AVERage STATe the number of calibration sweeps is calculated automatically Parameters Average AUTO MANual Manual operation See Auto Averaging on page 606 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels ALL Boolean Enables calibration of all channels in the active recall set The command is valid for the following calibration methods Manual system error correction Automatic system error...

Page 999: ...rser Test SFK Ch1 RSHort 1 2 SENSe2 CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine Parser Test SFK Ch2 FOPort 2 Declare the calibrations to be performed then connect the Short standard to port 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORt 1 Acquire calibration data for channel 1 then connect the Open standard to port 2 SENSe2 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 Acquire calibration data for channel 2...

Page 1000: ... COLLect FIXTure ACQuire Manual operation See Direct Compensation on page 415 SENSe CORRection COLLect FIXTure LMParameter LOSS STATe Boolean Selects an Auto Length or an Auto Length and Loss calculation Parameters Boolean 1 Auto Length and Loss 0 Auto Length no loss RST 1 Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire Manual operation See Auto Length Auto Length and Loss on page 415 SENS...

Page 1001: ...The response is 1 Manual operation See User Cal Active on page 339 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected Type TestPort SecondPortOrAdapter Dispersion DelayTimePhase Starts the acquisition of measurement data for the selected standard and port s The standards are reflection or transmission standards and can be connected to arbitrary analyzer ports Note The calibration measurement has a varia...

Page 1002: ...ion normalization and TOSM only it is recommended to suitably terminate the related test ports e g with 50 Ω loads TestPort Test port number For a transmission standard through line attenuation symmetric network or an adapter used as a through the input and output port numbers must be specified For reflection standards only one port number is required RST n a SecondPortOrAdapter For a transmission...

Page 1003: ...any two consecutive points is less than 90 deg From these phase values the analyzer calculates a linear extrapolation and derives an estimate for the DC phase limit If this DC phase is in the vicinity of 180 deg 180 deg then the transmission factor with negative phase is adop ted If the DC phase is in the vicinity of 0 deg 360 deg then the transmission factor with inverted sign corresponding to a ...

Page 1004: ...automatic calibration n arbi trary not necessarily consecutive port numbers must be speci fied The analyzer automatically detects the calibration unit ports connected to each analyzer port Example CORR COLL AUTO 1 2 4 Perform an automatic 3 port calibration at test ports 1 2 and 4 using the calibration unit s default calibration kit file and arbitrary test ports of the cal unit Usage Setting only ...

Page 1005: ... of the cal unit For an n port automatic calibration n arbitrary not necessarily consecutive port numbers must be specified It is possible to combine arbitrary not necessarily matching pairs of analyzer and cal unit ports TestPort2 Example CORR COLL AUTO PORT 1 2 2 4 4 1 Perform an automatic 3 port calibration at the analyzer ports 1 2 and 4 using the calibration unit s default calibration kit fil...

Page 1006: ...kit with path refers to a spe cific cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory on the analyzer TestPort1 Test port number For an n port automatic calibration n arbitrary not necessarily consecutive port numbers must be specified For a one path two port calibration OPTPort the first port no denotes the source port fully calibrated port CalUnitPort1 Port numbers of the cal unit For an n port auto...

Page 1007: ...file and default port assignments ports 1 and 2 of the cal unit Remove the cal unit and connect the power meter to Port 2 of the analyzer SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO POWer 2 Perform an additional receiver power calibration at Port 2 This completes the Usage Setting only Manual operation See Start Cal Sweep Abort Sweep on page 300 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE CalType Characterization Tes...

Page 1008: ...file name calkit with path refers to a spe cific cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory on the analyzer TestPort1 Test port numbers For an n port automatic calibration n arbi trary not necessarily consecutive port numbers must be speci fied For a one path two port calibration OPTPort the first port no denotes the node port fully calibrated port TestPort2 Second test port number of the analy...

Page 1009: ...gender of the cal kit to be loaded Ports Ports Either a list of ports or ALL optional Usage Setting only SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT PORT PhyPt Detail Queries the cal kit data assigned to the given port via SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT LOAD or SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT INSTall Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Port number Query parameters Detail CONNector LABel NAME GENDer Queried pro...

Page 1010: ...nd UMALE2 denote the user defined connector type UserConn2 The user defined connector types must be defined before being addressed by SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt RST N50FEMALE for all ports Example RST CORR COLL CONN1 N75MALE CONN4 Change the connector type at port 1 from N50FEMALE to N75MALE The connector type at the other ports is also changed to N75 however the gender female is...

Page 1011: ...ctor types at the ports RST ALL Example CORR COLL CONN PORTS SING Select independent connector types at the ports CORR COLL CONN1 N50MALE CONN4 N75FEMALE CONN2 Select independent connector types at ports 1 and 4 The con nector type at port 2 is not changed the query returns N50FEMALE Manual operation See Same Connector All Ports Same Gender All Ports on page 280 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DELete ...

Page 1012: ...nnel then delete the data Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply on page 283 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire StandardType TestPort1 TestPort2 Starts a fixture compensation sweep in order to acquire measurement data for a test fixture that has its inner conductor terminated with the selected standards Suffix Ch Channel number of the corrected channel Setting parameters StandardTy...

Page 1013: ...COLL FIXT STAR Prepare a fixture compensation measurement for channel 2 The channel 1 data is not affected SENS2 CORR COLL FIXT ACQ SHOR 1 3 Repeat the previous fixture compensation sweep for channel 2 SENS1 CORR COLL FIXT SAVE SENS2 CORR COLL FIXT SAVE Save and apply the compensation data for both channels SENS1 CORR OFFS3 DFC SENS2 CORR OFFS3 DFC Query whether the analyzer uses Direct Compensati...

Page 1014: ... be specified Example RST SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT LMP OFF Activate Direct Compensation SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT EXP Traces p12_short csv SHOR 1 2 Acquire Direct Compensation data for ports 1 and 2 whose inner connectors have to be terminated with a Short and save the acquired data to file In a subsequent measurement session you can load and apply these data as follows RST SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT LMP OFF ...

Page 1015: ...tion COLLect ACQuire SELected in order to simplify and speed up the new calibration procedure The channel settings for loa ded and new calibrations e g the number of sweep points must be identical Note The analyzer performs a consistency check for the loaded data If the loaded file is incompatible with the channel settings of channel Ch or if it does not contain data for the specified standard and...

Page 1016: ...cifies the second test port For reflection measurements with an adapter connected between port and standard set it to ON Otherwise set it to OFF or simply omit it Example Suppose that the cal pool contains a file Calgroup3 cal with a valid through calibration for the active channel no 1 which you want to include in a new TOSM calibration for ports 1 and 2 MMEM CDIR DEF CDIR Calibration Data Go to ...

Page 1017: ...bers causes an error message For a one path two port calibration OPTPort the first port no denotes the node port fully calibrated port TestPort2 Second calibrated port number TestPort3orAdapterCalKit Either the third calibrated port number or for Adapter Removal calibrations only the file path relative to the current directory where the analyzer shall store the adapter characterization obtained du...

Page 1018: ... default system error correction data for the selected ports and cali bration type The default data set corresponds to a test setup which does not introduce any systematic errors none of the measurement results acquired previously SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected is taken into account Tip The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction ...

Page 1019: ...ode Usage Event Manual operation See Apply on page 283 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DUMMy Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired measurement results SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected stores it and applies it to the calibrated channel s To avoid incompatibilities older system error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal po...

Page 1020: ...aming conventions under SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType SELect RST N 50 Ohm FEM for all ports Gender MALE FEMale Gender of the connectors The gender designation is not neces sary and ignored for sexless connector types Example RST CORR COLL SCON1 N 75 Ohm MALE SCON4 Change the connector type at port 1 from N 50 Ohm FEM to N 75 Ohm MALE The connector type at the other ports is also changed to N 75 O...

Page 1021: ...ency 0 Hz to 1000 GHz RST Example CORR CONN USERCON TEM GEND 1 00000 50 Define a TEM type connector type named USERCON CORR CONN USERCON Query the properties of the configured connector type CORR CONN DEL USERCON Delete the configured connector type Manual operation See Connector Gender on page 279 SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Returns a list of the connector types of all calibration kits...

Page 1022: ...t 1 2012 05 25 A sequence of two commas means that the preceding cal kit has no label assigned CORRection CKIT STANdard CATalog 85032B E Query standards in cal kit named 85032B E Possible response MOP FOP MSH FSH MMMT FMMT MFTH CORRection CKIT STANdard LCATalog New Kit 1 2012 05 25 Query standards in user cal kit named New Kit 1 labelled 2012 05 25 Possible response MOP FOP MSH P1 FSH MMMT FMMT MS...

Page 1023: ...no Sfk or of the factory calibra tion if no channel calibration is active Suffix Ch Number of the calibrated channel Sfk Number of the system error correction Less or equal than the total number of active system error cor rections for the related channel see SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter COUNt on page 1011 PhyPt Physical port number used to select a specific frequency axis in arbitrary mode w...

Page 1024: ...ctive POINts Number of points SPOWer Source power or stop power for power sweeps STYPe Sweep type or grid LIN LOG SEGM BANDwidth Measurement bandwidth PDLY Point delay Meas Delay for OSM RATTenuation Receiver attenuations comma separated list containing a value pair port no rec att float integer for each of the involved PORTs TYPE Calibration type see Type parameter in SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ...

Page 1025: ... following the cal kit name string if available and unique Multiple if cal kit names are available but not unique i e if PhyPt was not specified and multiple cal kits were used multi port cals with different connector types merged cals Unknown if cal kit names are not available cals created with a FW version 2 30 FSMode Returns the frequency sweep mode that was used during cali bration STEP Steppe...

Page 1026: ...fix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel Example CORR COLL METH REFL1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 as calibration type CORR COLL OPEN1 Measure an open standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard CORR COLL SAVE Calculate the system error correction data and apply it to the active channel CORR DATE Query the time when the system error correctio...

Page 1027: ... Reset the instrument and apply the auto length function to the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Auto Length on page 414 SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt DIELectric Permittivity Defines the permittivity for the offset correction at test port PhyPt Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters Permittivit...

Page 1028: ...gth of 30 cm for channel 1 and port no 2 CORR EDEL2 DIST DIEL Query the values of the mechanical length and the permittivity at port 2 The mechanical length is equal to the electrical length divided by the square root of the permittivity the latter is set to its default value The response is 0 29990704322 1 00062 CORR EDEL2 Query the value of the delay at port 2 The delay is equal to the electrica...

Page 1029: ...SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt ELENgth Manual operation See Loss at DC Loss at Freq Freq for Loss on page 418 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt AUTO Activate Defines the offset parameters for the active test port such that the residual delay of the active trace defined as the negative derivative of the phase response is minimized and the measured loss is reproduced as far as possible across the ent...

Page 1030: ...ection LOSS PhyPt OFFSet OffsetLoss Defines the frequency independent part DC value of the offset loss Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters OffsetLoss Frequency independent part of the offset loss Range 200 dB to 200 dB Increment 0 001 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Example See SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt ELENgth Manual operation S...

Page 1031: ...compensation for physical port PhyPt ON OFF Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters Boolean ON 1 compensation active OFF 0 compensation inactive Manual operation See Active on page 406 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt DFComp STATe Returns whether a direct fixture compensation has been carried out at port no PhyPt A direct fixture compensation resets the offset parameters to ...

Page 1032: ... SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA Wave CorrData SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA PORT PhyPt Wave CorrData Reads or writes receiver power correction data sets A power correction data set con tains n real values where Each value corresponds to the ratio of the actual power at the receiver input value provided by the used source to the uncalibrated power in dB The number n is equal to the number of sweep...

Page 1033: ... received waves b PhyPt The setting command is disabled unless the received waves have been power calibrated SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuireBWAVe The query always returns a result Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt Calibrated port number Parameters Boolean Enables ON or disables OFF the receiver power calibration for the received waves b PhyPt RST OFF Example RST CORR POW ACQ BWAVe ...

Page 1034: ... calibration of each port BWAVe calibration of received wave b1 b2 The port num ber CalPort the used SourceType and the SourcePort number must be specified in addition Alternative Parameters B1 and B2 B1 B2 direct wave and cal port setting for received waves b1 b2 The parameters B1 and B2 are ZVR compatible No additional parameters need to be specified The source for B1 is Port 2 and vice versa Ca...

Page 1035: ...w on page 289 SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt AWAVe STATe Boolean Enables or disables the receiver power calibration for channel Ch and for the refer ence waves an The setting command is disabled unless the reference waves have been power calibrated SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire on page 1019AWAVe The query always returns a result This command extends the functionality of manual control w...

Page 1036: ...ation See Start Cal Sweep on page 387 SENSe Ch CORRection STIMulus SENSe Ch CORRection STIMulus PORT PhyPt Queries the stimulus values of the active calibration A calibration must be selected before the command is executed see example Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel PhyPt Physical port number used to select a specific frequency axis in arbitrary mode with option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 ...

Page 1037: ...ameter The empty string refers to the factory calibration of and stored on the active calibration unit A VNA cal kit file name calkit without path refers to a specific cal kit file stored in the internal memory of the active cal ibration unit A VNA cal kit file name without path but prefixed with SD refers to a specific cal kit file stored on the SD card inserted at the active calibration unit A V...

Page 1038: ...TPORt to define additional port assignments manually See Chapter 4 5 5 4 Multiple Port Assignments on page 164 for background infor mation Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters TestPort1 Test port number 1 TestPort2 Test port number 2 Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine on page 1025 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Default Port Assignment on page 266 SEN...

Page 1039: ...signments on page 164 for background infor mation Note In MultiCal scenarios use SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment ALL COUNt to get the number of port assignments of all calibrations Suffix Ch Channel number Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine on page 1025 Usage Query only Manual operation See Port Assignment manual on page 265 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect A...

Page 1040: ...ration sweep the R S ZNB ZNBT expects the physical port connections to be established exactly as defined by the port pairs Use SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine TPORt command to take advantage of auto detection of port connections SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine DEFault or SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine TPORt DEFault to create the default...

Page 1041: ... starting the calibration sweep for port assignment 1 ensure test port 2 is connected to cal unit port 1 and test port 3 to cal unit port 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment1 ACQUire Perfoms the calibration sweep for port assignment 1 Before starting the calibration sweep for port assignment 2 ensure test ports 3 and 4 are connected to the cal unit in any order SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AU...

Page 1042: ...he automatic calibration sweep for the indicated channel and port assignment A complete valid set of port assignments must be defined before you can initiate a cal ibration See Chapter 4 5 5 4 Multiple Port Assignments on page 164 for back ground information Suffix Ch Number of the calibrated channel Asg Number of the port assignment Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFi...

Page 1043: ...al Cai Cal Off see Chapter 4 5 4 Calibration Labels on page 158 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example See SENSe Ch CORRection DATE Usage Query only Manual operation See Apply on page 283 7 3 15 8 SENSe COUPle The SENSe COUPle commands select the sweep mode SENSe Ch COUPle Order Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps Suffix Ch Channel number This suffi...

Page 1044: ...NSe1 DC2 RANGe 1 DC2 RANGE Select a DC measurement at DC INPUT2 with an expected DC voltage range of 1 V The value is rounded up the response is 3 Manual operation See Ranges DC 1 DC 4 on page 467 7 3 15 10 SENSe FREQuency The SENSe commands set frequency related parameters especially the mea surement and display ranges for the different sweep types The frequency ranges for the different instrumen...

Page 1045: ... FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes 1038 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer TFRequency Stg 1038 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation CONVersion 1039 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation LTONe 1039 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation ORDer Im STATe 1040 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation RECeiver 1040 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum MORDer 1041 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum STATe 1041 SENSe Ch FREQuen...

Page 1046: ...n page 431 SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer CenterFreq Defines the center of the measurement and display range for a frequency sweep sweep range The default center frequency is the center of the analyzer s maximum frequency range fMIN fMAX 2 The range depends on the instrument model see Table 7 13 Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters CenterFreq Center frequency of the sweep Increment 0 1 kHz Default unit ...

Page 1047: ...t Port Settings on page 366 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion ARBitrary Numerator Denominator Offset SweepType Unused command The R S ZNB ZNBT doesn t allow to set a separate receiver frequency for Mixer and Frequency Conversion Measurements Use SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt CONVersion ARBitrary IFRequency to define the port specific frequency range or CW SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion ARBitrary PMETer Pmt...

Page 1048: ...epType CW FIXed SWEep SWEep the full formula is applied For frequency sweeps the command defines a sweep range CW FIXed the reduced formula with fb 0 is applied the com mand defines a fixed frequency RST SWEep Example RST FREQ STAR 1E 9 STOP 1 1E 9 Reset the analyzer activating a frequency sweep and set the sweep range between 1 GHz and 1 1 GHz SYST COMM RDEV PMET1 DEF USB Power Meter NRP Z55 usb ...

Page 1049: ...l oscillator signal 1 or 2 for 2 stage mixer measurements see SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes IF mixer output signal mixing product RST LO Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer FUNDamental InputOutput Selects the mixer input or output signal which is at the fundamental frequency channel frequency to be defined by means of SENSe Ch FR...

Page 1050: ...nversion factor is a ratio of two positive integers numerator and denominator Suffix Ch Channel number Stg Mixer stage signals LO 1 or LO 2 see SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes Parameters Numerator Range 1 2 3 RST 1 Denominator Range 1 2 3 RST 1 Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Manual operation See Multiplication tab on page 394 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer ...

Page 1051: ...InputOutput FixedFrequency Assigns a fixed frequency to the RF LO 1 LO 2 or to the IF signal The fixed fre quency setting becomes active if the port is selected as a port with fixed frequency SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer FIXed Stg Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters InputOutput RF LO LO1 LO2 IF Fixed frequency for the specified port RF mixer input signal LO LO1 local oscillator signal no 1 ...

Page 1052: ...ONV MIX FIXed1 LO1 FIXed2 LO2 Assign fixed frequency settings to the two LO signals FREQ CONV MIX FUNDamental RF MFFixed LO1 10 MHz MFFixed LO2 10 MHz Assign the channel base frequency sweep range to the RF sig nal fixed frequencies of 10 MHz to both LO signals FREQ CONV MIX TFRequency1 DCUP TFRequency2 UCON Select down conversion USB at the first mixer stage up con version USB at the second mixer...

Page 1053: ... FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Manual operation See Port selection on page 393 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes Stages Selects the number of mixer stages for scalar mixer measurements Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Stages Number of mixer stages Range 1 2 RST 1 Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Manual operation See 2nd Mixer on page 395 SENSe Ch FREQuency C...

Page 1054: ... conversion to the lower sideband corresponding to an IF frequency range between 2 GHz and 1 GHz Manual operation See Conversion on page 395 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation CONVersion OFF Disables the intermodulation measurement and switches back to normal mode no fre quency conversion Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters OFF OFF Disable intermodulation measurement RST n a Example See SENSe ...

Page 1055: ...FREQ IMOD ORD3 ON ORD5 ON ORD7 OFF ORD9 OFF Enable the measurement of the intermodulation products up to the 5th order Perform intermodulation measurement evaluate results FREQ IMOD CONV OFF Disable intermodulation measurement switch back to normal non frequency converting mode Manual operation See Lower Tone on page 384 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation ORDer Im STATe Boolean Enables or disables the...

Page 1056: ... intermodulation spec trum measurement Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters IMOrder Maximum order of IM products Range 3 5 7 9 RST 3 Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum STATe Manual operation See CW Mode Spectrum on page 379 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum STATe Boolean Enables or disables the measurement of the intermodulation spectrum If a new chan nel is desired the trace...

Page 1057: ...am Example Intermodulation spectrum measurement in a new channel RST FREQ IMOD LTON PORT 1 UTON GEN 1 Reset the instrument to create the default channel no 1 Select port 1 as a source port for the lower tone a previously config ured external generator no 1 as a source port for the upper tone FREQ STAR 1GHZ STOP 2GHz Define a suitable sweep range to ensure that the analyzer can measure all intermod...

Page 1058: ...nnel number Parameters SourceType PORT GENerator NONE Upper tone source NONE no source selected for query only PORT internal second source at port arg1 GENerator configured external generator no arg1 RST NONE arg1 Analyzer port number or generator number Range 1 to number of ports of the analyzer or number of configured external generators RST n a no analyzer or generator port selected Example See...

Page 1059: ...response is LIN linear frequency sweep and AUTO automatic setting of the LO frequency Manual operation See Image Suppr on page 374 SENSe Ch FREQuency SEGMent AXIS Scale Selects either frequency based or point based x axis for segmented sweeps Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Scale POINt FREQuency Example SENSe SEGMent INSert 1MHZ 1 1MHZ 101 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ SENSe SEGMent INSert 2MHZ 3MHZ 101 ...

Page 1060: ...requency is adjusted to fMIN Span 2 or fMAX Span 2 SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt StartFreq SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP StopFreq These commands defines the start and stop frequency for a frequency sweep The val ues also define display range in a Cartesian diagram The default start and stop fre quencies equal to the minimum and maximum frequency of the analyzer The ranges depend on the instrument model see t...

Page 1061: ... SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe DATA 1048 SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe THReshold 1048 SENSe Ch HARMonic Queries whether the current frequency grid is harmonic Suffix Ch Channel number Usage Query only Manual operation See Is the Current Grid Harmonic on page 496 SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO arg0 Turns the Automatic Harmonic Grid function ON or OFF Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters arg0 RST ON Options R S ZNB ZNBT...

Page 1062: ...n page 578 SENSe Ch HARMonic MLENgth DATA DUTMLength Sets gets the expected maximum mechanical length of the DUT The set command automatically activates the Automatic Harmonic Grid function i e it sets SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO to ON Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters DUTMLength Default unit m Manual operation See Max DUT Measure Delay Max El Length Max Mech Length on page 578 SENSe Ch HARMonic PERM...

Page 1063: ...me definition The set command automatically activates the Automatic Harmonic Grid function i e it sets SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO to ON Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters DUTRiseTime Default unit s Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Rise Time on page 578 SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe THReshold DUTRiseThreshold Defines how the rise time that is set using SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe DATA shall be inte...

Page 1064: ...number LogPt Logical port number The logical ports must be defined using SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt PhysicalPort1 PhysicalPort2 An n port analyzer supports a maximum of n 2 n even or n 1 2 n odd logical ports Parameters RealPart Real part of the port impedance Range 1 mΩ to 10 MΩ RST ZCOMmon 25 Ω ZDIFferent 100 Ω real impedan ces Default unit Ohm ImaginaryPart Imaginary part of the port impedance may b...

Page 1065: ...al operation See Use Default on page 445 7 3 15 13 SENSe PAE The SENSe PAE commands configure the measurement of the Power Added Efficiency of an active 2 port device SENSe Ch PAE DCINput MAIN 1050 SENSe Ch PAE DCINput SECondary 1051 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters I 1051 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters R 1051 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters U 1052 SENSe Ch PAE TYPE 1052 SENSe Ch PAE DCINput MAIN Input Selects the first ...

Page 1066: ...buttons on page 468 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters I Current Defines the constant DC supply current I0 for the PAE measurement measurement type Constant Current Source see example Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Current RST 0 A Default unit A Example See SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Manual operation See Formula on page 468 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters R Resistance Defines the resistance R of the precision resistor u...

Page 1067: ...ST 0 V Default unit V Example See SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Manual operation See Formula on page 468 SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Type Selects the measurement type for the Power Added Efficiency PAE measurement The three measurement types involve different test setups input parameters and DC voltage measurements Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Type VOLTage CURRent VCURrent Constant voltage source constant curren...

Page 1068: ...For all measurement types CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc1 PAE21 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe FEED Trc1 Select a PAE measurement with port 1 as a source port port 2 as a receive port Manual operation See Measurement Type on page 468 7 3 15 14 SENSe PORT The SENSe PORT commands define the reference impedances at the physical ports SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence RealPart ImaginaryPart Specifies the comple...

Page 1069: ... Step Attenuators on page 217 and the automatic adaptive gain control AGC of the R S ZNB ZNBT See also SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol on page 1071 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode ACQuire 1054 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode SAVE 1055 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode PhyPt MEASure 1055 SENSe Ch POWer IFGain PhyPt MEASure 1055 SENSe Ch POWer ATTenuation 1055 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol 1056 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol AL...

Page 1070: ...Wer GAINcontrol Note These commands are replaced by SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol and SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol GLOBal They are supported for compatibility with FW versions 1 5 Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer Parameters AGCMode LNOise LDIStortion AUTO AUTO automatic adaptive gain control AGC according to the RF input level LNOise fixed large IF gain for low input leve...

Page 1071: ...e analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum attenuation to the closest step RST 0 dB Default unit dB Example POW ATT AREC 10 Set an attenuation factor of 10 dB for the waves received at test port 1 and channel no 1 The other test ports and channels are not affected Manual operation See Attenuation on page 366 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol ReceiverName Mode SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol Receive...

Page 1072: ...ort SENSe POWer GAINcontrol B1D2 Query the AGC setting for the wave b1 while port 2 is the drive port The response is 1 LDIS default setting Manual operation See Drive port specific settings on page 376 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol ALL Mode Applies the same manual AGC Mode to all a and b wave receivers Note Without the Extended Power Range option only the gain of the measurement receivers the b wave...

Page 1073: ...automatic adaptive gain control AGC according to the RF input level LNOise static large IF gain for low input levels LDIStortion static small IF gain for high input levels MANual enables the manual configuration of independent AGC settings for each drive port see SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol and SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol RST AUTO Example See SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol Manual operation S...

Page 1074: ...ator SOURce Manual operation See Ext Frequency on page 617 7 3 15 17 SENSe SEGMent Seg The SENSe SEGMent Seg commands define all channel settings for a seg mented frequency sweep A segmented sweep is activated via SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE SEGMent The commands in this subsystem do not accept the step parameters UP and DOWN Numeric values can be entered directly or using the DEFault MINimum MAXimum param...

Page 1075: ... TIME 1076 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME CONTrol 1077 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME SUM 1077 SENSe Ch SEGMent COUNt Returns the number of sweep segments in the channel including all segments that are switched off SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg STATe OFF Suffix Ch Channel number Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM OFF Disable the measurement in the...

Page 1076: ...EGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM2 ADD Create a second sweep segment The frequency range of the second segment will be between 1 5 MHz and the maximum fre quency of the analyzer Usage Event Manual operation See Add Insert Delete Delete All on page 250 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution ResBandwidth Defines the ...

Page 1077: ...segments to the band width for unsegmented sweeps defined via SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution ON will not restore the previous val ues The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a band width is entered using SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution RST OFF Example RST SENS SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 kHz measurement bandwidth SEGM BW...

Page 1078: ...tting con trols the whole segmented sweep Parameters Boolean ON use independent selectivity settings to be defined via SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution SELect OFF reset the selectivity in all sweep segments to the selectiv ity for unsegmented sweeps defined via SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution SELect ON will not restore the previous values The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a selec...

Page 1079: ...egment numbers must be sequential The specified segment number must be smaller or equal to the number of existing segments plus 1 If segment number Seg already exists it is replaced by the new segment Parameters StartFreq Start frequency of the segment see SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency STARt Default unit Hz StopFreq Stop frequency of the segment see SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency STOP Default uni...

Page 1080: ...y SBANd Selectivity NORMal MEDium HIGH Selectivity of the IF filter See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution SELect FreqSweepMode ANALog Stepped mode STEPped default or swept mode ANALog Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM DEF Query the channel settings for the new segment A possible response is 1000000000 2000000000 51 300 0 0044625 0 100...

Page 1081: ... Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number This suffix is ignored the command deletes all segments Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM DEL ALL Delete the created segment and all segments in the channel cre ated before Usage Event Manual operation See Add Insert Delete Delete All on page 250 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg DELete DUMMy Deletes t...

Page 1082: ...eep segment can be changed via SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency STARt and SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency STOP SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency STARt StartFreq SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency STOP StopFreq These commands define the start and stop frequency of sweep segment no Seg The sweep segments must be within the frequency range of the R S ZNB ZNBT see Table 7 13 Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep s...

Page 1083: ... create a segment with default channel settings Use SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg DEFine to change or query all settings of an existing segment Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Segment numbers must be sequential The specified segment number must be smaller or equal to the number of existing segments plus 1 If one or more sweep segments with segment numbers Seg or larger exist in the curren...

Page 1084: ...e set to the default value 0 MeasBandwidth Resolution bandwidth in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution Default unit Hz LO POSitive NEGative AUTO Position of the local oscillator frequency LO relative to the RF frequency In remote control this parameter must be set when a sweep segment is created See SENSe Ch FREQuency SBANd Selectivity NORMal MEDium HIGH Selectivity of the IF fi...

Page 1085: ... between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz and a meas delay of 10 ms SEGM1 SWE TIME Query the sweep time in the new segment Manual operation See Table Columns on page 252 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel IntSourcePow Defines the power of the internal signal source in sweep segment no Seg At the same time the command activates separate power control in all sweep segments SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel CONTrol ...

Page 1086: ...n control AGC according to the RF input level LNOise static large IF gain for low input levels LDIStortion static small IF gain for high input levels Parameters for setting and query ReceiverName String parameter defining the wave s followed by the drive port see examples below and Table 7 4 Example RST SENSe POWer GAINcontrol GLOBal MANual Activate independent AGC settings for each drive port SEN...

Page 1087: ...er GAINcontrol ALL instead if no distinction between dif ferent sweep segments shall be made Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Setting parameters Mode LNOise LDIStortion AUTO AUTO automatic adaptive gain control AGC according to the RF input level LNOise static large IF gain for low input levels LDIStortion static small IF gain for high input levels Example RST SENSe POWer GAINcont...

Page 1088: ...lues RST ON Example See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol Manual operation See Segmented AGC on page 375 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel CONTrol Boolean Selects common or independent internal source Power settings for the sweep seg ments Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number This suffix is ignored the setting con trols the whole segmented sweep Parameters Boolean ON use independe...

Page 1089: ...ix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters MeasDelay Measurement delay before each partial measurement Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME Range 0 s to 2500 s RST 0 s Default unit s Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM SWE DWEL 1 ...

Page 1090: ... to 0 1 s SEGM SWE DWELl CONT OFF Couple the meas delay in all segments and reset the delay in segment no 1 to the initial value of 0 s Manual operation See Table Columns on page 252 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep GENeration arg0 Sets gets the segment specific sweep modes for segmented linear frequency sweeps Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Number of an existing sweep segment Parameters arg0 STEPped ANAL...

Page 1091: ...ation of the sweep in sweep segment no Seg Segment Time At the same time the command activates separate sweep time setting in all sweep segments SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME CONTrolON Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters SegSweepTime Segment time The minimum segment time depends on the other channel settings in particular on the number of points SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEe...

Page 1092: ...eset the segment sweep time in all sweep segments to the segment sweep time for unsegmented sweeps defined via SENSe Ch SWEep TIME ON will not restore the previous values The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a segment sweep time is entered using SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME or if the channel settings in a sweep segment require a sweep time larger than the unsegmented sweep time RS...

Page 1093: ...NALog CONDition 1083 SENSe Ch SWEep POINts 1083 SENSe Ch SWEep STEP 1084 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME 1085 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO 1085 SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE 1086 SENSe Chn SWEep SRCPort 1087 SENSe SWEep COUNt ALL Sweep Defines the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuousOFF The setting is applied to all channels Use SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt to define the sweep count for a sin...

Page 1094: ...FR 1 1 1E 9 SWE Convert the source frequency at test port no 1 to the range between 2 GHz and 3 GHz SWE AXIS FREQ Port 1 Source Select the source signal at port 1 as the reference signal for fre quency definitions FREQ STAR 3 GHz STOP 4 GHz Shift all frequency ranges by 1 GHz SWE AXIS FREQ Port 2 Source Select the source signal at port 2 as the reference signal for fre quency definitions FREQ STAR...

Page 1095: ...W Port 1 Source Select the source signal at port 1 as the reference signal for power definitions SOUR POW 5 Shift all powers by 5 GHz SWE AXIS POW Port 2 Source Select the source signal at port 2 as the reference signal for power definitions SOUR POW Query the power at test port 2 The response is 0 Manual operation See Stimulus Axis Frequency Power on page 360 SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt Sweep Defines th...

Page 1096: ...e quantity a1 for the default trace and activate the RMS detector SWE DET TIME 1 Specify an observation time of 1 s at each sweep point Manual operation See Detector on page 448 SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl MeasDelay Defines the Meas Delay before each partial measurement or the first partial mea surement see SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl IPOint Setting a delay disables the automatic calculation of the minimum swee...

Page 1097: ...her the measurement delay previously defined via SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl is inserted before all partial measurements or before the first partial measurement only Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters InsertionPoints ALL FIRSt Insertion before all or before the first partial measurement RST ALL Example See SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl Manual operation See All Partial Meas ments First Partial Meas ment on page 2...

Page 1098: ...ode not possible while AVG Detector is used 8 Swept mode not possible Lin Frequency Sweep only supported 9 Swept mode not possible while Arbitrary or Intermodulation Measurement is used 10 Swept mode not possible this combination of features is not yet supported 11 Swept mode not supported Please contact Rohde Schwarz Service for an upgrade This may occur for some old synthesizer hardware Suffix C...

Page 1099: ...SPAN and SENSe Ch SWEep POINts respectively See also the description of manual control and the program example below Range Depends on the current sweep span and the maxi mum number of sweep points Span Frequency max Number of Points 1 Freq Step Size Span Frequency RST Depends on the analyzer model The default step size is equal to the default sweep span of the ana lyzer divided by the default numb...

Page 1100: ... leaves the number of points unchanged but directly affects the delay Range Minimum sweep time to 100000 s RST Minimum sweep time depending on the channel settings Default unit s Example SWE TIME 1 Set a total sweep time of 1 s SWE DWEL Query the delay for each partial measurement SWE TIME 2 Increase the total sweep time to 2 s SWE DWEL Query the meas delay for each partial measurement again The d...

Page 1101: ...licitly using SENSe Ch SWEep TIME or SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl RST ON Example SWE TIME 1 Set a total sweep time of 1 s SWE TIME AUTO A query returns the value 1 Manual operation See Sweep Time Auto on page 241 SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE Format Selects the sweep type i e the sweep variable frequency power time and the posi tion of the sweep points across the sweep range Suffix Ch Channel number SCPI Command Re...

Page 1102: ...ARt SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a dB linear power axis CW time sweep The measurement is performed at constant frequency SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt FIXed and source power SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude and repeated over a specified period of time at constant time intervals POINt CW mode sweep time sweep triggered according to the current trigger s...

Page 1103: ...ee Chap ter 4 3 1 2 Redefined S Parameters on page 112 In get direction it queries whether or not user defined phasical ports are configured Note that a set to ON doesn t have any effect user defined ports can ony be created using SENSe UDSParams Pt PARam on page 1088 Parameters arg0 OFF 0 or ON 1 Example see SENSe UDSParams Pt PARam Manual operation See a wave b wave Source on page 630 SENSe UDSP...

Page 1104: ...ffect the source settings of the R S ZNB ZNBT 7 3 16 1 SOURce FREQuency The SOURce FREQuency commands configure the sources for frequency conver sion measurements and control the frequency and power of the internal signal source SOURce Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer PMFixed 1089 SOURce Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer PMODe 1090 SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt CW 1090 SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt FIXed 1090 SO...

Page 1105: ...stage mixer measure ments SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes IF mixer output signal arg1 FUNDamental FIXed FIXed use a fixed power to be specified via SOURce Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer PMFixed FUNDamental use the channel base power specified via SOURce Ch POWer Pt STARt SOURce Ch POWer Pt STOP SOURce Ch POWer Pt LEVel IMMediate AMPlitude RST Minimum of the analyzer s frequency range Exa...

Page 1106: ... the active channel Parameters FixedFreq Fixed stimulus and analyzer frequency RST 1 GHz Default unit Hz Example FUNC XPOW POW A1 Activate a power sweep and select the wave quantity a1 as mea sured parameter for channel and trace no 1 SOUR FREQ CW 100 MHz Set the CW frequency to 100 MHz Manual operation See CW Frequency on page 431 SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt CONVersion ARBitrary EFRequency Gen Bool...

Page 1107: ...nominator values are rounded to positive integer numbers zero is not allowed RST 1 Default unit 1 Offset See above Numerator Range The converted frequency or frequency range must be within the external generator s frequency range In addition the Offset values are rounded to pos itive or negative multiples of 1 Hz RST 0 Default unit Hz SweepType CW FIXed SWEep SWEep the full formula is applied For ...

Page 1108: ...so includes the Offset Ratio in manual control Range The converted frequency or frequency range must be within the analyzer s frequency range depend ing on the instrument model In addition the Numerator values are rounded to positive or neg ative integer numbers zero is not allowed RST The default frequency frequency range corresponds to the sweep range or CW frequency of the ana lyzer i e Numerat...

Page 1109: ... on page 363 7 3 16 2 SOURce LPORt The SOURce LPORt commands define the logical port configuration balanced ports renumbered single ended ports SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt 1094 SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar 1096 SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt PhysicalPort PhysicalPort Assigns the logical port number LogPt either to the single ended physical port PhysicalPort1 or to a pair of physical ports PhysicalPort1 PhysicalPo...

Page 1110: ...cal ports 1 and 2 to the logical port 1 bal anced and assign physical ports 4 and 3 to logical ports 2 and 3 respectively SOUR LPOR1 Query the physical ports assigned to logical port no 1 The response is 1 2 SOUR GRO 1 2 Define logical ports no 1 and 2 as used group 1 port 3 as unused SOUR GRO Query the port group no 1 The response is 1 2 SOUR GRO CLE ALL SOUR GRO Dissolve all port groups and repe...

Page 1111: ...t Predefined on page 441 7 3 16 3 SOURce GROup The SOURce GROup commands define the group of un used logical ports SOURce Ch GROup COUNt 1096 SOURce Ch GROup Grp 1097 SOURce Ch GROup Grp CLEar 1097 SOURce Ch GROup Grp DPORt COUNt 1098 SOURce Ch GROup Grp NAME 1098 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORDer 1098 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORTs 1099 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts 1099 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORt PhyPort DPORt ...

Page 1112: ...In get direction also port groups created using SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts can be queried R S ZNBT only Parameters arg0 arg1 First and last logical port number in the port group Must be omitted if the command is used as a query Example See SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt on page 1094 SOURce Ch GROup Grp CLEar arg0 Dissolves port group Grp or all port groups created using SOURce Ch GROup Grp on page 1097 or ...

Page 1113: ...e Ch GROup Grp PPORt PhyPort DPORt Suffix Ch Channel number Grp Port group number Parameters NumPorts Number of connected ports Example See SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORt PhyPort DPORt Manual operation See Controls and Functions on page 370 SOURce Ch GROup Grp NAME GroupName R S ZNBT only Sets gets the name of port group Grp Port groups can be created using SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts Suffix Ch Channel ...

Page 1114: ... the master group as an arbitrary selection of logical ports The ports do not have to be numbered consecutively as for port groups defined via SOURce Ch GROup Grp See SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt on how to define logical ports Note Setting SOURce Ch GROup Grp or SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORTs dissolves the port groups created using SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts R S ZNBT only Suffix Ch Channel number Grp In set d...

Page 1115: ...Nt and SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORt PhyPort DPORt Suffix Ch Channel number Grp Port group number Parameters pport1 pport2 Physical VNA port numbers Example See SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORt PhyPort DPORt Manual operation See Controls and Functions on page 370 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORt PhyPort DPORt DestinationPort R S ZNBT only In Set direction this command connects physical VNA port PhyPort to DUT Grp p...

Page 1116: ...ure ments on an R S ZNB ZNBT with Internal Second Source Note For a R S ZNB with a single internal source or a R S ZNBT frequency shifted par allel measurements are not available The port groups have to be set up exactly as in the VNA GUI when Enabled is selected in the Define Parallel Measurement dialog The measurement is then performed on port group 1 ports 1 and 2 and port group 2 ports 3 and 4...

Page 1117: ...Command Reference R S ZNB ZNBT 1102 User Manual 1173 9163 02 38 Grp Parameters arg0 ON OFF activates or deactivates frequency shifted parallel measurements SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 1118: ...PORT3 DPORt 2 SOUR GRO2 PPORT4 DPORt 1 INIT IMM WAI Assign DUT Ports to VNA Ports CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc2 S34 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 FEED Trc2 WAI Add and display a second trace for the second DUT note that S34 with VNA poert numbers corresponds to S21 at the second DUT SOURce GROup SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFSet DVALue 6 MHz SOURce GROup SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset MODE DIRect Set minimu...

Page 1119: ...ich is actually used may be larger than the minimum offset as the firm ware chooses the smallest multiple of the frequency step size between the points in a segment or in a linear frequency sweep respectively which is larger than the minimum offset Suffix Ch Channel number If unspecified this parameter is set to 1 Grp Parameters arg0 DIRect BANDwidth DIRect The minimum frequency offset to be used ...

Page 1120: ...nimum frequency offset To get the resulting frequency offset the minimum frequency off set is rounded to a multiple of the current frequency step size Range 0 Hz to 17 MHz RST 1 MHz Default unit Hz Example See SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset STATe Manual operation See Minimum Offset on page 372 SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset BWFactor arg0 This command is related to Paral...

Page 1121: ...is used to query the operation mode of Simultaneous Measurement with Frequency Offset The list below contains all possible return values of this query Please note that this query will return an error if the channel specified by Ch does not contain any trace This is due to the fact that without traces no measurements are performed so that no information about Simultaneous Measurement with Frequency...

Page 1122: ...ent with Frequency Offset is not availa ble 7 stimulus buffer too small The stimulus buffer must contain at least two elements 8 invalid offset or frequency step size The frequency offset which is actually used and which is deter mined both by the minimum frequency offset and the frequency step size may not be too large as in that case the VNA is not able to simultaneously measure at different fre...

Page 1123: ... SOURce POWer CORRection PMETer ID 1109 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA 1109 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PORT PhyPt 1109 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PARameter Wv 1110 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection IMODulation PORT 1112 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire 1112 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire VERification RESult 1114 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect AVERage COUNt 1114 SOUR...

Page 1124: ... the analyzer Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 1205 Manual operation See Power Meter on page 333 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA Source CorrData SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PORT PhyPt Source CorrData Reads or writes scalar source power correction data sets A power correction data set contains n real values where Each value corresponds to the ratio of the act...

Page 1125: ...urce port SOUR POW CORR DATA A1 Query the correction values The analyzer returns 10 comma separated real numbers SOUR POW CORR DATA A1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Replace the correction values by ten new numbers Manual operation See Apply on page 289 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PARameter Wv PowerCalSettingType Index Gets settings of the available power calibrations Suffix Ch Number of the calibrated c...

Page 1126: ...ations involving switch matrices this indicates the test ports on the VNA itself Returns a comma separated list of port pairs TestPort VnaPort MVNA For calibrations involving switch matrices this indicates the mapping between matrix ports and VNA ports for matrix Index Returns a comma separated list of port pairs MatrixVnaPort VnaPort MTESt For calibrations involving switch matrices this indicates...

Page 1127: ...ter to identify the source port COMBINER combiner output PORT n analyzer port n separate port no by blank e g PORT 4 GEN n external generator port n separate port no by blank e g GEN 1 RST COMBINER Example RST SOURce POWer CORRection IMODulation PORT PORT 4 Select the analyzer port no 4 as a source port for the receiver power calibration Manual operation See Src for Rcvr Cal on page 384 SOURce Ch ...

Page 1128: ...f all other sources during the calibration sweep SOUR POWer CORR COLL METH RRAF PMR 2 Enable fast power correction with two power meter readings SOUR POW CORR NRE 2 COLL AVER NTOL 0 5 Increase the number of readings and reduce the power toler ance to improve the accuracy SOURce POW CORR COLL CFAC 0 9 Reduce the correction factor to 0 9 SOURce POW CORR PSELect PPOW PPOWer 5 Define reference receive...

Page 1129: ...t verification sweep acquired Example RST SOURce POWer CORRection NREadings 2 SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect AVERage NTOLerance 0 5 Increase the number of readings and reduce the power toler ance to improve the accuracy SOURce POWer CORRection ACQuire PORT 1 Perform a source power calibration using port 1 as a source port SOURce POWer CORRection ACQuire VERification RESult Query the result of the...

Page 1130: ...Pt Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the tolerance value is valid for all sources Parameters Tolerance Tolerance value Range 0 001 dB to 1000 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Flatness Cal Tolerance on page 333 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect CFACtor Convergence Specifies the convergence factor for a source...

Page 1131: ...er PhyPt CORRection ACQuire SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection DATA PARameter Wv COUNt Gets the number of available power calibrations both source power and measurement receiver Use SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PARameter Wv to retrieve the related settings Suffix Ch Number of the calibrated channel PhyPt This suffix is ignored Wv This suffix is ignored Usage Query only Manual operation See Port O...

Page 1132: ...verview on page 341 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection IMODulation LTONe ACQuire Starts the source calibration for the lower tone 1st power calibration step for intermo dulation measurements stores and applies the calibration data The external power meter used is selected via SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection PMETer ID Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt Port number This suffix is ignored the a...

Page 1133: ...t the previ ously selected source port 3 CORR POW IMOD ACQ Start receiver power calibration at the previously selected receive port 2 CALC PAR SDEF IM_Meas IP3UI Create a new channel no 2 and a trace named IM_Meas Select the upper 3rd order intercept point at the DUT input as a measured quantity Usage Event Manual operation See Start Cal Sweep on page 387 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection IMODulati...

Page 1134: ...her sources during the calibration sweep for channel Ch Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the setting is valid for all sources Parameters Boolean ON other sources not necessarily switched off OFF other sources switched off during the calibration sweep RST ON Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Switch Off...

Page 1135: ...librated port number This parameter is ignored the parame ter is valid for all sources Parameters CalPower CPOWer PPOWer PPOWer use cal power value defined via SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection PPOWer CPOWer use port power value RST PPOWer Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Reference Receiver Cal Power on page 335 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection STATe Boolean...

Page 1136: ...ttings are valid for all sources Parameters Boolean Enables ON or disables OFF the two port transmission coeffi cients RST n a Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration Manual operation See Test Setup on page 336 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration Boolean Selects the position of the additional two port in the test setup Suffix Ch Calibrated channe...

Page 1137: ...ic Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna PowerMeterCorr MMEM LOAD CORR TCO C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna PowerMeterCorr Test pmcl Re load the stored power meter correction list file Example SOUR POW CORR TCO DEL1 Delete the first point in the list SOUR POW CORR TCO DEL ALL SOUR POW CORR TCO Clear the entire list Query whether the transmission coefficients are still taken into account The respon...

Page 1138: ...mber of point in the list This suffix is only used for queries Parameters Frequency Stimulus frequency value If several points with identical fre quencies are added the analyzer automatically ensures a fre quency spacing of 1 Hz Range Stimulus values outside the frequency range of the analyzer are allowed RST n a Default unit Hz TransCoeff Transmission coefficient Range 300 dB to 200 dB RST n a De...

Page 1139: ...are valid for all sources ListNo Number of point in the list Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration Manual operation See Frequency Transm Coefficients Insert Delete Delete All on page 337 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient FEED Trace Selects a trace which provides the points for the power loss list Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number This parameter is igno...

Page 1140: ... a Default unit Hz TransCoeff Transmission coefficient Range 300 dB to 200 dB RST n a Default unit dB Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration Manual operation See Frequency Transm Coefficients Insert Delete Delete All on page 337 SOURce POWer Contd The SOURce POWer commands define the power of the internal signal source SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude ...

Page 1141: ...r SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate SLOPe and a port specific power offset SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Parameters IntSourcePow Internal source power Range The usable power range is frequency dependent refer to the data sheet RST 10 dBm Default unit dBm Example FUNC XFR POW RAT B1 A2 Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1 A2 as mea sured parameter for channel and tr...

Page 1142: ...LY SOUR POW2 OFFS 6 CPAD Replace the source power at port 1 by 6 dBm the source power at port 2 by 0 dBm The powers at the remaining ports if available are not affected Manual operation See Port Overview on page 334 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate SLOPe Slope Defines a linear factor to modify the internal source power at port PhyPt as a func tion of the stimulus frequency Suffix Ch Channel n...

Page 1143: ...th contains an ampli fier with a 30 dB gain SYST COMM RDEV GEN1 DEF Ext Gen 1 SME02 gpib0 21 Configure an R S SME02 generator as external generator no 1 assigning the name Ext Gen 1 and a GPIB address 21 SOUR POW GEN1 OFFS 5 ONLY Set the source power of generator no 1 to 5 dBm SOUR POW CORR GEN1 LEV OFFS 30 Specify the gain of the amplifier in the signal path between the external generator and the...

Page 1144: ... input port of the DUT SOUR POW CORR ACQ PORT 2 Perform a source power calibration using port 2 as a source port and the target power of 35 dBm Manual operation See Port Overview on page 334 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt GENerator Gen OFFSet Offset Mode Defines the power of an external generator or its power offset relative to the channel power SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Suffix Ch Cha...

Page 1145: ...hyPt GENerator Gen PERManent STATe Boolean Defines whether the external generator is available as an external signal source in the test setup External generators are always on for all partial measurements Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer This suffix is ignored the gen erator is selected via Gen Gen Generator number Parameters Boolean ON generator no PhyPt is availabl...

Page 1146: ...ether the source power is permanently on Note If External Switch Matrices are part of the RF connection configuration operation with Internal Second Source is not supported In this case only external generators can be used as permanent signal sources Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer Parameters Boolean ON power at port PhyPt is permanently on OFF power is only on for ...

Page 1147: ...SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt REDuce SDELay SettlingDelay Deprecated superseded by SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt SWEepend SDELay If power reduction at sweep end is enabled SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt REDuce STATe ON this defines the settling delay at subsequent sweep starts i e the time between power up and sweep start when a new sweep is requested This is a global setting Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is ignore...

Page 1148: ...valid for all ports Parameters SweepEndModes AUTO REDuce KEEP AUTO at sweep end restore the power at sweep start REDuce at sweep end reduce the output power as if the chan nel base power was set to its minimum possible value KEEP at sweep end keep the power at its current level Example SOURce POWer SWEepend MODE REDuce Reduce power at sweep end SOURce POWer SWEepend SDELay 0 01 Use a settling dela...

Page 1149: ...is ignored because the selected power sweep range applies to all source ports used in the active channel Parameters StopPower Start or stop power of the sweep Range 150 dBm to 100 dBm The usable power range is frequency dependent refer to the data sheet Increment 0 01 dB RST 25 dBm start power 0 dBm stop power Default unit dBm Example SWE TYPE POW Activate a power sweep SOUR POW STAR 6 STOP 10 Sel...

Page 1150: ...le INTegrity HARDware NTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev NTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware PTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev PTRansition 1137 STATus QUEue NEXT 1138 STATus PRESet Configures the status reporting system such that device dependent events are repor ted at ...

Page 1151: ...x Lev Selects one of the two QUEStionable LIMit registers see STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 on page 668 Example STAT QUES LIMit COND Query the CONDition part of the QUEStionable LIMit1 reg ister to retrieve the current status of the limit check Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ENABle BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware ENABle BitPat...

Page 1152: ...ters BitPattern Range 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST n a Example STAT QUES LIM2 NTR 6 Set bits no 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable LIMit2 NTRansition register STATus QUEStionable PTRansition BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware PTRansition BitPattern STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev PTRansition BitPattern Configures the positive tran...

Page 1153: ... controlled by the R S ZNB ZNBT SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL CONNection 1139 SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL MMEMory STATe 1139 SYSTem COMMunicate CODec 1140 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1140 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF DCLear SUPPress 1140 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF INIT WAIT 1141 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF LPORt ALIGn 1141 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator 1141 SYSTem COMMunicate NET HOST...

Page 1154: ...Vice SMATrix Matr DEFine 1156 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MLVNa 1157 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MLTest 1158 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MTESt 1159 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MVNA 1159 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr RELays SWITch COUNt 1160 SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL CONNection CalStandard Port SecondPor...

Page 1155: ...is play titles Parameters Codec ASCii UTF8 SJIS ASCii 8 bit ANSI default UTF8 UTF 8 SJIS Shift JIS Manual operation See Remote Encoding on page 603 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess GBIBAddress Sets the GPIB address of the analyzer Parameters GBIBAddress GPIB address integer number Range 0 to 30 Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 10 Set the GPIB address to 10 RST SYST COMM GPIB ADDR After a reset the ...

Page 1156: ...fault logical port assignment L1 P1 L2 P2 L3 P3 L4 P4 the remote command SOUR LPOR1 1 2 by default ALIGn ON generates aligned logical ports L1 P1 P2 L2 P3 L3 P4 With ALIGn OFF the result is L1 P1 P2 L3 P3 L4 P4 and L2 does not exist Manual operation See Advanced on page 619 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator Terminator Sets the receive terminator of the analyzer The receive terminator indica...

Page 1157: ...ted Parameters Address Name USB address of a connected calibration unit string vari able The names of all connected cal units can be queried using SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL Example SYST COMM RDEV AKAL ADDR ALL Query the names of all connected calibration units SYST COMM RDEV AKAL ADDR ZV Z52 1234 Select the cal unit named ZV Z52 1234 for calibration CORR COLL AUTO 1 2 4 Perform a...

Page 1158: ...uery all characterizations stored on the connected calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL SDATa My_calkit OPEN S11 1 Query the characterization data for the characterization named My_calkit and an open standard one port port restriction A characterization with the queried properties must be available on the cal unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL WARMup Query the warmup status of the ca...

Page 1159: ...CalKitFileName Queries the creation date and time of a cal unit characterization cal kit file CalUnitName A possible response is Friday May 26 2011 10 13 40 An empty string is returned if no calibration unit is connected If several cal units are USB connected to the analyzer the command queries the cal unit selected via SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Query parameters CalKitFileName String...

Page 1160: ...r gender A possible response for a two port calibration is 1 N 50 Ohm MALE 2 N 50 Ohm MALE An empty string is returned if no calibration unit is connected If several cal units are USB connected to the analyzer the command queries the cal unit selected via SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Query parameters CalKitFileName String parameter containing the name of a cal unit characteriza tion Fac...

Page 1161: ...THRough OPEN SHORt MATCh MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MOPen FOPen MSHort FSHort MMTCh FMTCh Standard types for a description refer to table Standard types and their parameters The standard types of a particular charac terization can be queried via SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT STANdard CATalog The factory characterization usually does not contain data for a through standard therefore a que...

Page 1162: ...of all configured external generators The response is a string containing a comma separated list of generator numbers Suffix Gen Number of the configured generator This suffix is ignored the command affects all generators Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN1 DEF Ext Gen 1 SME02 gpib0 21 SYST COMM RDEV GEN2 DEF Ext Gen 2 SME02 gpib0 22 Configure two R S SME02 generators as external generators no 1 and 2 ass...

Page 1163: ...rameter An empty string means that no particular name is assigned to the genera tor Driver Generator type string parameter The generator type is identi cal with the name of the generator driver file gen stored in the resources extdev subdirectory of the analyzer s program directory Type the driver file name as shown in the Add Exter nal Generator dialog i e without the file extension gen example u...

Page 1164: ...igured Devices on page 626 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen SEPMode Type Defines the external generator power control after the sweep end Suffix Gen Generator number Parameters Type OFF LOW KEEP USER OFF power is switched off LOW switch to min power KEEP keep power at the value selected via SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt GENerator Gen OFFSet USER set to end power selected via SYSTem COMMunicate RDE...

Page 1165: ...nd 2 assigning names and serial numbers SYST COMM RDEV PMET CAT Query the power meter numbers The response is 1 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Query the number of configured power meters The response is 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Configured Devices on page 622 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CONFigure AUTO STATe Boolean Enables or disables Auto Config NRP Zxx If the function is enabled ...

Page 1166: ...ritten Power meters can be assigned several times so that the number of configured power meters is practically unlimited Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Zero on page 333 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr DEFine PmtrName Driver Interface Address Configures an external power meter and adds it to the list of available power meters Suffix Pmtr Number of the configured power meter Power mete...

Page 1167: ...fig NRP Zxx if it was enabled previously SYST COMM RDEV PMET1 DEF USB Power Meter NRP Z55 usb 100045 Configure an R S NRP power meter as external power meter no 1 assigning the name USB Power Meter and a serial num ber 100045 SYST COMM RDEV PMET DEL Clear the power meter configuration table SYST COMM RDEV PMET DEF Query the power meter configuration The analyzer returns an error message because th...

Page 1168: ...m COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END The modified configuration will not be applied until the end of this transaction The new configuration is discarded i e the previous configuration remains active roll back The transaction wil be terminated Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END Ends a manual RF connection configuration if the configuration is valid it will be acti v...

Page 1169: ...ections between the VNA a set of switch matrices and the DUT test ports At transaction start the R S ZNB ZNBT creates an in memory copy of the active con figuration and strips off all RF conncections from this copy Subsequent RF connection actions such as SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MVNA and SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MTESt operate on the copy However t...

Page 1170: ... SMATrix1 CONFigure MTESt 1 1 2 2 9 3 10 4 Configure 4 matrix test ports only matrix test port 1 is test port 1 matrix test port 2 is test port 2 matrix test port 9 is test port 3 and matrix test port 10 is test port 4 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END Apply the manual RF connection configuration Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure TVNA TestPort1 VNAPort1 Sets g...

Page 1171: ... or Direct Control Returns a comma separated list Driver_1 Interface_1 Address_1 Driver_N Interface_N Address_N one triple Driver_n Interface_n Address_n for each detected switch matrix Matr 1 N Use SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine to configure them Usage Query only Manual operation See Scan Instruments on page 632 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine Unused Driver Interfac...

Page 1172: ...ZN Z84 42 USB 101142 Register switch matrix no 1 type R S ZN Z84 2x24 with serial number 101142 at USB interface SYST COMM RDEV SMATrix2 DEF ZV Z81 05 LAN 10 10 10 10 Register switch matrix no 2 type R S ZV Z81 model 05 at IP address 10 10 10 10 SYST COMM RDEV SMATrix3 DEF ZN Z84 42 DIRECTCTRL 1319 4500K02 101143 Register switch matrix no 3 type R S ZN Z84 2x24 with serial number 101143 at Direct ...

Page 1173: ... panel labels of the matrix test ports instead By default these labels are only available for some matrix types Note a manual RF connection configuration must be performed within a transaction enclosed by the commands SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure STARt and SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END The modified configuration will not be applied until the end of this transacti...

Page 1174: ...nicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure STARt Manual operation See Edit Test Port Connection on page 638 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MVNA MatrixVNAPort VNAPort Sets gets the RF connections between switch matrix and VNA as a comma separated list of port numbers Note a manual RF connection configuration must be performed within a transaction enclosed by the commands SYSTem COMMunicate...

Page 1175: ...2 SYSTem DISPlay BAR STATus STATe 1162 SYSTem DISPlay BAR STOols STATe 1162 SYSTem DISPlay BAR TITLe STATe 1162 SYSTem DISPlay BAR TOOLs STATe 1162 SYSTem DISPlay COLor 1162 SYSTem DISPlay CONDuctances 1162 SYSTem DISPlay DIALogs SETup MCAL STATe 1163 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate 1163 SYSTem ERRor NEXT 1163 SYSTem ERRor ALL 1163 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote 1164 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay INFO 1164 SYSTem ERRor...

Page 1176: ...executing this com mand Setting parameters Dialogs MAIN CKIT MAIN open the Calibration Start Cal softtool tab CKIT open the Calibration Kits dialog Usage Setting only SYSTem DATE Year Month Day The command queries or defines the instrument s current date setting The setting command requires administrator rights refer to Chapter 10 1 1 Windows Operating System on page 1250 Parameters Year Year four...

Page 1177: ...r SYSTem DISPlay BAR TITle OFF HKEY OFF MENU OFF Hide the title bar hardkey bar and menu bar Manual operation See Tool Bar on page 572 SYSTem DISPlay COLor ColorScheme Selects the color scheme for all diagram areas in the active recall set Parameters ColorScheme DBACkground LBACkground BWLStyles BWSolid DBACkground dark background LBACkground light background BWLStyles black and white line styles ...

Page 1178: ...h the display on and show the current trace This parameter can be used for occasional checks of the measure ment results or settings The measurement is continued how ever the measurement results are not updated Compared to the ON setting ONCE does not slow down the measurement speed Example SYST DISP UPD ON Switch the display on to view the traces and diagrams SYSTem ERRor NEXT Queries and at the ...

Page 1179: ...ISPlay STATe OFF ON For SCPI error 113 Undefined header no tooltip is displayed Parameters Boolean ON OFF enable disable display of information popups for remote control errors RST ON Example SYST ERR DISP STATe ON REM ON Switch the display of information popups for remote command errors on FREQ STAR 1 Generate a Remote Error 222 Data out of range tooltip Manual operation See Show Remote Error Inf...

Page 1180: ...e SYSTem ERRor DISPlay ERRor and SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote Manual operation See Show Instrument Messages on page 609 SYSTem FIRMware UPDate NWASetupFile Installs a firmware version stored in a VNA setup file msi on the analyzer The installation is automatic and does not require any further action Setting parameters NWASetupFile String variable for the name and directory of a VNA setup file msi E...

Page 1181: ...r maximum frequency Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Frequency Stop Frequency Center Frequency Span Frequency on page 430 SYSTem IDENtify STRing InstId Defines an identity string for the network analyzer The query is equivalent to IDN Parameters InstId String parameter containing the instrument identity Example See SYSTem IDENtify FACTory Manual ope...

Page 1182: ...he local keys SYSTem LANGuage Language Specifies the remote language for the analyzer Parameters Language Command syntax for the analyzer string variable SCPI R S ZNB ZNBT specific command set the analyzer supports all commands described in this documentation ZVR ZVABT compatibility with network analyzers of the R S ZVR and R S ZVA B T families PNA HP8510 HP8720 HP8753 HP8714 HP8530 ENA compatibil...

Page 1183: ...actory setting The analyzer returns a comma separated list of software and hardware options Usage Event Manual operation See Define IDN OPT on page 619 SYSTem OPTions STRing Options Defines an option string for the network analyzer The query is equivalent to OPT Parameters Options String parameter containing the available options Example See SYSTem OPTions FACTory Manual operation See Define IDN O...

Page 1184: ...reset the active recall set is reset only SYST PRES Reset the parameters of the current recall set Manual operation See PRESET HARDKEY on page 638 SYSTem PRESet REMote STATe arg0 Defines the behavior of the RST and SYSTem PRESet DUMMy commands Off default RST and SYSTem PRESet restore the factory preset settings On If a valid user preset file is available RST and SYSTem PRESet restore the user def...

Page 1185: ...e Preset Configuration on page 605 SYSTem PRESet USER CAL PresetUserCal Selects a calibration from the calibration pool that shall be restored during a user defined preset The corresponding cal group file PresetUserCal cal must be available in the cal pool directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data Parameters PresetUserCal Name of the cal group i e the name of the cal gr...

Page 1186: ...ISPlay UPDate OFF In this scenario a change of the channel or trace settings is usually not taken into account immediately The analyzer waits until the end of the current sweep sequence and changes all settings made during the last sweep period when the next single sweep sequence is initiated Several settings can be made en bloc which generally saves time SYSTem SETTings UPDate ONCE causes the ana...

Page 1187: ...eriod of 10 seconds Setting parameters Unit HALT REBoot ABORt CLOSe RESTart HALT Windows is shutdown afer a time out period of 20 seconds REBoot Windows is restarted afer a time out period of 20 seconds ABORt Abort a Windows shutdown restart This can only be used during the time out period CLOSe Close the firmware RESTart Restart the firmware Example SYST SHUT Switch the analyzer to standby state ...

Page 1188: ...ou can use the buttons in Remote softtool panels If you switch back to manual control the drag and drop functions e g for markers are still available DIAGrams lock the drag and drop functions in diagrams SCReen lock the entire screen including the remote screen buttons RST n a RST does not affect the tochscreen lock set ting Example SYSTem TSLock SCReen Lock the entire screen Manual operation See ...

Page 1189: ... keys SYSTem VERSion Returns the SCPI version number to which the analyzer complies The analyzer com plies to the final SCPI version 1999 0 Example SYST VERS Query the SCPI version The response is 1999 0 Usage Query only 7 3 19 TRACe Commands The TRACe commands handle active trace data and trace data stored in the ana lyzer s internal memory Trace data formats Trace data is transferred in either A...

Page 1190: ...Ce COPY TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL CALCulate Chn MATH EXPRession DEFine TRACe COPY MemTraceName DataTraceName Copies a data trace to a memory trace The trace to be copied can be specified by two alternative methods As the active data trace of channels 1 to 4 CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA If a mathematical trace is active the associated data trace is copied As a trace with a ...

Page 1191: ...OPY Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA Copy the current state of the created trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area diagram area no 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Data to Destination on page 487 TRACe COPY MATH MemTraceName DataTraceName Copies a mathematical trace to a memory trace...

Page 1192: ... mnemonic SENSe1 CALC MATH SDEF Trc1 2 CALC MATH STAT ON Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trace by 2 Acti vate the mathematical mode and display the mathematical trace instead of the data trace TRAC COPY MATH Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA CALC MATH STAT OFF Copy the current state of the mathematical trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed Switch the display back to...

Page 1193: ...time of 10 ms Manual operation See Delay on page 403 TRIGger Ch SEQuence LINK MeasSequence Selects the triggered measurement sequence The identifier for the sequence is a string variable Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters MeasSequence Triggered measurement sequence string variable SWEep trigger event starts an entire sweep SEGMent trigger event starts a sweep segment if segmented frequency sweep ...

Page 1194: ...t see TRIGger Ch SEQuence LINK DelayTime Delay time Range 0 s to 13680 s Increment 10 ms RST 0 s Default unit s Example See TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SOURce Manual operation See Source Slope Level Delay on page 404 TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SLOPe Num MeasSequence Slope Qualifies whether the multiple trigger events occur on the rising or on the falling edge or on the beginning of the high low...

Page 1195: ...igger 1 and 2 1 or 2 MANual trigger event generated by pressing the Manual Trig ger softkey Example TRIG MULT SOUR SWE EXT1 SOUR POIN EXT2 Select external trigger 1 as a trigger source for the entire sweep external trigger 2 as a trigger source for each point TRIG MULT SLOP1 SWE POS SLOP2 POIN POS Trigger on the rising edges of the external trigger signals 1 and 2 TRIG MULT HOLD POIN 1ms Define a ...

Page 1196: ...of the USER PORT on the rear panel MANual trigger event generated by pressing the Manual Trig ger softkey MULTiple multiple trigger mode configured by TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple commands Example TRIG SOUR MAN Activate manual trigger mode The analyzer starts the next mea surement sequence when the Manual Trigger button is pressed Manual operation See FreeRun External Manual Multiple Triggers on p...

Page 1197: ...re Send the output trigger pulses before data acquisition starts TRIGger CHANnel AUXiliary INTerval SWEep Send one output trigger pulse per sweep TRIGger CHANnel AUXiliary OPOLarity POSitive Select positive polarity for the output trigger pulses TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n DURation TrigOutDuration Specifies the width of the output trigger pulses at EXT TRIG OUT The trigger duration must be shor...

Page 1198: ...e Figure 7 1 Suffix Ch Channel number n Auxiliary channel number This suffix is ignored it can be set to 1 or omitted Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST NEGative Example See TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n ENABle TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n POSition Type Specifies whether the trigger output signal is sent before or after data acquisition see Figure 7 1 Choose this setting according to the ext...

Page 1199: ...n MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth 1189 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DELTa STATe 1189 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion TARGet 1189 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SELect 1190 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MAXimum 1190 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MINimum 1190 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch LEFT 1191 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch NEXT 1191 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch RIGHt 1191 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARc...

Page 1200: ...erwise the limit line can not be displayed and no limit check is possible The parameters form three groups FLIN FLOG FSEG and FSINgle select frequency units for the limit line TLIN and TLOG select time units PLIN PLOG and PSINgle select power units RST FLIN Default unit Hz for FLIN FLOG FSEG FSINGle s for TLIN TLOG dBm for PLIN PLOG PSINgle Example SWE TYPE POW Select a power sweep CALC LIM CONT D...

Page 1201: ...ate Chn LIMit RDOMain SPACing Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters UnitRef COMPlex MAGNitude PHASe REAL IMAGinary SWR GDELay L C Keyword for the physical unit of the response values The parameters form four groups COMPlex REAL IMAGinary and SWR select dimensionless numbers U for the limit line MAG Nitude selects relative units dB PHASe selects phase units ...

Page 1202: ...uffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF switch limit check on or off RST OFF Example CALC LIM LOW 10 0 0 10 Define two limit line segments covering the entire sweep range Two upper limit line segments with default response values are created in addition CALC LIM UPP 0 5 5 0 Change the response values of the upper limit line segments CALC LIM LOW STAT ON...

Page 1203: ...4D R1R2 R1R3 R1R4 R2R1 R2R3 R2R4 R3R1 R3R2 R3R4 R4R1 R4R2 R4R3 Measurement parameter see list of parameters below TestPortNum Test port number drive port for wave quantities and ratios ignored for S parameters Example CALC4 PAR DEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND STAT ON Create diagram area no 1 DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED CH4...

Page 1204: ...tive trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4 Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 dB to 100 dB Increment 0 03 dB RST 3 dB Default unit dB Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DELTa STATe Boolean Switches the delta mode for marker Mk on ...

Page 1205: ...patibility with ZVR programs Use CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute to select a search mode and at the same time initiate the search The CALCulate Ch MARKer Mk SEARch CALCulate Ch MARKer Mk MAXimum or CALCulate Ch MARKer Mk MINimum functions also select the search mode Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 For a bandfilter search BF...

Page 1206: ...ommands are the ZVR compatible equivalents of CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECuteLPEak NPEak RPEak Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Usage Event CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch IMMediate Initiates a search according to the search function selected with CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SELect The marker must be created before using...

Page 1207: ...py the current state of the default trace Trc1 to a memory trace named Mem2 Trc1 The memory trace is not displayed CALC MATH CH1DATA MDATA2 Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trace by the stored memory trace The mathematical trace is not displayed CALC MATH STAT ON Display the mathematical trace instead of the active data trace DIAGnostic SERVice FUNCtion SFId1 SFId2 Activates a service...

Page 1208: ...he attenuation for the received waves This command is available if at least one of the Receiver Step Attenuators is installed For redefined physical ports see SENSe UDSParams Pt PARam the respective measurement receiver b wave is significant E g if a receover step attenuator is installed for physical port 1 then an attenuation factor can be applied to the redefined port receiving b1 Note INPut Phy...

Page 1209: ...F CHAN2 STAT ON INST CHANNEL2 Create channel no 2 and select it as the active channel OUTPut Chn DPORt Port Selects a source port for the stimulus signal drive port The setting acts on the active trace The effect of the drive port selection depends on the measurement parameter associated to the active trace If an S parameter S out in is measured the second port number index in input port of the DU...

Page 1210: ...h Channel number This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel independent Parameters ConnType Connector type one of the following identifiers N50 N75 N 50 Ω or N 75 Ω connectors PC7 PC35 PC292 PC 7 PC 3 5 or 2 92 mm connectors USER no User defined connectors UserConn1 UserConn2 SMA User defined connector type SMA Note This command only supports ZVR compatible connector types For gen...

Page 1211: ... MMEMory LOAD CKIT command Agilent cal kit files can be imported manually and converted into calkit files Example CORR CKIT INST C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits ZCAN ck Load the previously created R S ZVR cal kit file ZCAN ck from the default cal kit directory MMEM STOR CKIT ZCAN C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits ZCAN calkit Store the imported ...

Page 1212: ... 2 the second number denotes the number of the standard 1 to 3 RST ON Dispersion Optional status parameter for UTHRough standard OFF unknown through standard is non dispersive ON unknown through standard is dispersive RST OFF Delay Optional entry of delay time or phase for UTHRough standard numeric entry of the delay time in ps for non dispersive standards or of an estimate of the phase at the sta...

Page 1213: ...ntroduce any systematic errors none of the measurement results acquired previously SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire is taken into account Tip The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction which you can replace with your own external correction data You may have acquired the external data in a previous session or even on an other instru ment If...

Page 1214: ... in continuous mode Usage Event SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DUMMy Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired one or two port mea surement results SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire stores them and applies them to the calibrated channel Ch To avoid incompatibilities older sys tem error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal pool MMEMory STORe C...

Page 1215: ...rrors see SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault G and H matrices The 7 term calibration types named Txx e g TOM TSM TRM TRL TNA are based on a network analyzer with two ports i and j each equipped with a test receiver and a reference receiver The system errors are described in terms of two error two ports PG and PH The error two port PG is assigned to port i of the analyzer Its transmission mat...

Page 1216: ...future extensions SCORR11 load match at port 1 SCORR12 reverse transmission tracking between port 2 and port 1 G11 G22 G matrix elements see above H22 H matrix elements see above The error terms are dimensionless complex numbers RST n a Parameter Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault The different calibration types of the analyzer provide the following error terms Calibration type P...

Page 1217: ...define the complete set of loss offset parameters SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt MAGNitude is equivalent to SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt OFFSet Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters OffsetLoss Frequency independent part of the offset loss Range 200 dB to 200 dB Increment 0 0001 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB SENSe Ch FREQuency MODE F...

Page 1218: ...t specific Seg Sweep segment number This suffix is ignored the command is instrument specific Parameters Boolean ON OFF No effect RST ON If used as a query the command returns the information that overlapping sweep segments are supported ON SENSe Ch SWEep SPACing StimulusFreq Defines the frequency vs time characteristics of a frequency sweep Lin Frequency or Log Frequency The command has no effect...

Page 1219: ...meters SweepType Single string parameter defining the sweep type and the param eter to be measured string sweep_type parameter Range See list of strings below RST XFR POW S21 arg1 B1 B2 A1 A2 ABSa1 ABSa2 DCIN1 DCIN2 arg2 B1 B2 A1 A2 ABSa1 ABSa2 DCIN1 DCIN2 Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 The trace automatic...

Page 1220: ...KFACtor POWer MUFactor Lev Stability factor K Stability factors μ1 or μ2 VOLTage DC DCIN1 DCIN2 Output DC 1 V DC 10 V DC Input 1 or 2 Note The mnemonics POWer and VOLTage are not used in output strings SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ACQuire Sensor Initiates a source power calibration for the source port PhyPt using an external power meter no 1 or 2 To initiate a source power calibration ...

Page 1221: ...Range MDATA n where n 1 to 8 Example SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 TRAC COPY Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA Copy the current state of the created trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area...

Page 1222: ...DATA Query the 20 response values of the created trace according to the previous format settings Usage Query only TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL Stimulus Returns the stimulus values of the active data trace or memory trace see Table 7 14 Note To read the stimulus values of an arbitrary data or memory trace use CALCulate Chn DATA STIMulus Query parameters Stimulus CH1Data CH2Data CH3Data CH4Data CH1Mem CH...

Page 1223: ...xamples for programming tasks that almost every user will encounter when working with the R S ZNB ZNBT 8 1 1 Typical Stages of a Remote Control Program A typical remote control program comprises the following stages 1 Performing the basic instrument settings 2 Adjusting the test setup 3 Initiating the measurement command synchronization 4 Retrieving measurement results Very often steps 3 and 4 or ...

Page 1224: ...itch off the measurement after one sweep reduce the number of sweep points RST INITiate1 CONTinuous OFF SENSe1 SWEep POINts 2 Avoid a delay time between different partial measurements and before the start of the sweeps is default setting SENSe1 SWEep TIME AUTO ON TRIGger1 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate Select the widest bandwidth compatible with your measurement SENSe1 BANDwidth RESolution 10 Adjust yo...

Page 1225: ...nd of the sweep INITiate1 IMMediate WAI Continue program sequence 2 Start single sweep use OPC If OPC follows INITiate Ch IMMediate it places a 1 into the output queue when the sweep is terminated An appropriate condition in the remote control program must cause the controller to wait until OPC returns one The controller is stopped from the moment when the condition is set Start single sweep in ch...

Page 1226: ...ee Markers and Limit Lines 2 Read complete trace Select a trace format and read formatted trace data CALCulate1 FORMat MLINear Calculate the linear magnitude of z CALCulate1 DATA FDATa Read the formatted trace data Use CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt to retrieve a particular trace within a group of sweeps 8 1 2 Channel Trace and Diagram Handling The following examples show you how to perform basic...

Page 1227: ... 1 One channel two traces one diagram Reset the instrument creating the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The default measured quantity is the forward transmission S parameter S21 The default format is dB Mag RST Create a second trace in channel 1 assign the format Phase and display the new trace in the same diagram the trace becomes the active trace but is not displayed CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine...

Page 1228: ... FEED Trc2 DISPlay WINDow3 TRACe3 FEED Trc3 DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe4 FEED Trc4 Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE 8 1 2 2 Several Traces with Different Channel Settings Programming task Create three channels with 3 1 and 2 traces respectively and display the traces in two diagrams Important remote control features for this program example The following comman...

Page 1229: ...io_trace B1 B2 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine Z_trace Z21 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine Y_trace Y21 CALCulate3 PARameter SELect Z_trace the trace created previously becomes the active trace for channel 3 So far only the default trace is displayed Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE 2 Create second diagram and display traces DISPlay WINDow2 STATe ON DISPlay WIND...

Page 1230: ...he com mands for marker settings and for the limit check 2 Diagrams are referenced by a window suffix Wnd An additional suffix WndTr in the DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr commands numbers the dif ferent traces in a diagram 3 The analyzer provides several commands allowing a smooth transition between remote and manual control 1 Create one channel two traces one diagram Reset the instrument creating...

Page 1231: ...CALCulate1 MARKer1 REFerence X 4 5 GHz Use the delta marker to search for the minimum of the trace and query the result the query returns the stimulus and the response value at the marker position CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion EXECute MIN RES Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE Use the CALCulate Chn DATA commands to retrieve the complete trace see Retrieving M...

Page 1232: ...hapter Proceed as follows 1 Find your subject in the help system preferably using context sensitivity of the help system on your network analyzer or the index 2 Activate the link to the command description 3 A short example appears at the end of each command description The command SYSTem DISPlay UPDate precedes some of the command scripts so that you can watch the progress of the script on the sc...

Page 1233: ...ng sections provide examples for efficient channel and trace definition and convenient diagram handling 8 2 2 1 Assigning Channels Traces and Diagrams The following example is a short version of Chapter 8 1 2 Channel Trace and Dia gram Handling on page 1211 Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Create a new trace for S21 with the name TrcDisp CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE TrcDisp S21 Disp...

Page 1234: ...LCULATE1 PARAMETER DELETE Trc2 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Assign a trace to a window diagram diagram 1 always exists DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE2 FEED TrcDisp Create diagram 2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE6 FEED Ch4Trc2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE2 FEED Trc1 DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE3 FEED Ch4Trc3 Create traces trace names are not case sensitive CALCU...

Page 1235: ...ATA4 CH1DATA DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE4 FEED Mem4 Trc1 Create new normal trace on channel 1 assign it to a window CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S22 DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE5 FEED Trc2 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT Trc2 now active for channel 1 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Create memory trace for Trc2 The memory trace can be assigned to the diagram of the mother trace only di...

Page 1236: ...Trc1 DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE3 FEED XYZ CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT XYZ CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT TRACE COPY MDATA4 Ch3Trc1 mixed parameters Char String DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE4 FEED Mem4 Ch3Trc1 Copy to existing memory traces update trace data TRACE COPY MDATA6 CH1DATA TRACE COPY XYZ Ch2Trc1 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG CALCULATE2 PARAMETER CATALOG CALCULATE3 PARAMETER CATALOG 8 2 2 3 Trace Mathemat...

Page 1237: ...xamples for Trace Mathematics Special operands Data and Mem CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE Data Mem CALCULATE1 MATH STATE ON Constants CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE Pi e j Functions CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE linMag 1 dBMag 2 Arg 3 Re 4 Im 5j CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE log 2 ln 3 Min 1 2 Max 2 3 CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE StimVal asin sin 3 acos cos 4 atan tan 4 CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE Trc1 2 1 1 CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFIN...

Page 1238: ...AMETER SELECT Trc2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE1 FEED Trc2 SENSE1 SWEEP TIME AUTO ON SENSE2 SWEEP TIME AUTO ON Search full span evaluation range display statistical results CALCulate1 STATistics DOMain USER 0 CALCulate2 STATistics DOMain USER 0 CALCULATE1 STATISTICS ON CALCULATE2 STATISTICS ON Single sweep global scope INITIATE CONTINUOUS OFF INITIATE IMMEDIATE SCOPE ALL SENSE SW...

Page 1239: ...eep is finished INITiate CONTinuous OFF INITiate WAI CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion EXECute BFILter All markers OFF CALCulate1 MARKer AOFF Bandpass search ref to marker CALCulate1 MARKer1 STATe ON CALCulate1 MARKer1 X 3 0 GHz CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPRMarker CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPRM INITiate WAI CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion EXECute BFILter CALCulate1 MARKer AOFF Bandst...

Page 1240: ...he remote control commands presented here extend the func tionality of the Display Diagram and Display Split softtool tabs Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Define and display a simple horizontal layout two diagrams side by side DISPlay LAYout DEFine 1 Horizontal 1 00 0 30 0 70 DISPlay LAYout APPLy 1 Define and display a simple vertical layout two diagrams one on top of the other DIS...

Page 1241: ... 0 70 1 00 DISPlay LAYout DEFine 2 1 1 0 00 0 00 2 1 1 00 1 00 1 00 0 50 1 00 0 50 Join the 2 layouts display the nested layout DISPlay LAYout JOIN 1 2 2 DISPlay LAYout APPLy 1 Check the last applied i e the joined layout for the correct format DISPlay LAYout EXECute 1 1 0 00 0 00 1 2 1 00 1 00 0 30 1 00 1 1 0 70 1 00 2 1 1 00 1 00 1 00 0 50 1 00 0 50 Condensed Programming Examples ...

Page 1242: ...lues Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Initiate a single sweep INITiate1 CONTinuous OFF INITiate1 IMMediate WAI The following marker commands have the channel no as a numeric suffix The parameter belongs to a trace the assignment channel trace is done via a active trace for each channel CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT Trc1 Marker ON OFF CALCULATE1 MARKER1 ON CALCULATE1 MARKER1 STATE Coup...

Page 1243: ...ws how to search for particular measurement points using markers Reset the analyzer RST DISPlay WINDow1 TITLe DATA Max Hold Function Emulation Define marker and stimulus range CALCULATE1 MARKER1 ON SENSE1 FREQUENCY START 1GHZ SENSE1 FREQUENCY STOP 2GHZ Do the marker search in the format DB Magnitude CALCULATE1 FORMAT MLOGARITHMIC Define marker search ranges stimulus range of the marker search Rang...

Page 1244: ...CULATE1 MARKER1 X CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER MAX CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X Minimum peak search functions CALCULATE1 MARKER1 FUNCTION SELECT MINIMUM CALCULATE1 MARKER1 FUNCTION SELECT NEXT PEAK CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH NEXT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X PEAK RIGHT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH RIGHT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X PEAK LEFT CALCULATE1 MA...

Page 1245: ...ELECT Trc2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE1 FEED Trc2 CALCULATE3 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc3 S11 CALCULATE3 PARAMETER SELECT Trc3 DISPLAY WINDOW3 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW3 TRACE1 FEED Trc3 Select sweep time for the channels SENSE1 SWEEP TIME 1 S SENSE2 SWEEP TIME 1 S SENSE3 SWEEP TIME 1 S Enable single sweep mode for all channels so that channel specific sweep count settings are used INIT...

Page 1246: ...sweep and update trace with the current extremum This is the last extremum for the next sweep INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 Loop over these 2 commands INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 Continuous sweep mode INITIATE CONTINUOUS ON 8 2 4 3 Retrieving the Results of Previous Sweeps The commands CALCulate Ch...

Page 1247: ...t Alternative Reverse reading with command synchronization Select single sweep mode and measure a single sweep group for channels no 1 and 2 INITIATE CONTinuous ALL OFF INITIATE IMMEDIATE ALL WAI Read trace data without history i e the last trace acquired in each channel CALCULATE1 DATA SDATA CALCULATE2 DATA SDATA Read last and previous trace data in channels 1 and 2 CALCULATE1 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 1...

Page 1248: ...ted DEFault Initiate a complete sweep INITiate1 CONTinuous OFF INITiate IMMediate WAI MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs 1 ParserTouchstonePorts s1p COMPlex 2 MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs 1 ParserTouchstonePorts s2p COMPlex 3 2 MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs 1 ParserTouchstonePorts s4p COMPlex 1 4 3 2 8 2 5 Calibration The following programming examples are related to system error correction and power calibration ...

Page 1249: ...OLLect METHod DEFine Test SFK TOSM 12 TOSM 1 2 Measure Standards SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected THROUGH 1 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect A...

Page 1250: ... expected result 2 2 3 3 4 4 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT AUTO ASSignment1 DEFine create the second calibration full one port and factory calkit SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure FOPort the second cal addresses test port 1 and explicitly assigns it to cal unit port 1 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT AUTO ASSignment2 DEFine 1 1 get the number of port assignments of the current calibration expected res...

Page 1251: ...d DEFine Test SFK TOSM 12 TOSM 1 2 Measure Standards SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected THROUGH 1 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELec...

Page 1252: ... the analyzer RST Set frequency range SENSe1 FREQuency1 STARt 1GHz SENSe1 FREQuency1 STOP 4GHz SENSe1 SWEep POINts 6 Select calibration type TOSM at ports 1 and 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine XYZ TOSM 1 2 Generate a set of default correction data switch on user calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault SENSE1 CORRECTION STATE ON In the previous section the following er...

Page 1253: ...data transfer FORMAT REAL 32 Important Stop sweep when loading error terms INITiate CONTinuous OFF Recall error terms CALCulate DATA is suitable for 2 port terms use SENSe CORRection CDATa for more than 2 ports CALCulate1 DATA SCORR1 scorr1 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR2 scorr2 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR3 scorr3 dat We are omitting the isolation term as it is not implemented on the ZVAB CALCulate1 DATA...

Page 1254: ...r Test SFK ARTosm 1 2 Start with Calkit 1 e g 3 5 mm ideal Kit adapter side port 1 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 ON SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected SHORT 1 ON SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected MATCh 1 ON non adapter side port 2 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 OFF SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 OFF SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLE...

Page 1255: ... MIXer FUND RF SENSe1 FREQuency1 CONVersion MIXer LOINternal 3 LO port 3 SENSe1 FREQuency1 CONVersion MIXer TFRequency UCON RF LO SENSe1 FREQuency1 CONVersion MIXer FFIXed 200 MHz LO frequency SOURce1 FREQuency1 CONVersion MIXer PFIXed 7 LO power SENSe1 FREQuency1 CONVersion MIXer activate mixer Perform a SMARTerCal CalU on Ports 1 2 and 3 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect PMETer ID 1 1 Powermeter on port...

Page 1256: ...Ch3 Trc5 6 CONFigure CHANnel3 ON channel 3 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine LO_Leak S13 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe5 FEED LO_Leak CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine LO_Thru S23 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe6 FEED LO_Thru channel names CONFigure CHANnel1 NAME Ch_M CONFigure CHANnel2 NAME CH_RF CONFigure CHANnel3 NAME CH_LO Adjust channels for measurement channel 1 arbitrary remains unchanged channel 2 base frequency reset...

Page 1257: ...nd commands over RFFE interface 2 Slave address 0xA command number 0xBC data 0x0123 CONTROL RFFE2 COMMAND DATA ABC0123 CONTROL RFFE2 COMMAND SEND Reading a Product ID This example assumes knowledge of the RFFE Specification of the MIPI Alliance in particular the RFFE Suported Command Sequences RST DUT Power on sequence CONTrol1 GPIO1 VOLTage 2 5V CONTROL1 GPIO VOLTage OUTPut CONTrol1 GPIO2 VOLTage...

Page 1258: ...Quence1 GPIO5 VOLTage 0V CONTrol SEQuence1 RFFE2 COMMand DATA 12345AF Step 2 CONTrol SEQuence2 GPIO5 VOLTage 1V After step 2 wait for 3 ms CONTrol SEQuence2 DELay 3ms Step 3 CONTrol SEQuence3 GPIO5 VOLTage 1V During sweep output voltage will be 1V Configuring RFFE Sweep Sequencer segmented sweep For segmented sweeps the RFFE device will be configured in preparation of every segment RST Define segm...

Page 1259: ...ual 1173 9163 02 38 Segment 1 A single step CONT SEGM1 SEQ1 RFFE1 COMMAND DATA 12311 CONT SEGM1 SEQ1 GPIO4 VOLT 1 2V Segment 3 Two steps CONT SEGM3 SEQ1 RFFE1 COMMAND DATA 3EF11 CONT SEGM3 SEQ2 RFFE1 COMMAND DATA 3EF22 Condensed Programming Examples ...

Page 1260: ...witched off in order to avoid damage Hardware errors with possible causes and remedies are listed in the following sections Exceptions indicate anomalous or exceptional events that were not properly han dled by the R S ZNB ZNBT firmware Troubleshooting SCPI errors A misspelled command header causes SCPI error 113 Undefined header a misspelled parameter causes SCPI error 141 Invalid character data ...

Page 1261: ...el of the supplied ref erence signal 1 Converter clock fre quency lock failure The clock generator for the AD converter clock is phase locked to the reference oscillator The mes sage appears when this PLL fails Oven cold With option R S ZNB ZNBT B4 oven quartz The oven temperature is too low Wait until the oven has been heated up 8 The following bits in the STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware r...

Page 1262: ...th If pos sible reduce number of partial mea surements e g by restricting the number of ports measured 12 Overload at DC MEAS range The input voltage at one of the DC input connectors on the rear panel is too high Reduce input voltage 13 Port i output power unleveled The level control is unsettled or unstable possibly due to an external disturbing signal Change generator level at the port check ex...

Page 1263: ...ses will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy Error message types are described in Chapter 9 Error Messages and Troubleshooting on page 1245 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your network analyzer We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the infor...

Page 1264: ...ve Report function of the Info dialog Save Report The system report command Info Save Report collects the setup option and hardware information as well as the error log and the current selftest results and writes everything to a zip file The zip file also contains the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the VNA display It is written to the report directory C Users Public Documents Vna Report T...

Page 1265: ...fied only with update software released by Rohde Schwarz Like wise only programs authorized by Rohde Schwarz for use on the instrument must be executed The Start menu of the operating system is accessed by pressing the Windows key in the SYSTEM keypad or on an external keyboard All necessary settings can be accessed from the Start menu in particular from the Control Panel User accounts and passwor...

Page 1266: ...ory stick external CD ROM drive or a network connection LAN GPIB bus 2 In the Windows Explorer tap the setup file twice or double click with a mouse and follow the instructions of the setup wizard Setup files can be stored and installed again The default drive name of the internal hard disk is C External storage devices are automatically mapped to the next free drive i e D E etc Factory calibratio...

Page 1267: ...EADY FOR TRIGGER O Measurement completed ready for new trigger 7 AGND Ground 8 UC_CH_BIT0 O Channel bit 0 see CONTrol AUXiliary C DATA and OUTPut Ch UPORt VALue 9 UC_CH_BIT1 O Channel bit 1 10 UC_CH_BIT2 O Channel bit 2 11 UC_CH_BIT3 O Channel bit 3 12 AGND Ground 13 UC_PASS1 O Pass fail result of limit check 1 TTL Out Pass 1 see TTL1 Pass TTL2 Pass 14 UC_PASS2 O Pass fail result of limit check 2 ...

Page 1268: ...ing devices the Calibration Unit accessory R S ZV Z5x a printer or external storage devices USB stick CD ROM drive etc USB Connection The length of passive connecting USB cables should not exceed 1 m The maximum current per USB port is 500 mA See also Chapter 3 1 5 EMI Suppression on page 17 10 2 1 3 EXT TRIG IN BNC female connector for external trigger input see FreeRun External Manual Multiple T...

Page 1269: ... VXI 11 interface messages also termed low level control messages are also supported by the GPIB Explorer Command Meaning Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers the active measurement sequence e g a swe...

Page 1270: ...nes IFC Interface Clear active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connec ted to the default setting ATN Attention active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages inac tive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request active LOW enables the connected device to send a ser vice request to the controller REN Remote Enable active LOW permits switchover to rem...

Page 1271: ...vice Request full capability PP1 Parallel poll function full capability RL1 Remote Local switch over function full capability DC1 Reset function Device Clear full capability DT1 Trigger function Device Trigger full capability 10 2 3 2 Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the atten tion line being active LOW They serve to communicate between...

Page 1272: ...ure IBPPC device data Configures the instrument for parallel poll Additionally the QuickBASIC command executes PPE PPD SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting 10 2 3 3 Instrument Messages Instrument messages commands are transferred on the da...

Page 1273: ...to be made Starting from the preset state you will usually have to adjust the following settings 1 Enable external trigger CHANNEL TRIGGER Trigger External 2 Optional Select single sweep mode CHANNEL SWEEP Sweep Control Single 3 Define limit lines and enable the limit check TRACE LINES Limit Test The Universal Interface connector must be connected to the part handler using an appropriate cable If ...

Page 1274: ...he global pass fail status of the last measurement Figure 10 2 Control signals and power supply SCPI commands See Chapter 7 3 4 CONTrol Commands on page 851 10 2 4 2 Data Ports In addition to the control signals the Universal Interface provides four bi directional data ports A B C D The data ports must be configured explicitly using SCPI com mands they are not controlled by the measurement With an...

Page 1275: ...se combined ports are termed ports G and H Figure 10 4 Definition of ports E F G H The properties of the combined ports are as follows The signal direction input or output is according to the configuration of ports A B C and D E g to write data to port G H ports A B and C A B C and D must be configured as output ports Data can be read and written using the CONTrol HANDler E F G H DATA commands The...

Page 1276: ...andler I O option R S ZN Z14 can simply be connected to the Digital I O connector at the rear panel of the analyzer The pin assignment of the connector is shown below A slash at the beginning of the signal name indicates that it is an active low negative logic signal Figure 10 5 Pin assignment of the Universal Interface connector The input and output signals at the connector are described below Pi...

Page 1277: ...it no 4 18 EXTERNAL TRIGGER I External trigger signal 19 PORT B5 I or O Port B bit no 5 20 PORT B6 or INDEX I or O O Port B bit no 6 The INDEX signal changes to Low when a measurement is complete all sweeps in all channels have been performed the DUT can be removed but the measurement results may not be valid yet 21 PORT B7 or READY FOR TRIGGER I or O O Port B bit no 7 The READY FOR TRIGGER signal...

Page 1278: ...end of the measurement Changes to Low after all sweeps in all chan nels have been completed and the measurement data has been processed Alternative configurations see CONTrol HANDler SWEepend 35 5 V DC O DC power supply for external devices 5 V 250 mV max 0 1 A 36 PASS FAIL STROBE O Changes to Low when limit check results are present on PASS FAIL pin no 33 All digital input signals must be TTL com...

Page 1279: ...et to restore default values Signal RST Configuration Port A Port B Output ports all bits High decimal 0 Port C Port D Input ports PORT C STATUS PORT D STATUS Low OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 High SWEEP END High PASS_FAIL High SCPI commands CONTrol HANDler RESet resets all configurable signals 10 2 4 4 Timing of Control Signals The timing of the essential measurement control signals is shown in the figure be...

Page 1280: ...RIGGER Minimum value 1 μs T2 Response time of PASS FAIL STROBE 1 μs T3 Pulse duration of PASS FAIL STROBE 1 μs T4 Pulse duration of SWEEP END 12 μs The timing of the data port signals and the input output signals is as follows The low pulse of the WRITE STROBE signal occurs approx 0 1 μs after a value is written to the output ports A to D The pulse duration of the WRITE STROBE sig nal is 1 μs The ...

Page 1281: ...cation and 10 General Purpose Input Output GPIO ports Figure 10 9 D sub 25 pin female connector front view Table 10 2 PIN mapping RFFE GPIO extension board connector PIN number Comment 1 3 5 11 22 Ground 2 RFFE1_VIO 4 RFFE2_VIO 6 GPIO 2 7 GPIO 4 8 GPIO 6 9 GPIO 8 10 GPIO 9 12 For future use please do not connect 13 For future use please do not connect 14 RFFE1_CLK 15 RFFE1_DATA 16 RFFE2_CLK 17 RFF...

Page 1282: ...X mA Current 20 MIN kHz MAX kHz Possible values kHz Clock frequency 31 25 26000 52000 n with n 1664 2 All remaining data e g rise time are according to the specification v 1 00 of the MIPI Alliance Group Table 10 4 GPIO Interface Parameter MIN V MAX V Step size V 7 15 0 005 MAX mA Current GPIO 1 8 20 Current GPIO 9 10 100 The output voltages of the RFFE and GPIO signals do not have an offset to co...

Page 1283: ...rent values are valid if the GPIO voltages are within 5 V to 9 V 10 3 Maintenance The R S ZNB ZNBT vector network analyzer does not require any special mainte nance For our support center address and a list of useful R S contact addresses refer to the documentation CD ROM or the Contact page at the beginning of the Help system 10 3 1 Cleaning Risk of electric shock If moisture enters the casing fo...

Page 1284: ... even cause damage 1 Clean the outside of the instrument using a soft dry lint free dust cloth 2 Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always operate properly 3 Clean the touchscreen as follows a Apply a small amount of standard screen cleaner to a soft cloth b Wipe the screen gently with the moist but not wet cloth c If necessary remove any excess moisture with a dry soft cloth 1...

Page 1285: ...id counterclockwise 10 4 Showroom Mode In Showroom Mode the R S ZNB ZNBT uses a configurable recall set whenever the device is re started or the PRESET key is pressed However it can only be enabled by directly editing the Windows registry 1 Run the R S ZNB ZNBT and configure it as required for the intended showroom operation 2 Save the configuration as described in Chapter 5 15 1 Recall Sets Tab o...

Page 1286: ...S Crete ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MODE CALCulate 1 4 SELected MARKer 1 10 REF erence STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence STATe CALCulate 1 4 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion EXECute CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch IMMediate CALCulate 1 4 SELected MARKer 1 10 STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe CALCulate 1 4 SELected MARKer 1 10 X numeric CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk X CAL...

Page 1287: ... DISPlay UPDate DISPlay WINDow 1 4 ACTivate numeric_value INSTrument NSELect DISPlay WINDow 1 4 MAXimize ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow Wnd MAXimize DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TITLe DATA string DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TITLe STATe ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe STATe DISPlay WIN Dow 1 4 TRACe 1 7 Y SCALe AUTO DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe AUTO DISPlay WINDow 1 4 Y SCALe DI...

Page 1288: ...1 4 BWIDth RESolution bandwidth SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution SENSe 1 4 BWIDth RESolution SELect NOR Mal HIGH SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution SELect SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect ACQuire LOAD numeric SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect ACQuire OPEN numeric SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect ACQuire SHORt numeric SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect ACQuire ISOLation numeric1 numeric2 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect ACQuire T...

Page 1289: ...ric SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt TIME SENSe 1 4 CORRection STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe Ch CORRection STATe SENSe 1 4 FREQuency CENTer numeric SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer SENSe 1 4 FREQuency DATA CALCulate Chn DATA STIMulus SENSe 1 4 FREQuency SPAN numeric SENSe Ch FREQuency SPAN SENSe 1 4 FREQuency STARt numeric SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt SENSe 1 4 FREQuency STOP numeric SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP SENSe 1...

Page 1290: ...e NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev PTRansition STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev CONDition STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev ENABle STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev EVENt STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev NTRans...

Page 1291: ...each channel that has been selected as the active trace CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect trace name Many commands e g TRACE act on the active trace It can be different from the active trace in manual control C Cal pool The cal pool is a collection of correction data sets cal groups that the ana lyzer stores in a common directory Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall s...

Page 1292: ... screen used to display traces Diagram areas are arranged in windows they are independent of trace and channel settings Directivity error Measurement error caused by a coupler or bridge in the analyzer s source port causing part of the generated signal to leak through the forward path into the receive path instead of being transmitted towards the DUT The directivity error can be corrected by means...

Page 1293: ...ches 0 dB Intermodulation measurement Measurement where the DUT is supplied with two RF signals of equal power but different frequencies termed the upper and lower tone The analyzer measures the frequency converting behavior of the DUT intermodu lation product Intermodulation product Special type of emissions of a nonlinear DUT that is sup plied with a two tone RF signal intermodulation measuremen...

Page 1294: ... tion between constants and the data or memory traces of the active recall set Measurement point Result of the measurement at a specified stimulus value fre quency power time Measurement result Set of all measurement points acquired in a measurement e g a sweep The measurement result is displayed in a diagram area and forms a trace Memory trace Trace that is associated to a data trace and stored i...

Page 1295: ...ion Stimulus value Value of the sweep variable frequency power time point number where a measurement is taken Also termed sweep point Sweep Series of consecutive measurements taken at a specified sequence of stimu lus values series of consecutive measurement points Sweep point Value of the sweep variable stimulus value frequency power time where a measurement is taken Sweep range Continuous range ...

Page 1296: ... assumed to be ideally matched Beyond that the through must be lossless and its length must be exactly known Especially useful for DUTs in planar line technology TRM A calibration type which requires a low reflection low loss Through standard with an electrical length that may be different from zero a Reflect and a Match Espe cially useful for DUTs in test fixtures TSM A calibration type using thr...

Page 1297: ...ORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PASSword 980 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs 981 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs ADD 982 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs CONNection 982 SENSe CORRection COLLect AVERage 983 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels ALL 983 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes 983 SENSe CORRection COLLect FIXTure LMParameter LOSS STATe 985 SENSe CORRection COLLect FIXT...

Page 1298: ...FIXTure IMPort 998 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure SAVE 999 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure STARt 1000 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire 997 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect LOAD SELected 1000 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod 1197 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine 1001 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault 1198 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault 1003 SENSe ...

Page 1299: ...ary PMETer Pmtr 1032 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion GAIN LMCorrection 1033 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer FIXed Stg 1034 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer FUNDamental 1034 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer IFPort 1035 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer LOMultiplier Stg 1035 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer LOPort Stg 1035 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed 1036 SENSe Ch FREQue...

Page 1300: ...ontrol 1056 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol ALL 1057 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol GLOBal 1058 SENSe Ch POWer IFGain PhyPt MEASure 1055 SENSe Ch ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 1059 SENSe Ch ROSCillator SOURce 1058 SENSe Ch SEGMent COUNt 1060 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg ADD 1061 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution 1061 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution CONTrol 1062 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution S...

Page 1301: ...h SWEep SPACing 1203 SENSe Ch SWEep STEP 1084 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME 1085 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO 1085 SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE 1086 SENSe Chn CORRection PSTate 1028 SENSe Chn CORRection SSTate 1028 SENSe Chn FUNCtion ON 1204 SENSe Chn SWEep SRCPort 1087 ABORt 679 CALCulate CLIMits FAIL 679 CALCulate DATA ALL 680 CALCulate DATA DALL 681 CALCulate DATA TRACe 681 CALCulate FILTer GATE TIME AOFFset 716 CALC...

Page 1302: ...DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters DATA 815 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters G Cmp 815 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp 816 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp 816 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition 817 CALCulate Ch TRANsform ...

Page 1303: ...t TNDefinition 838 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt STATe 834 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp 839 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters DATA 842 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters G Cmp 839 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp 840 CALCul...

Page 1304: ...708 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL CONDition 708 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL 707 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom HORizontal 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom STATe 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom VERTical 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe POLYgon HORizontal 710 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe POLYgon STATe 709 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe POLYgon TYPE 710 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe PO...

Page 1305: ...Culate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DATA 730 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DISPlay STATe 730 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle STATe 729 CALCulate Chn LIMit DELete ALL 730 CALCulate Chn LIMit DISPlay STATe 731 CALCulate Chn LIMit FAIL 731 CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer FEED 733 CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer SHIFt 734 CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer STATe 1187 CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer DATA 731 CALCulate Chn LIMit RDOMain COMPlex 1...

Page 1306: ... STARt 749 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion STOP 749 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion TARGet 1189 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SELect 1190 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MAXimum 1190 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MINimum 1190 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MODE 750 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk NAME 750 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence MODE 751 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence NAME 752 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFeren...

Page 1307: ...ulate Chn STATistics EPDelay STATe 785 CALCulate Chn STATistics FORMat 785 CALCulate Chn STATistics MMPTpeak STATe 785 CALCulate Chn STATistics MSTDdev STATe 785 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP LEVel 785 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RESult 786 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP STATe 786 CALCulate Chn STATistics RESult 787 CALCulate Chn STATistics RMS STATe 788 CALCulate Chn STAT...

Page 1308: ...Ce Trc NAME 850 CONFigure TRACe Trc NAME ID 850 CONFigure TRACe Trc REName 850 CONTrol AUXiliary C DATA 853 CONTrol GPIO SENSe SUMCurrent 856 CONTrol GPIO Port SENSe CURRent 856 CONTrol GPIO Port SENSe VOLTage 856 CONTrol HANDler A MODE 855 CONTrol HANDler A DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler B MODE 855 CONTrol HANDler B DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler C MODE 855 CONTrol HANDler C DATA 854 CONTrol HANDler D MODE 8...

Page 1309: ...h RFFE Bus SETTings VOLTage IO 867 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings VOLTage LOW 867 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings STATe 867 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk 868 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk RANGe 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk SHUNt 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA 868 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA RANGe 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA SHUNt 869 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO 868 CONTrol Ch RFFE B...

Page 1310: ...TATe 880 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA 881 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe STATe 881 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr CATalog 881 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr DELete 882 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr EFEed 882 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED 883 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr SHOW 883 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr X OFFSet 884 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y OFFSet 889 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe Wnd...

Page 1311: ...ect 911 INSTrument PORT COUNt 911 INSTrument SMATrix 911 INSTrument TPORt COUNt 911 INSTrument SELect 1194 MEMory CATalog COUNt 912 MEMory CATalog 912 MEMory DEFine 912 MEMory DELete ALL 913 MEMory DELete NAME 913 MEMory SELect 913 MMEMory AKAL FACTory CONVersion 915 MMEMory AKAL USER CONVersion 916 MMEMory CATalog ALL 917 MMEMory CATalog 916 MMEMory CDIRectory 917 MMEMory CKIT INFO 918 MMEMory CO...

Page 1312: ...ory MDIRectory 940 MMEMory MOVE 940 MMEMory NAME 941 MMEMory RDIRectory 941 MMEMory STORe CKIT 942 MMEMory STORe CKIT WLABel 942 MMEMory STORe CMAP 943 MMEMory STORe CORRection 943 MMEMory STORe CORRection TCOefficient 943 MMEMory STORe EYE MASK 944 MMEMory STORe EYE MASK RESults 944 MMEMory STORe EYE MEASurements 944 MMEMory STORe LIMit 945 MMEMory STORe MARKer 945 MMEMory STORe RIPPle 946 MMEMor...

Page 1313: ...e Ch POWer CORRection DATA PORT PhyPt 1109 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection IMODulation PORT 1112 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect AVERage NTOLerance 1115 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect AVERage COUNt 1114 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect CFACtor 1115 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect PMReadings 1116 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ACQuire 1205 SOURce Ch POWer Ph...

Page 1314: ...Dition 1136 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle 1136 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware CONDition 1136 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware ENABle 1136 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware NTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware PTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware EVENt 1136 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition 1137 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PT...

Page 1315: ...Pmtr DEFine 1151 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr SPCorrection STATe 1152 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CATalog 1153 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure ABORt 1153 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END 1153 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure STARt 1154 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure TVNA 1155 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix COUNt 1156 SYSTe...

Page 1316: ...1171 SYSTem PRESet USER STATe 1170 SYSTem PRESet DUMMy 1169 SYSTem SETTings UPDate 1171 SYSTem SHUTdown 1172 SYSTem SMATrix OPTimization 1171 SYSTem SOUNd ALARm STATe 1172 SYSTem SOUNd STATus STATe 1172 SYSTem TIME 1173 SYSTem TSLock 1173 SYSTem USER KEY 1173 SYSTem VERSion 1174 TRACe CLEar 1206 TRACe COPY 1175 TRACe COPY MATH 1176 TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL 1207 TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL 1206 TRIGger ...

Page 1317: ...6 Set All Items to Auto 377 Set All Items to Low Distortion 377 Set All Items to Low Noise 377 AGC Mode Auto 375 LO RF 375 LO RF 375 Manual 375 All Data Func to Destination 493 All Data to Destination 492 All Partial Meas ments 242 All S Params 437 Annexes 1250 Aperture 128 Aperture Points 474 Applic softtool 573 External Tools application 574 Eye Diag tab 579 Eye Mask Test tab 593 Rise Time tab 5...

Page 1318: ...Manual 307 Source port 277 286 Sweep diagrams 267 281 312 Type 263 273 277 286 Calibration manual Connector 279 310 Same Connector All Ports 280 311 Same Gender All Ports 280 311 Sweep 282 Calibration system settings 605 Calibration kit 151 Calibration Kits dialog 322 Add cal kit 323 Available Cal Kits 323 Connector Type 323 Copy cal kit 323 Delete cal kit 323 Export Cal Kit 323 Import Cal Kit 323...

Page 1319: ...mon 647 device specific 647 processing 657 recognition 657 sequence 657 stucture and syntax 647 synchronization 657 Command reference 678 Common commands 675 677 Common mode 120 122 Common Mode Differential Mode 444 Compatibility mode Sweep Active Channel 257 Sweep All Channels 257 CONDition 662 663 Configured devices external generators 626 external power meters 622 external switch matrices 631 C...

Page 1320: ...41 Display 29 Diagram 560 Display Circle 529 Display Config 567 Channel Info 568 Color Scheme 567 Font Size 569 Hide Sensitive Information 568 Info Table 569 Trace Info 568 Display elements 87 Display softtool 560 Config tab 567 Diagram tab 560 Split tab 564 Touchscreen tab R S ZNB only 573 View Bar tab 572 Displayed Columns dialog 252 Distance Center 434 Distance Span 434 Distance Start 434 Dista...

Page 1321: ...ion 595 F Factor averaging 238 Factory calibration 1251 Favorites 555 File softtool 551 Favorites tab 555 More tab 557 Print tab 556 557 Recall Sets tab 551 Trace Data tab 557 Firewall 27 Firmware update 1251 First Partial Meas ment 242 Fixture Compensation All Compensation Off 415 All Compensation On 415 Auto Length 415 Auto Length and Loss 415 Direct Compensation 415 Fixture Compensation dialog ...

Page 1322: ...creased Bandwidth option 960 INFintiy 651 Info dialog 613 Hardware tab 615 Options tab 614 Selftest tab 616 Setup tab 613 Info Table 569 Instrument calibration 68 Instrument hardware 657 Instrument Messages 620 1257 Instrument setup 16 Instrument control commands 647 Interface functions GPIB bus 1256 Interface Clear 1255 Interface message 647 Interface messages GPIB 1256 VXI 11 1254 Interfaces 125...

Page 1323: ...533 Properties 534 Props 534 Ref Mkr Mkr 536 Response 533 Search 531 set by 63 Settings 531 532 Stimulus 532 Style 535 Marker coupling 95 Marker Format 535 Marker Info 536 Marker info field 92 Marker Info Field 550 Marker Mode Arbitrary 536 Fixed 536 Normal 536 Marker Name 535 Marker Search 537 Max Min 538 Next Peak 538 Peak Left Peak Right 538 Peak Type 538 539 Search Mode 539 Marker search funct...

Page 1324: ...94 N NAN not a number 651 Navigation keys 32 Navigation tools 46 NDAC 1255 New recall set 552 New Trace dialog 483 NINF negative infinity 651 Notch time gate 499 NRFD 1255 NTR 661 NTRansition 662 664 Number of Points 240 431 Numerator 447 Numeric Editor dialog 58 Numeric Suffix remote control 676 O OCXO Frequency Reference 19 Offset Active 406 Offset Embed Balanced 409 Differential Match Embedding...

Page 1325: ...B24 216 R S ZNBT20 B25 216 R S ZNBT20 B26 216 R S ZNBT20 B112 192 212 R S ZNBT20 B116 192 R S ZNBT20 B120 192 R S ZNBT20 B124 192 Option R S ZNB B19 37 Option R S ZNBT B10 41 Option R S ZNBT B12 41 Option R S ZNBT B19 39 Option R S ZNBT B81 41 Option R S ZNBT Z14 39 Options 614 R S ZNB ZNBT K17 960 R S ZVAB B44 621 Options overview 192 Options info 614 Output unit 657 Overlapped command execution ...

Page 1326: ...TOSM 173 PTR 663 PTRansition 662 PTRL 173 PTRM 173 PTSM 173 Public folder 914 PUOSM 173 Putting into operation 15 Q Quality factor bandfilter 96 Query 647 QUEStionable register 661 667 Summary bit 665 QUEStionable INTegrity register 669 QUEStionable LIMit register 668 R R S ZN B12 38 R S ZN B14 38 R S ZN B14 214 R S ZN B14 Handler I O 1257 R S ZN B15 RFFE GPIO Interface 214 R S ZN Z15 38 R S ZNB B...

Page 1327: ...functions Basic 552 Recall switch matrix configuration 554 Receiver Bandwidth 10 MHz R S ZNB ZNBT K17 211 Receiver Step Attenuators 217 Receiving Port intermodulation 384 Recent Files 554 Reduced Through calibration 150 Ref Mkr Mkr 536 REF OUT IN 37 39 Ref Pos 478 Ref Val Marker 550 Ref Value 477 Reference impedance 125 Reference position 62 Reference Receiver Cal Power 335 Reference value 62 Refl...

Page 1328: ...PERation register 667 STATus QUEStionable register 667 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity 669 STATus QUEStionable LIMit 668 Structure 661 Screen elements 87 Screen Keyboard 575 Screen saver 29 SDC 1256 Search functions 95 Search Path for Additional Cal Kits 607 Search Range dialog 539 Range Limit Lines On 541 Search Range 540 Select Marker 540 Seg X Axis 247 Segmented AGC 375 Segmented sweep 244 Define...

Page 1329: ...5 Source Calibration 277 286 Source Port 448 451 Source power calibration 168 SPAN 83 Span Marker 549 Span Frequency 430 SPD 1256 SPE 1256 Split Quad Split 565 Triple Split 565 Split All 563 Split diagrams 564 Split diagras Dual Split 565 Split Type 566 Src for Rcvr Cal 384 SRE 661 665 SRQ 661 671 1255 Stability softkey 464 Stability factors 127 Stability tab 463 Standby and ready state 19 Standby...

Page 1330: ...Advanced Settings dialog 579 TDR Stimulus Settings 577 Advanced 579 Basic 577 Test port 33 35 Text parameter 651 Time Center 434 Time Domain 494 Time domain analysis 494 498 Time domain analysis K2 193 Time domain analysis R S ZNB ZNBT K2 193 Time Domain Signal Integrity Tests 199 Time Domain Transform 193 Time domain transformation Impulse Response 495 Type 495 Time Domain X Axis tab 433 Time Gat...

Page 1331: ...s 401 Troubleshooting 1245 Two Port Configuration dialog 337 Power loss list 337 Transm Coefficients 337 Typical cal kit 154 U Unbalance balance conversion 120 Universal command 647 1256 Universal Interface 214 1257 Unwr Phase 471 UP 651 Upper edge bandfilter 96 Upper limit 129 Upper Tone intermodulation 384 Upper lower case remote control 676 USB front panel 33 Front panel 36 USB Device rear pane...

Page 1332: ...2 softkey 458 Y S21 softkey 458 Y S22 softkey 458 Y11 softkey 460 Y12 softkey 460 Y21 softkey 460 Y22 softkey 460 Z Z softkey 456 Z parameter 115 Z parameters 459 Z S11 softkey 457 Z S12 softkey 457 Z S21 softkey 457 Z S22 softkey 457 Z Sij tab 456 Z11 softkey 460 Z12 softkey 460 Z21 softkey 460 Z22 softkey 460 Zero Delay at Marker 550 Zoom Max 480 Min 480 Overview Select 480 Start 480 Stop 480 Zo...

Search results

Summary of Contents for ZNB20

Reviews:

Related manuals for ZNB20

Brands by name

Popular brands

Rohde & Schwarz ZNB20, User Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for ZNB20

Reviews:

Related manuals for ZNB20

Brands by name

Popular brands